Home

User's Manual of WGSW-20160HP

1. lt 21 Digits Email From lt 128 Digits lt A Digits lt 128 Digits lt 128 Dis Figure 4 2 17 SMTP Configuration Page Screenshot Object Description e SMTP Mode Controls whether SMTP is enabled on this switch e SMTP Server Type the SMTP server name or the IP address of the SMTP server e SMTP Port Set port number of SMTP service e SMTP Authentication Controls whether SMTP authentication is enabled If authentication is required when an e mail is sent Authentication User Name Type the user name for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable Authentication Password Type the password for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable E mail From Type the sender s E mail address This address is used for reply e mails E mail Subject Type the subject title of the e mail E mail 1 To Buttons E mail 2 To Type the receiver s e mail address est Send a test mail to mail server to check this account is available or not Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 69 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 2 15 Web Firmware Upgrade This Page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch The Web Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 18 appears Firmware Upload Figure 4 2 18 Web Firmware Upgrade Page Screenshot To open Firmware Upgrade screen per
2. v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v pre pr PES PES PES Pps pr PES 9 pr PES PES pr pre PES PES Pps o Figure 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row e Rate The allowed values are 0 3276700 in pps or 0 100 200 300 1000000 in kbps e Unit Specify the rate unit The allowed values are pps packets per second kbps Kbits per second Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 224 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 11 Authentication This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch includes the user access and management control The Authentication section contains links to the following main topics m IEEE 802 1X Port Based Network Access Control m MAC Based Authentication m User Authentication Overview of 802 1X Port Based Authentication In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The switch acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Ov
3. Discard Discard Discard Discard Discard Discard Discard Discard Discard Discard Discard Discard Discard Discard CNPC CH CO CM HH OY A EN EM CD EM ENEN E CNPC MPH EM NH EH NPN EEN NH EN EN EN KEENAN fa fg i fe fi i fe fa KKKK KK KKK KK KK KK KKK KK KKKK KK KKK KK KK KK KK KKK Discard Figure 4 4 1 Port Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description Port This is the logical port number for this row e Port Description Indicates the per port description Link The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and 89 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP red that it is down e Current Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port e Configured Link Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode a Auto Setup Auto negotiation for copper interface a 10Mbps HDX Force sets 10Mbps Half Duplex mode a 10Mbps FDX Force sets 10Mbps Full Duplex mode a 100Mbps HDX Force sets 100Mbps Half Duplex mode a 100Mbps FDX Force sets 100Mbps Full Duplex mode a 1Gbps FDX Force sets 10000Mbps Full Duplex mode a Disable Shutdown the port manually e Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected on a port this section indicates the flow control c
4. default MAC address zero lt vid gt First VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 373 MAC Statistics Description Show MAC address table statistics Syntax MAC Statistics lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports MAC Flush Description Flush all learned entries Syntax MAC Flush 374 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 5 VLAN Configuration Command VLAN Configuration Description Show VLAN configuration Syntax VLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports VLAV PVID Description Set or show the port VLAN ID Syntax VLAN PVID lt port_list gt lt vid gt none Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt vid gt none Port VLAN ID 1 4095 or none default Show port VLAN ID Default Setting 1 375 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP VLAN Frame Type Description Set or show the port VLAN frame type Syntax VLAN FrameType lt port_list gt all tagged Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports all Allow tagged and untagged frames tagged Allow tagged frames only default Show accepted frame types Default Setting All VLAN Ingress Filter Description Set or show the port VLAN ingress filter Syntax VLAN IngressFilter lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port
5. Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP ACK Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP URG Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care 220 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP m Ethernet Type Parameters The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type Ethernet Type is selected Object Description e EtherType Filter Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE Any No EtherType filter is specified EtherType filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE you can enter a specific EtherType value A field for entering a EtherType value appears e Ethernet Type Value When Specific is selected for the EtherType filter you can enter a specific EtherType value The allowed range is 0x600 to OXFFFF but excluding 0x800 IPv4 Ox806 ARP and Ox86DD IPv6 A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to
6. Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 58 4 2 6 NTP Configuration User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Configure NTP on this Page NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP data grams as transport layer You can specify NTP Servers and set GMT Time zone The NTP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 8 appears Time Zone Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Server 4 NTP Configuration Disabled y GMT 0 Casablanca Monrovia Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London pool ntp org europe pool ntp org north america pool ntp org asia pool ntp org oceania pool ntp org Figure 4 2 8 NTP Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the NTP mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable NTP mode operation When enable NTP mode operation the agent forward and to transfer NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain E Disabled Disable NTP mode operation e Time Zone Allow select the time zone according to current location of switch e Server Buttons Save Click to save changes Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to
7. Power Over Ethernet Schedule EIA Week Day Start Hour Start Min End Hour End Min Reboot Enable Reboot Only Reboot Hour Reboot Min Add New Rule E PoE Schedule PoE Reboot 00h Oth 02h 03h 04h 05h 06h 07h 08h 09h 10h 11h 12h 13h 14h 15h 16h 17h 18h 19h 20h 21h 22h 23h 00h Figure 4 16 5 PoE Schedule Screenshot Please press Add New Rule button to start set PoE Schedule function You have to set PoE schedule to profile then go back to PoE Port Configuration and select Schedule mode from per port PoE Mode option then you can indicate which schedule profile could be apply to the PoE port The page includes the following fields 325 Object User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Description e Profile Set the schedule profile mode Possible porifles are Profile1 Profile2 Profile3 Profile4 e Week Day Allows user to set week day for defining PoE function should be enabled on the day e Start Hour Allows user to set what hour does PoE function enables e Start Min Allows user to set what minute does PoE function enables e End Hour Allows user to set what hour does PoE function disables e End Min Allows user to set what minute does PoE function disables e Reboot Enable Allows user to enable or disable whole PoE port reboot by PoE reboot schedule Please be noticed that if you want to PoE schedule and PoE reboot schedule work at the same time please use this function
8. System Information Contact Name WGSW 20160HP Hardware MAC Address 00 30 4f 00 00 01 57 0 C 134 0 F System Date 1970 01 01 Thu 00 04 32 00 00 System Uptime 0d 00 04 32 Software Version 1 0b121226 Software Date 2012 12 26T07 39 08 0800 Auto refresh C Figure 4 2 1 System Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Contact The system contact configured in Configuration System Information System Contact e Name The system name configured in Configuration System Information System Name e Location The system location configured in Configuration System Information System Location e MAC Address The MAC Address of this Managed Switch e Temperature Indicate main chipset temperature e System Date The current GMT system time and date The system time is obtained through the configured SNTP Server if any e System Uptime The period of time the device has been operational e Software Version The software version of the Managed Switch e Software Date The date when the Managed Switch software was produced Buttons Auto refresh E Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page any changes made locally will be undone 51 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 2 2 IP Configuration The IP Configuration includes the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway
9. and provides file writing and reading It also provides directory service and security features IGMP snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web WWW HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands For example when you enter a URL in your browser this actually sends an HTTP command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested Web Page The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML which covers how Web Pages are formatted and displayed Any Web server machine contains in addition to the Web Page files it can serve an HTTP daemon a program that is designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive The Web browser is an HTTP client sending requests to server machines An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control
10. Buttons Save Click to save changes User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Renew Click to renew DHCP This button is only available if DHCP is enabled 4 2 3 IPv6 Configuration Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this Page The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration The Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration The screen in Figure 4 2 3 appears Auto Configuration IPv6 Configuration E F pl Link Local Address fe80 230 4ff fe11 2255 Figure 4 2 3 IPv6 Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Auto Configuration Enable IPv6 auto configuration by checking this box If fails the configured IPv6 address is zero The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds the total time needed to complete auto configuration can be significantly longer e Address Provide the IPv6 address of this Managed Switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 addr
11. Buttons Translate Dynamic to Static Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 287 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 12 13 ARP Inspection Static Table This Page provides Static ARP Inspection Table The Static ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4 12 13 appears The Page includes the following fields Static ARP Inspection Table Figure 4 12 13 Static ARP Inspection Table Screen Page Screenshot Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets IP Address Buttons Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets Add New Entry Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 288 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 13 Address Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The stat
12. Rx Access dot1xAuthBackendAcce Challenges ssChallenges 244 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch receives the first request from the backend server following the first response from the supplicant Indicates that the backend server has communication with the switch MAC based Counts all Access Challenges received from the backend server for this port left most table or client right most User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Tx Other Requests Auth Successes Auth Failures Responses dot1xAuthBackendOther Requests ToSupplicant dot1xAuthBackendAuth Successes dot1xAuthBackendAuth Fails dot1xAuthBackendResp onses table 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch sends an EAP Request packet following the first to the supplicant Indicates that the backend server chose an EAP method MAC based Not applicable 802 1X and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a success indication Indicates that the supplicant client has successfully authenticated to the backend server 802 1X and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a failure message This indicates that the supplicant client has not authenticated to the backend server 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch attempts to send a supplicant s first response packet to the backend server Indicates th
13. Show ARP inspection configuration Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration Security Network ARP Inspection Mode Description Set or show ARP inspection mode Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable ARP Inspection disable Disable ARP Inspection Default Setting disable 435 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode Description Set or show the ARP Inspection port mode Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable ARP Inspection port disable Disable ARP Inspection port default Show ARP Inspection port mode Default Setting Disable Security Network ARP Inspection Entry Description Add or delete ARP inspection static entry Syntax User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network ARP Inspection Entry lt port_list gt add delete lt vid gt lt allowed_mac gt lt allowed_ip gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port ARP inspection static entry delete Delete existing port ARP inspection static entry lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt allowed_mac gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XXXXXXXXXXXX X is a hexadecimal digit MAC address allowed for doing ARP request lt allowed_ip
14. Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header 108 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP HM 802 10 VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field When a packet s Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 10 standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLAN can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained 802 1Q Tag User Priority CFI VLAN ID VID 3 bits 1 bits 12 bits TPID Tag Protocol Identifier TCI Tag Control Information 2 bytes Preamble Destination Source VLAN TAG Ethernet Data FCS Address Address Type 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 46 1500 bytes 4 by
15. Support MLD Snooping v1 and v2 NH Querier mode support m IGMP Snooping port filtering MLD Snooping port filtering Multicast VLAN Registration MVR support gt Security E IEEE 802 1x Port Based MAC Based network access authentication Build in RADIUS client to co operate with the RADIUS servers m TACACS login users access authentication E RADIUS TACACS users access authentication 26 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP m P Based Access Control List ACL m MAC Based Access Control List Source MAC IP address binding m DHCP Snooping to filter untrusted DHCP messages m Dynamic ARP Inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC address to IP address binding IP Source Guard prevents IP spoofing attacks m Auto DoS rule to defend DoS attack m P address access management to prevent unauthorized intruder Management NH Switch Management Interfaces Console Telnet Command Line Interface Web switch management SNMP v1 v2c and v3 switch management SSH SSL secure access E Four RMON groups history statistics alarms and events m Pv6 IP Address NTP DNS management m Built in Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP client E BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment m Firmware upload download via HTTP TFTP m DHCP Relay m DHCP Option82 m User Privilege levels control m NTP Network Time Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Protocol Cable Diagnostic technology provides the mechanism to detec
16. VLAN 1 20 MAN Service Provider Domain WGSW Series Q in Q A ina AN Backbone Core Switch VLAN 1 30 WGSW Series MAN Edge Switch Customer B s LAN Q in Q VLAN Tunnel Factory Customer B s LAN Headquater The Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN Metro Access Network space One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers VLANs This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN related VID for frames entering the MAN When leaving the MAN the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer related VID is again available This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8 where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports This way the MAC table requirements is reduced 113 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP VLAN Port Configuration The VL
17. autojauthorized unauthorized single multi macbased Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Port based 802 1X Authentication authorized Port access is allowed unauthorized Port access is not allowed single Single Host 802 1X Authentication multi Multiple Host 802 1X Authentication macbased Switch authenticates on behalf of the client default Show 802 1X state Default Setting none Security Network NAS Reauthentication Description Set or show Reauthentication state Syntax Security Network NAS Reauthentication enable disable Parameters enable Enable reauthentication disable Disable reauthentication default Show current reauthentication mode Default Setting disable 418 Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod Description Set or show the period between reauthentication attempts Syntax Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod lt reauth_period gt Parameters lt reauth_period gt Period between reauthentication attempts 1 3600 seconds default Show current reauthentication period Default Setting 3600 Security Network NAS EapolTimeout Description Set or show the time between EAPOL retransmissions Syntax Security Network NAS EapolTimeout lt eapol_timeout gt Parameters lt eapol_timeout gt Time between EAPOL retransmissions 1 65535 seconds default Show current EAPOL retransmission timeout Default Setting 30
18. device Frame Income Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged Frame Leave Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Tag is removed Frame remain untagged Table 4 6 1 Ingress Egress port with VLAN VID Tag Untag table MI IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Q in Q IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network A service provider s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overlap and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096 112 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Customer A s LAN Q in Q VLAN Tunnel Customer A s LAN Headquarter Branch Office MAN Edge Switch
19. lt oid_subtree gt The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view Security Switch SNMP View Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 view entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Security Switch SNMP View Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 view entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 406 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch SNMP Access Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 access entry The entry index key are lt group_name gt lt security_model gt and lt security_level gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Add lt group_name gt lt security_model gt lt security_level gt lt read_view_name gt lt write_view_name gt Parameters lt group_name gt A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt security_model gt any Accepted any security model v1 v2c usm v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM lt security_level gt noAuthNoPriv None authentication and none privacy AuthNoPriv Authentication and none privacy AuthPriv Authentication and privacy lt read_view_name gt The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may req
20. 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 464 LLDPMED Port Policies Description Set or show LLDP MED port polcies Syntax LLDPMED port policies lt port_list gt lt policy_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt policy_list gt List of policies to delete LLDPMED Coordinates Description Set or show LLDP MED Location Syntax LLDPMED Coordinates lt tude_type gt lt direction gt coordinate_value Parameters lt tude_type gt The tude_type parameter takes the following values User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP latitude Latitude O to 90 degrees with max 4 digits Positive numbers are north of the equator and negative numbers are south of the equator longitude Longitude O to 180 degrees with max 4 digits Positive values are East of the prime meridian and negative numbers are West of the prime meridian altitude Altitude 32767 to 32767 Meters or floors with max 4 digits lt direction gt The direction parameter takes the following values North North Valid for latitude South South Valid for latitude West West Valid for longitude East East Valid for longitude Meters Meters Valid for altitude Floor Floor Valid for altitude coordinate_value Coordinate value 465 LLDPMED Datum Description Set or show LLDP MED Coordinates map datum Syntax
21. 419 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network NAS Agetime Description Time in seconds between check for activity on successfully authenticated MAC addresses Syntax Security Network NAS Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt Time between checks 10 1000000 seconds default Show current age time Default Setting 300 Security Network NAS Holdtime Description Time in seconds before a MAC address that failed authentication gets a new authentication chance Syntax Security Network NAS Holdtime lt hold_time gt Parameters lt hold_time gt Time on hold 10 1000000 seconds default Show current hold time Default Setting 10 420 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network NAS RADIUS QoS Description Set or show either global state use the global keyword or per port state of RADIUS assigned QoS Syntax Security Network NAS RADIUS_QoS global lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters global Select the global RADIUS assigned QoS setting lt port_list gt Select the per port RADIUS assigned QoS setting default Show current per port RADIUS assigned QoS state enable Enable RADIUS assigned QoS either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable RADIUS assigned QoS either globally or on one or more ports default Show current RADIUS assigned QoS state Default Setting disable Security Network NAS RADIUS
22. All v The total number of entries is 2 for the given level Start from ID 1 with 20 entries per page Info 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 09 00 00 Switch just made a cold boot Info 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 13 00 00 Link up on port 23 Figure 4 2 14 System Log Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry Level The level of the system log entry The following level types are supported E Info Information level of the system log E Warning Warning level of the system log E Error Error level of the system log E All All levels Clear Level To clear the system log entry level The following level types are supported E Info Information level of the system log E Warning Warning level of the system log E Error Error level of the system log E All All levels Time The time of the system log entry Buttons Message The message of the system log entry Auto refresh E Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Updates the system log entries starting from the current entry ID Flushes the selected log entries Hides the selected log entries cad Downloads the selected log entries 66 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e Updates the system log entries starting from the first available entry ID lt lt Updates the system log e
23. BIDA 2 8 Blpp B Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard A 3 10 100Mbps 10 100Base TX When connecting your Switch to another Fast Ethernet switch a bridge or a hub a straight or crossover cable is necessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ 45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments RJ 45 Connector pin assignment MDI MDI X Media Dependant Interface Media Dependant Interface Cross a o Oe ee 2 wet e Ooo o o The standard cable RJ 45 pin assignment 6 3 21 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The standard RJ 45 receptacle connector There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection Straight Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 Crossover Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown Figure A 1 Straigh
24. Bridge ID 15 Port 2 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 B E c Bridge ID 30 Bridge ID 20 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 A LAN 2 _ gt A LAN 3 _ gt Figure 4 7 2 Before Applying the STA Rules In this example only the default STP values are used A C Root Bridge Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port c Designated Bridge A LAN 2 gt 4a AN3 ___ gt Figure 4 7 3 After Applying the STA Rules 141 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 20 000 on switch A are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both switch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 200 000 Gigabit ports could be used but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link 4 7 2 STP System Configuration This Page allows you to configure STP system settings The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch or switch Stack The Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols Compatiable Spannin
25. Object Description e Timeout The Timeout which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not received within the subinterval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead e Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are Object Description o The RADIUS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box IP Ad
26. PING Length keyword lt ping_length gt Ping ICMP data length 2 1452 Default is 56 excluding MAC IP and ICMP headers count PING Count keyword lt ping_count gt Transmit ECHO_REQUEST packet count 1 60 Default is 5 interval PING Interval keyword lt ping_interval gt Ping interval 0 30 Default is 0 360 IP DNS Description Set or show the DNS server address Syntax IP DNS lt ip_addr gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Showdne IP address Default Setting 0 0 0 0 IP DNS Proxy Description Set or show the IP DNS Proxy mode Syntax IP DNS_Proxy enable disable Parameters enable Enable DNS Proxy disable Disable DNS Proxy Default Setting disable 361 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IPv6 AUTOCINFIG Description Set or show the IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Syntax IP IPv6 AUTOCONFIG enable disable Parameters enable Enable IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode disable Disable IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Default Setting disable IPv6 Setup Description Set or show the IPv6 setup Syntax IP IPv6 Setup lt ipv6_addr gt lt ipv6_prefix gt lt ipv6_router gt Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example f
27. Parameters lt event_id gt Event ID 1 65535 Security Switch RMON Event Lookup Description Show RMON Event entries Syntax Security Switch RMON Event Lookup lt event_id gt Parameters lt event_id gt Event ID 1 65535 412 Security Network Psec Switch Description Show Port Security status Syntax Security Network Psec Switch lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Security Network Psec Port Description Show MAC Addresses learned by Port Security Syntax Security Network Psec Port lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Security Network Limit Configuration Description Show Limit Control configuration Syntax Security Network Limit Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 413 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network Limit Mode Description Set or show global state Syntax Security Network Limit Mode enable disable Parameters enable Globally enable port security disable Globally disable port security default Show current global enabledness of port security limit control Default Setting disable Security Network Limit Aging Description Set or show aging state Syntax Security Network Limit Aging enable disable Parameters enable Enable agi
28. Show ports which are down default Show all ports Port Mode Description Set or show the port speed and duplex mode Syntax Port Mode lt port_list gt auto 10hdx 10fdx 100hdx 100fdx 1000fdx 1000x_ams 1000x Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Auto negotiation of speed and duplex 10hdx 10 Mbps half duplex 10fdx 10 Mbps full duplex 100hdx 100 Mbps half duplex 100fdx 100 Mbps full duplex 1000fdx 1 Gbps full duplex 1000x_ams 1000BASE X with automatic media sense 1000x 1000BASE X default Show configured and current mode Default Setting Auto 366 Port Flow Control Description Set or show the port flow control mode Syntax Port Flow Control lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable flow control disable Disable flow control default Show flow control mode Default Setting Disable Port State Description Set or show the port administrative state Syntax Port State lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port disable Disable port default Show administrative mode Default Setting Enable 367 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Port Maximum Frame Description Set or show the port maximum frame size S
29. VLAN 1 and IP Address 0 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page VLAN 1D IP Address MAC Address No more entries Auto refresh E Refresh lt lt gt gt Figure 4 13 4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Screenshot Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic IP Source Guard table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table The Start from port address VLAN IP address and IP mask input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic IP Source Guard Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address 293 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this part
30. for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries 237 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP a VLAN ID or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs gt VLAN Membership and VLAN Port Pages These Pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following criteria are used The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group ID attributes must all be present at least
31. 1 4095 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports VCL MAC based VLAN Delete Description Delete VCL MAC based VLAN entry Syntax VCL Macvlan Del lt mac_addr gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX 521 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP VCL Stasus Description Show VCL MAC based VLAN users configuration Syntax VCL Status combined static nas all Parameters combined static nas all VCL User VCL Protocol based VLAN Add Ethernet Il Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN Ethernet l protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Eth2 lt ether_type gt arpliplipxlat lt group_id gt Parameters lt ether_type gt arp ip ipx at Ether Type 0x0600 OxFFFF lt group_id gt Protocol group ID VCL Protocol based VLAN Add SNAP Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN SNAP protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Snap lt oui gt rfc_1042 snap_8021h lt pid gt lt group_id gt Parameters lt oui gt rfc_1042 snap_8021h OUI value Hexadecimal 00 00 00 to FF FF FF lt pid gt PID value Ox0 OxFFFF If OUI is 00 00 00 valid range of PID is from 0x0600 OxFFFF lt group_id gt Protocol group ID 522 VCL Protocol based VLAN Add LLC Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN LLC protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Llc lt dsap gt lt ssap g
32. 132 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP New Entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table w c 3 Oo jun o Save Click to save changes y Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values f Auto refresh i i Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds h a Click to refresh the Page immediately 4 6 14 Protocol based VLAN This Page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name unique for each Group mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the switch The Protocol based VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 20 appears Protocol to Group Mapping Table No Group entry found Add New Entry Reset Auto refresh C Refresh Figure 4 6 20 Protocol to Group Mapping Table Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values 1 Ethernet 2 LLC 3 SNAP Note On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected e Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the the preceding Frame Type selection menu Below is the criteria for thre
33. 61 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agent s MAC address The DHCP Relay Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 11 appears DHCP Relay Configuration Relay Mode Relay Server Relay Information Mode Relay Information Policy Figure 4 2 11 DHCP Relay Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Relay Mode Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable DHCP relay mode operation When enable DHCP relay mode operation the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t flood for security considered E Disabled Disable DHCP relay mode operation e Relay Server Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address ADHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain e Relay Information Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation Possible modes Mode are E Enabled Enable DHCP relay information mode operation When enable DHCP relay information mode operation the agent insert specific information option82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and remove it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works under DHCP relay oper
34. DSCP TOS and Tag Priority Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High for individual application QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List It is the list table of QCEs containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class QL In SyncE this is the Quality Level of a given clock source This is received on a port in a SSM indicating the quality of the clock received in the port QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data including high quality video and delay sensitive data such as real time voice Networks must provide secure predictable measurable and sometimes guaranteed services Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end to end business solution Therefore QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources Every incoming frame is classified to a QoS class which is used throughout the device for providing queuing scheduling and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific QoS class There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and p
35. Details Fae on 10 1 1 26 FAE on planet m FAE_Files on 10 1 1 26 fileMKT_Public on file My Ne Figure 4 2 10 UPnP devices shows on Windows My Network Places 4 2 8 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP Relay on this Page DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options E Circuit ID option 1 m Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number
36. Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Redirect Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are redirected to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port redirect operation is disabled e Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled e CPU Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU e CPU Once Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame e Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Buttons rl Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page 210 4 10 2 Access Control List User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Configuration This Page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol cannot be edite
37. IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 IPMC VLAN Delete Description Delete the IPMC snooping VLAN interface Syntax IPMC VLAN Delete mldligmp lt vid gt Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 512 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IPMC State Description Set or show the IPMC snooping state for VLAN Syntax IPMC State mld igmp lt vid gt enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs enable Enable MLD snooping disable Disable MLD snooping Default Setting disable IPMC Querier Description Set or show the IPMC snooping querier mode for VLAN Syntax IPMC Querier mld igmp lt vid gt enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs enable Enable MLD querier disable Disable MLD querier Default Setting enable 513 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IPMC Compatibility Description Set or show the IPMC Compatibility Syntax IPMC Compatibility mld igmp lt vid gt auto v1 v2 v3 Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs auto v1 v2 v3 auto Auto Compatibility Default Val
38. New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C is herewith confirmed to comply with the requirements set out in the Council Directive on the Approximation of the Laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive on 2004 108 EC For the evaluation regarding the EMC the following standards were applied EN 55022 2006 A 1 2007 A2 2010 Class A EN 61000 3 2 2006 A1 2009 A2 2009 EN 61000 3 3 2008 EN 55024 2010 IEC 61000 4 2 2008 IEC 61000 4 3 2006 A1 2007 A2 2010 TEC 61000 4 4 2004 A1 2010 IEC 61000 4 5 2005 IEC 61000 4 6 2008 IEC 61000 4 8 2009 IEC 61000 4 11 2004 Responsible for marking this declaration if the Manufacturer O Authorized representative established within the EU Authorized representative established within the EU if applicable Company Name Planet Technology Corp Company Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Person responsible for making this declaration Name Surname Kent Kang Position Title Product Manager Taiwan 31 Jan 2013 M lod Place Date egal Signature PLANET TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION e mail sales planet com tw http www planet com tw 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528
39. PLANET Networking Communication User s Manual 16 Port Gigabit 802 3at PoE 4G TP SFP Combo Managed Switch gt WGSW 20160HP AAVA AE ELMENA PEA EET ERREN NANA y i FJI FIJI www PLANET com tw User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Trademarks Copyright O PLANET Technology Corp 2013 Contents subject to which revision without prior notice PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp All other trademarks belong to their respective owners Disclaimer PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and makes no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User s Manual is accurate PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User s Manual PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the right to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice If you find information in this manual that is inco
40. QoS Port Storm Unicast Description Set or show the port storm rate limiter for unicast frames Syntax QoS Storm Unicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable storm policing of unicast frames disable Disable storm policing of unicast frames lt rate gt Rate in kbps or fps 100 13200000 kbps Unit is kilo bits per second fps Unit is frames per second Default Setting disable 485 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QoS Port Storm Multicast Description Set or show the port storm rate limiter for broadcast frames Syntax QoS Storm Multicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable storm policing of broadcast frames disable Disable storm policing of broadcast frames lt rate gt Rate in kbps or fps 100 13200000 kbps Unit is kilo bits per second fps Unit is frames per second Default Setting disable QoS Port Storm Broadcast Description Set or show the broadcast storm rate limiter The limiter will only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present in the MAC Address table Syntax QoS Storm Broadcast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable broadcast storm control disable Disable broadcast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in fps 1 2
41. Reset Figure 4 3 3 System Information Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 e System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is 0 to 255 e System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 82 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 5 SNMPv3 Configuration 4 3 5 1 SNMPv3 Communities Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this Page The entry index key is Community The SNMPv3 Communities screen in Figure 4 3 4 appears SNMPv3 Community Configuration public private Figure 4 3 4 SNMPv3 Com
42. Switch SNMP Engine ID ccoo a iia 401 Security Switch SNMP Community Add 0 eee ceeeceee sence ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeesnaeeeeseaaeeeseeeeeeeeneesenaeeeseeaeees 402 Security Switch SNMP Community Delete o oooioccccnnnocccccnonaccno nono nonono nono nono cnn rro rn cnn nan nr rra rra rra 402 Security Switch SNMP Community LO0KUP oooocococcccnnnoccnonononanononcnonnnonnnn nono nono ron n cnn nan r rr rnnn rn 402 11 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch SNMP User Add eeeecceeesseeeceeeceeeenneeeeeeaeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeseaaeeeseeeeeeeesaeeeeneaaeeeseeeaeeseeeesenaeeeeeeaeess 403 Security Switch SNMP User Delete huinn na eaea naaa Ane anaa e NE AAS ERAAN AAA EE AEA E aaae 403 Security Switch SNMP User Changekey c occcoooccccnococcconocononononcnnnononcnnno tutkin utek Anat n nn rra nn rre rre 404 Security Switch SNMP User Lookup ooooooocccococcccnoncccnononcnonononono nono tnnt non n rr nano nn aran n rra 404 Security Switch SNMP Group Add ssri nono cnn ron n cnn E E A TEA E rre 405 Security Switch SNMP Group Delete ii 405 Security Switch SNMP Group LOOKUP oooooccccococcconononcnononcnonononcnn non nnnn no non n non nn nr non n rre rn rre ren rnrnnn 405 Security Switch SNMP View Add coccion 406 Security Switch SNMP View Delete 0coooooniiocnii Ei 406 Security Switch SNMP View Lookup coooooocccococccononcccnononcncnnno nono noc nnn nan tutkun At rro 406 Security Switch SNMP Access Add tirita alica 407 Secu
43. The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration Fill up the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device The screen in Figure 4 2 2 appears IP Configuration DHCP Client O IP Address 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 IP Router 192 168 0 1 192 168 0 1 VLAN ID 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IP DNS Proxy Configuration Figure 4 2 2 IP Configuration Page Screenshot The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration Object Description e DHCP Client Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup e IP Address Provide the IP address of this Managed Switch in dotted decimal notation e IP Mask Provide the IP mask of this Managed Switch dotted decimal notation e IP Router Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation e VLAN ID Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 through 4095 e DNS Server Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation e DNS Proxy When DNS proxy is enabled DUT will relay DNS requests to the current configured DNS server on DUT and reply as a DNS resolver to the client device on the network 52
44. User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP This Page shows the QoS Control List QCL which is made up of the QCEs Each row describes a QCE that is defined The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list The QoS Control List screen in Figure 4 9 12 appears Qos Control List Configuration Action QCE Port Frame Type SMAC DMAC VID PCP Figure 4 9 12 QoS Control List Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e QCE Indicates the index of QCE e Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE e Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames e SMAC Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address i e first three octet byte of MAC address e DMAC Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame Possible values are Any All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed Unicast Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed Multicast Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed Broadcast Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowedd The defa
45. User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 15 4 Cable Diagnostics This Page is used for running the Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the Page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running cable diagnostic Therefore running cable diagnastic on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the Page header The VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics screen in Figure 4 15 4 appears VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Port All Cable Status Port Description Pair A 1 2 Length A Pair B 3 6 Length B Pair C 4 5 Length C Pair D 7 8 Length D Figure 4 15 4 VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Page Screenshot 315 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics e Description Display per port description e Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair OK Correctly terminated pair Open Open pair Short Shorted pair Short A Cross pair short to pair A
46. and don t use Reboot Only function This function offers administrator to reboot PoE device at indicate time if administrator has this kind of requirement e Reboot Only Allows user to reboot PoE function by PoE reboot schedule Please be noticed that if administrator enable this function PoE schedule will not to set time to profile This function just ony for PoE port reset on the indicate time e Reboot Hour e Reboot Min Buttons Add New Rule Save Click to save changes Delete Check to delete the entry Allows user to set what hour PoE reboots This function only for PoE reboot schedule Allows user to set what minute PoE reboots This function only for PoE reboot schedule click to add new rule 326 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 16 6 LLDP PoE Neighbours This page provides a status overview for all LLDP PoE neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP PoE neighbor is detected The columns hold the following information The screen in Figure 4 16 6 appears LLDP Neighbour Power Over Ethernet Information Local Port Power Type No PoE neighbour information found Auto refresh C Figure 4 16 6 LLDP PoE Neighbour Screenshot Please be noticed that administrator has to enable LLDP port from LLDP configuration please refer to following example The screen in Figure 4 16 7 appears we enabled LLDP function from port1 ro port3 admini
47. either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new MLD join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group The MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 13 appears MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Figure 4 8 13 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e Filtering Group The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered e Add New Filtering Click Add New Filtering Group to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Group Specify the Port and Filtering Group of the new entry Click Save Buttons Add new Filtering Group Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 172 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 8 11 MLD Snooping Status This Page provides MLD Snooping status The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4 8 14 appears Auto refresh E Refresh Clear MLD Snooping Status Statistics VLAN Querier Host Querier Queries Queries V1 Reports V2 Reports V1 Leaves ID Version Version Status Tra
48. gt By Services B Terminal Server Licensing Terminal Services Configuration start ega SP Terminal Services Manager F Accessories E Internet Explor 7 Startup 8 Internet Explorer ES Outlook Express s Remote Assistance fa Administrative Tools I IxChariot F Ethereal All Programs User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP we 9 13PM Figure 4 11 15 Windows 2003 AD Server Setting Path 7 Enter Active Directory Users and Computers create legal user data the next right click a user what you created to enter properties and what to be noticed 264 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP New Object User x e Create in ca test pc Users First name test Initials Last name Full name test User logon name test ca test pe y User logon name pre Windows 2000 cas test Cancel Figure 4 11 16 Add User Properties Screen New Object User l x e Create in ca test pc Users Password eseses Confirm password eseses J User must change password at next logon JV User cannot change password IV Password never expires J Account is disabled lt Back Cancel Figure 4 11 17 Add User Properties Screen Set the Ports Authenticate Status to Force Authorized if the port is connected to the RADIUS server or the port is a uplink port that is connected to another switch Or once the 802 1X stat to work the switch might not
49. 1 1 1 1 1 1 CH EM CH OH CH E EA E EEE OE EA EM CO EN ENEE EE EEE EE EEN E E ERE EEN EM ES Figure 4 6 10 Port 1 Port 6 VLAN Configuration 126 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 6 10 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware switch The most cases are used for Uplink to other switches VLANs are separated at different switches but they need to access with other switches within the same VLAN group The screen in Figure 4 6 11 appears a eee mm ee oe o ee Y SN Y a i PC 2 PC 3 i PC 5 PCS i Untagged Tagged 1 i Untagged Tagged y i gg i Ch l pes l i l 1 I 1 l l I 1 I 1 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 l 802 1Q VLAN Trunking l VLAN 2 VLAN 3 I I I I 1 i 1 l I I e a 1 l l I i 1 l l l I 1 l l a l PC 1 PC 4 l i Untagged i Untagged y I d 4 n d A Setup steps 1 Create VLAN Group Set VLAN Group 1 Default VLAN with VID VLAN ID 1 Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 VLAN Group 2 with VID 2 VLAN Group 3 with VID 3 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports Port 7 Port 10 About the VLAN ports connect to the hosts please refer to 4 6 10 1 examples The following steps will focus on the VLAN Trunk port configuration 127 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 1 Specify Port 8 to be t
50. 10 groups The switch supports the most frequently used group 1 2 3 and 9 NW Statistics Maintain basic usage and error statistics for each subnet monitored by the Agent E History Record periodical statistic samples available from Statistics E Alarm Allow management console users to set any count or integer for sample intervals and alert thresholds for RMON Agent records E Event A list of all events generated by RMON Agent Alarm depends on the implementation of Event Statistics and History display some current or history subnet statistics Alarm and Event provide a method to monitor any integer data change in the network and provide some alerts upon abnormal events sending Trap or record in logs 4 18 1 RMON Alarm Configuration Configure RMON Alarm table on this Page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 18 1 appears RMON Alarm Configuration A Sample Startup Rising Rising Falling Falling Figure 4 18 1 RMON Alarm configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold The range is from 1 to 2431 1 e Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled the possible variables are E InOctets The total
51. 100 1000Base T Combo Port Port 17 to Port 20 Color Function LED 1000 To indicate the link through that port is successfully established at 1000Mbps LNK ACT To indicate that the Switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port To indicate the link through that port is successfully established at 10Mbps or 10 100 100Mbps LNK ACT To indicate that the Switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port 32 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Ml Per 100 1000Mbps SFP Combo Interface Port 17 to Port 20 LED Function To indicate the port is successfully established at 1000Mbps 1000 LNK ACT To indicate that the Switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port To indicate the port is successfully established at 100Mbps 100 LNK ACT Orange uli ee l ZR To indicate that the Switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port 2 1 3 Switch Rear Panel The rear panel of the Managed Switch indicates an AC inlet power socket which accepts input power from 100 to 240V AC 50 60Hz Figure 2 3 shows the rear panel of the Managed Switch WGSW 20160HP Rear Panel Figure 2 3 Rear Panel of WGSW 20160HP Ml AC Power Receptacle For compatibility with electric service in most areas of the world the Managed Switch s power supply automatically adjusts to line power in the range 100 240V AC and 50 60 Hz Plug the female end of the power cord firmly into the receptalbe o
52. 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 999 999 Trunk 1 000 000 Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 Full Duplex Trunk Table 4 7 2 Recommended STP Path Costs Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1w 2001 Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 000 000 Trunk 500 000 Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 Full Duplex Trunk Table 4 7 3 Default STP Path Costs 147 4 7 5 MSTI Priorities User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP This Page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well The MSTI Priority screen in Figure 4 7 7 appears The Page includes the following fields MSTI Configuration MSTI Priority Configuration Figure 4 7 7 MSTI Priority Page Screenshot Description Object e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active e Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numerical values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 148 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 7 6 MSTI Configuration This Page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them
53. 2 21 System Reboot The Reboot Page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location Once the Reboot button is pressed user have to re login the WEB interface about 60 seconds later the System Reboot screen in Figure 4 2 28 appears Restart Device Are you sure you want to perform a Restart Figure 4 2 28 System Reboot Page Screenshot Buttons Yes Click to reboot the system No Click to return to the Port State Page without reboot the system a You can also check the SYS LED at the front panel to identify the System is load completely or not If the Es SYS LED is blinking then it is in the firmware load stage if the SYS LED light on you can use the WEB LN browser to login the Managed Switch 77 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocol 4 3 1 SNMP Overview The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol suite SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth An SNMP managed network consists of three key components Network management stations NMSs SNMP agents Management information base MIB and network management protocol o Network management stations NMSs Sometimes called consoles
54. 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP SSM Information Table The Start from VLAN and Group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP SSM Information Table The IGMPv3 Information screen in Figure 4 8 10 appears IGMP SFM Information Auto refresh O Start from VLAN 1 and Group 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page LAN ID Source Address Type Hardware Filter Switch No more entries Figure 4 8 10 IGMP SSM Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed 167 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis lt can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny e Hardware Filter Switch Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv4 address could be handled by chip or not Buttons i Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refr
55. 20160HP 4 8 8 MLD Snooping Configuration icedi iride nn nn nn anar rre rre 169 4 8 9 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration ooooccncnncnnnoncccnononnnnnononcnnnonn nn nnn nn rr nono rra rre 170 4 8 10 MLD Snooping Port Group Filterig ooonnonnnnnccnnnncccnnnnoncnnnonccnnononn nono no cnn rnon cnn nn rr rre 172 4 8 11 MLD SACO Status tetas 173 4 8 1 MLD Group IO MAN iii een end Mae ee ee see ee ee 174 4 8 13 MLDv2 Information baca dt A e 175 4 8 14 MVR Multicaset VLAN Registrati0M oooooonocnnnnnccnnnoccccnonocnnnnonnccnnnono nc nono n nn rn n nn nano nr rra rre 176 4 83 15 MVR Status crudos sete het e tacto eras cdo od ea dd OS cad a ed ed o A dd el ed 179 4 8 16 MVR Groups Information cito A A acess tbeetensuteeees 180 4 8 17 MVR SFM Informatica ie 181 4 9 Quality Of SOMViCe ui te dae cate Ear et aaae ra Pause aaa en a de aeaa aaa tae ieai inaani 183 4 9 Understand QOS iii A iaa 183 dl MEE AEE TEE T A TnS A A E T TE 184 4 9 3 Port Classification x nenne a ein oe ail ee we ei AE 185 4 9 4 Port Schedule ria eco daa 187 49 5 Port Shapiro ori 188 4 9 5 1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers oooccccncccccnnoccccccnnoncnnnnnnncnnnncncnnnn cnn rnonn nn naar rn rr narrar r nn rnn rn 189 4 9 6 Port Tag Remarking de eiii 190 4 9 6 1 QoS Egress Port Tag RemarkinQ oooonoccccnnnocccononocnnononcncnannnnn nono cnn nn nn nn nano nn rn rn rr a rra rra rr 191 O27 Pot DS COP so eras one rel e Sek E E E sele le o OE dde ete AAN Go 1
56. 4 5 3 Aggregation Group Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port e Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Buttons Save Click to save changes Rese Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 101 4 5 2 LACP Configuration User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device LACP allows switches connected to each other to discover automatically whether any ports are member of the same LAG This Page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well The LACP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the Page header The LACP Configuration screen in Figure 4 5 4 appears LACP Port Configuration oon ON F amp F WH o Figure 4 5 4 The Page includes the following fields Object KAWAK EM EI DPN HO E EM EN E Description lt All gt Active Active
57. 527 SMTPA th pass iio 527 SMTP Mail Fron sseceitas tess Sess ccna aire ss e enel eo e seee e celo o cl dde see ao a dde ce Danes o 528 SMTP Mall SUBE o ee ae 528 SMTP Mail to Li EA asias 528 SMTP Mail to 2 seach tied Ss i ease Baie on a RS a heed Se ee ees ee 528 V SWITCH OPERATION 6 sessisscicedcisscitssavsscceverscececesecacedesscedetedscadedeisiedetedecedsdaiicndedsdacedsieisinisieas 529 19 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP TABA ES Ma ii 529 AA E E E E E E A A 529 7 3 Forwarding amp Filtering s issranretnnressedondnuanennnnnnennarananen neni arinn rr 529 TE ES eae A A E E A T 529 7 5 Auto NegotiationN oicocioocociinniconicaniio licenciada ic cbc ac erain rrna dada 530 8 Power over Ethernet Overview ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 531 9 TROUBLE SHOOTIN G sario n a shay any stn e Ron ERA Renee say shakaney eters A aAA AEA iaaa aiai 533 APPENDEX A Networking COnmection ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 535 A 1 PoE RJ 45 Port Pin ASSignMentS mccmnnncccnnnnnccnnncrcenrr nnmnnn nanne nnmnnn nnn 535 A 2 Switch s Data RJ 45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000 Base T ccccsecsseeeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeneeeeeeeess 535 A 3 1O 1O00MDpS 10 100Base TX oi essa vedeucdecadetussnvcsucuecttetesscusdencerrddeessitdsscuredtetescs 535 APPENDEX B GLOSSA A Yiacuiiiianiaa anuar aranana naana M anaanakau daana adatai uaaa aiaiai 537 20 User s
58. By default port isolation is disabled on all ports Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 123 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 6 10 VLAN setting example a Separate VLAN a 802 1Q VLAN Trunk a Port Isolate 4 6 10 1 Two separate 802 1Q VLAN The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handle Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs VLAN Group 2 and VLAN Group 3 are separated VLAN Each VLAN isolate network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members The screen in Figure 4 6 8 appears and Table 4 6 9 describes the port configuration of the Managed Switches a a oo awww e e wm wm e e e e e Y e a eee ee eee eee ee eee eee ee mK ke E E E E E E E E E E E EEY ore wm wm em ew e e e e e PC 1 PC 2 PC 3 Untagged Untagged Tagged Untagged Untagged Tagged VLAN 2 VLAN 3 e s 4 Te eneee e eee eee ee Figure 4 6 8 Two Separate VLAN Diagram VLAN Group 1 1 Port 7 Port 10 N A VLAN Group 2 2 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 VLAN Group 3 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Table 4 1 VLAN and Port Configuration The scenario described as follow E Untagged packet entering VLAN 2 1 While PC 1 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 1 the Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 2 PC 2 and PC 3 will received
59. Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 18 8 RMON History Detail This Page provides an detail of RMON history entries screen in Figure 4 18 8 appears Detailed RMON History ID v Auto refresh L SampleStart Drops Octets Pkts Broadcast Multicast CRC Alignment Undersize Oversize Fragments Jabber Collisions Utilization 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 18 8 RMON History Detail Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e History Index Indicates the index of History control entry e Sample Index Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry e Sample Start The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources Drops The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network e Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received 340 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e Broadcast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address e Multicast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast a
60. Default Setting 4 494 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP UPnP Advertising Duration Description Set or show UPnP Advertising Duration Syntax UPnP Advertising Duration lt duration gt Parameters lt duration gt duration range 100 86400 default Show UPnP duration range Default Setting 100 495 6 19 MVR Command MVR Configuration Description Show the MVR configuration Syntax MVR Configuration MVR Mode Description Set or show the MVR mode Syntax MVR Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable MVR mode disable Disable MVR mode default Show MVR mode Default Setting disable MVR VLAN Setup Description Set or show per MVR VLAN configuration Syntax MVR VLAN Setup lt mvid gt add del upd Name lt mvr_name gt Parameters lt mvid gt MVR VLAN ID 1 4095 add Add operation del Delete operation upd Update operation name MVR Name keyword lt mvr_name gt MVR VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters 496 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP MVR VLAN Mode Description Set or show per MVR VLAN mode Syntax MVR VLAN Mode lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt dynamic compatible Parameters lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt MVR VLAN ID 1 4095 or Name Maximum of 32 characters dynamic Dynamic MVR mode compatible Compatible MVR mode default Show MVR VLAN mode MVR VLAN
61. Enable or disable SMTP configure Syntax SMTP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SMTP mode disable Disable SMTP mode default Show SMTP mode SMTP Server Description Set or show SMTP server configure Syntax SMTP Server lt server gt lt port gt Parameters lt server gt SMTP server address lt port gt SMTP server port 526 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP SMTP Auth Description Enable or disable SMTP authentication configure Syntax SMTP Auth enable disable Parameters enable Enable SMTP authentication disable Disable SMTP authentication default Show SMTP authentication SMTP Auth_user Description Set or show SMTP authentication user name configure Syntax SMTP Auth_user lt auth_user_text gt Parameters lt auth_user_text gt SMTP authentication user name SMTP Auth_pass Description Set or show SMTP authentication password configure Syntax SMTP Auth_pass lt auth_pass_text gt Parameters lt auth_pass_text gt SMTP authentication password 527 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP SMTP Mail From Description Set or show SMTP E mail from configure Syntax SMTP Mailfrom lt mailfrom_text gt Parameters lt mailfrom_text gt SMTP E mail from address SMTP Mail Subject Description Set or show SMTP E mail subject configure Syntax SMTP Mailsubject lt mailsubject_text gt Parameters lt mailsubjec
62. Enabled 453 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 10 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Command LACP Configuration Description Show LACP configuration Syntax LACP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports LACP Mode Description Set or show LACP mode Syntax LACP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable LACP protocol disable Disable LACP protocol default Show LACP mode Default Setting disable 454 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP LACP Key Description Set or show the LACP key Syntax LACP Key lt port_list gt lt key gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt key gt LACP key 1 65535 or auto Default Setting auto LACP Priority Description Set or show the LACP prio Syntax LACP Prio lt port_list gt lt prio gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt prio gt LACP Prio 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 455 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP LACP System Priority Description Set or show the LACP System prio Syntax LACP System Prio lt sysprio gt Parameters lt sysprio gt LACP System Prio 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 LACP Role Description Set or show the LACP role Syntax LACP Role lt port_
63. Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table The IGMP Groups Informatino screen in Figure 4 8 9 appears IGMP Snooping Group Information Auto refresh C Refresh lt lt Start from VLAN 1 and group Address 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page Port Members D 2 van 10 crowns 29 95 0 9 2JojaJojo oJrofeoa No more entries SS No more entries Figure 4 8 9 IGMP Snooping Groups Information Page Screenshot 166 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group address of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons Auto refresh Ch Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields Lk lt Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 8 7 IGMPv3 Information Entries in the IGMP SSM Information Table are shown on this Page The IGMP SSM Information Table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port No Diffrent source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP SSM Source Specific Multicast Information table default being
64. Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Default 30 seconds This attribute must comply with the following rule Transmission Interval Hold Time Multiplier lt 65536 and Transmission Interval gt 4 Delay Interval e Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times TTL in seconds is based on the following rule Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier lt 65536 Therefore the default TTL is 4 30 120 seconds e Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds This attribute must comply with the rule 4 Delay Interval lt Transmission Interval e Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP
65. Leave Proxy inea A e eee 510 PMO POA aa is a hove nd eee abies 511 IPME S SS AE E A N A TE E E A E eee 511 IPME VEAN Add a e ects Soh toca cand A a o la s 512 IPMC VLAN Delete iii id 512 IRMG State sustos e a e a e e EN 513 IPMC QUEEN cuca iii o 513 IPMC Compatibility ooooonoonnconnonnonnocnn sees scesaeesaeeseensnenseaesecegeceaeesasesaecesesssedeeeneeenesaneeceseseeeces 514 IPMC Fastleave ic A cad 514 A 515 IPMG Filterind coincida tidad tada ta 515 IRMG ROUTE Ps mc 2 it cccot todo coto de els he tai nd coi cedido ocn es dd nda llo o il de dd od o dd 516 18 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IPMC Status ci a 516 PMC Groups ni re 517 IPMG Versions id ete abide eee la 517 TRG SEM EE i ts ie ate ar MEN A hE SN AA eh Aa ah ads MN Ne Ais dd ds 517 IPMC Parameter RV tii A A ee ee eed 518 IPMC Parameter Ol sce cnc heed A he A tae bate oa Ae ates 518 IPMC Parameter QR lt ccs6e ics cote caicactes acbonteeccaneten adhebasboueecneacenentyverenshuesetddeattpheaieadnes auboeteeceanshes st acicate 519 IPMG Parameter LLO coco A tt 519 IPMC Parameter URI iii dd aia 520 6 23 VLAN Control List COMMaANd ncoonnnccccnonnnnncnrr cr 521 VCL MAC based VLAN Configuration ooooonncnnnncccnnnoccnononccnnononcncnnno nn nr nono untk En n rr nnnn rre 521 VGIEIMAG based VLAN Addict llana 521 VCL MAC based VLAN Delete cecccecececeesceeseeeseeeeeeseeceaeceaecaaecaeecaeesaeeececeeesaeeeeeseaesaeseaeseaesaeseceeseaeseeeeaeeaes 521 V
66. MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XXXXXXXXXXXX X S a hexadecimal digit or any ARP keyword Source IP address a b c d n or any Destination IP address a b c d n or any ARP operation code anylarp rarp other ARP flags request smac tmac len ip ether 0 1 any IP keyword IP protocol number 0 255 or any IP flags ttlloptions fragment 0 1 any ICMP keyword ICMP type number 0 255 or any ICMP code number 0 255 or any UDP keyword Source UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or any Destination UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or any TCP keyword TCP flags fin syn rst psh ack urg 0 1 any Permit forwarding default Deny forwarding Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable Port number for copy of frames or disable System logging of frames log log_disable Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable 426 Security Network ACL Delete Description Delete ACE Syntax Security Network ACL Delete lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 512 Security Network ACL Lookup Description Show ACE default All ACEs Syntax Security Network ACL Lookup lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 512 Security Network ACL Clear Description Clear all ACL counters Syntax Security Network ACL Clear 427 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Se
67. Manual of WGSW 20160HP 1 INTRODUTION The PLANET 16 Port 10 100 1000Mbps 802 3at PoE 4 Port Gigabit TP SFP Combo Managed Switch WGSW 20160HFP it is all multiple ports Gigabit Ethernet Switched with SFP fiber optical connective ability and robust layer 2 features the description of this model shown as below WGSW 20160HP 16 Port 10 100 1000Mbps 802 3at PoE 4 Port Gigabit TP SFP Combo Managed Switch Terms of Managed Switch means the Switch mentioned titled in the cover Page of this user s manual i e WGSW 20160HP 1 1 Packet Contents Open the box of the Managed Switch and carefully unpack it The box should contain the following items Check the contents of your package for following parts M The Managed Switch x1 User s Manual CD x1 M Quick Installation Guide x1 M RS 232 DB9 Male Console Cable x1 M Rubber Feet x4 M Rack Mount Accessory Kit x1 M Power Cord x1 If any of these are missing or damaged please contact your dealer immediately if possible retain the carton including the original packing material and use them against to repack the product in case there is a need to return it to us for repair 1 2 Product Description Cost effective IPv6 Managed Gigabit Switch solution for SMB Nowadays lots of electronic products or mobile devices can browse the Internet which means the need of IP Address increases However the current IPv4 network infrastructure is not capable enough to provide IP Address to e
68. Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index The VLAN membership configuration for the selected stack switch unit switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 255 VLANs are supported This Page allows for adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN The VLAN Membership screen in Figure 4 6 3 appears VLAN Membership Configuration Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page Refresh lt lt gt gt Port Members E TO rs Delete ViANID vianname 2 4 5 6 soxs x2 sa 4 is aela7 ie io z0 1 defaut MAn EM A A A A A 1 A 11 Add New VLAN Reset Figure 4 6 3 VLAN Membership Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted on all Managed Switch units during the next Save e VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e VLAN Name Indicates the name of the VLAN Maximum length of the VLAN Name String is 32 VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet VLAN name can be edited for the existing VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box as TA To include a port in a forbidden
69. Name Password Password again Privilege Level EDE Figure 4 2 5 Add Edit User Configuration Page Screenshot i 4 The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Username A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 31 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and underscores e Password The password of the user The allowed string length is 1 to 31 e Privilege Level The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups i e that is granted the fully control of the device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the 55 2 Ml 3 Oo o ve User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values i Delete User
70. PCP Der tag Class DscP Based lt All gt w lt All gt y lt All gt w lt All gt 0 0 e e lz y y 9 9 919 9 S 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 OE O EC EE Figure 4 9 2 QoS Ingress Port Classification Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e QoS Class Controls the default QoS class i e the QoS class for frames not classified in any other way There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority 185 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority Note If the QoS class has been dynamically changed then the actual QoS class is shown in parentheses after the configured QoS class e DP Level Controls the default Drop Precedence Level i e the DP level for frames not classified in any other way e PCP Controls the default PCP for untagged frames e DEI Controls the default DEI for untagged frames e Tag Class Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port Disabled Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and or mapping e DSCP Based Buttons Save Click to save changes Click to Enable DSCP B
71. PHY capabilities Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh Cl Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 307 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 14 5 Neighbor This Page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4 14 4 appears LLDP Neighbour Information Local Port Chassis ID Remote Port ID System Name Port Description System Capabilities Management Address No LLDP neighbour information found Auto refresh O Figure 4 14 4 LLDP Neighbor Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields e Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames e Remote Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port e System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit e Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit e System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 Other Repeater Bridge WLAN Access Point 2 3 4 5 Router 6 Telephone 7 DOCSIS cable device 8 Station only 9 Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability
72. Port Description Set or show per MVR VLAN port role Syntax MVR VLAN Port lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt lt port_list gt source receiver inactive Parameters lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt MVR VLAN ID 1 4095 or Name Maximum of 32 characters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports source MVR source port receiver MVR receiver port inactive Disable MVR default Show MVR port role 497 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP MVR VLAN LLQI Description Set or show per MVR VLAN LLQI Last Listener Query Interval Syntax MVR VLAN LLQI lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt mvr_param_llqi Parameters lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt MVR VLAN ID 1 4095 or Name Maximum of 32 characters mvr_param_llqi 1 Default Value 5 0 31744 Last Listener Query Interval in tenths of seconds default Show MVR Interface Last Listener Query Interval MVR VLAN Channel Description Set or show per MVR VLAN channel Syntax MVR VLAN Channel lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt add del upd channel channel_bound Name lt grp_name gt Parameters lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt MVR VLAN ID 1 4095 or Name Maximum of 32 characters add Add operation del Delete operation upd Update operation channel IPv4 IPv6 multicast group address channel_bound The boundary IPv4 IPv6 multicast group address for the channel name MVR Name keyword lt grp_name gt MVR Channel name Maximum of 32
73. Protocol TCP 541 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP connection to a particular port on a remote host port 80 by default An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape s Secure Socket Layer SSL as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer TCP IP SSL uses a 40 bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol that generated the error response diagnostic or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time stamp or echo transactions For example the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet connection IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port based Network Access Control It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port establishing a point to point connection or preventing access from that port if authent
74. QoS Ingress Classification 54 55 56 C57 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 O O O O O O O O O O Figure 4 9 9 DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification Page Screenshot 194 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields Object Description e DSCP Maximum number of support ed DSCP values are 64 e Trust Controls whether a specific DSCP value is trusted Only frames with trusted DSCP values are mapped to a specific QoS class and Drop Precedence Level Frames with untrusted DSCP values are treated as a non IP frame e QoS Class QoS Class value can be any of 0 7 e DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 1 Buttons Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 195 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 9 9 DSCP Translation This Page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress The DSCP Translation screen in Figure 4 9 10 appears Reman DPO Remap DPI lt All gt lt All gt 0 BE 0 BE 1 1 ENET ET EKTET ETET 8 CS1 8 CS1 9 9 10 AF11 10 AF11 11 11 12 AF12 12 AF12 13 13 14 AF13 14 AF13 15 15 16 CS2 16 CS2 17 17
75. Restore Default keep_ip Parameters keep_ip Keep IP configuration default Restore full configuration System Load Description Show current CPU load 100ms 1s and 10s running average in percent zero is idle Syntax System Load 358 6 2 IP Command IP Configuration Description Show IP configuration Syntax IP Configuration IP DHCP Description Set or show the DHCP client mode Syntax IP DHCP enableldisable Parameters enable Enable or renew DHCP client disable Disable DHCP client Default Setting Disable 359 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IP Setup Description Set or show the IP setup Syntax IP Setup lt ip_addr gt lt ip_mask gt lt ip_router gt lt vid gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address lt ip_mask gt IP subnet mask a b c d default Show IP mask lt ip_router gt IP router a b c d default Show IP router lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show VLAN ID Default Setting IP Address 192 168 0 100 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Router 192 168 0 1 DNS Server 0 0 0 0 VLAN ID 21 IP Ping Description Ping IP address ICMP echo Syntax IP Ping lt ip_addr_string gt Length lt ping_length gt Count lt ping_count gt Interval lt ping_interval gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IPv4 host address a b c d or a host name string length
76. Screenshot Description Object e Mode Indicates the server mode operation When the mode operation is enabled the syslog message will send out to syslog server The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledgments back sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments The syslog packet will always send out even if the syslog server does not exist Possible modes are E Enabled Enable remote syslog mode operation E Disabled Disable remote syslog mode operation e Syslog Server IP Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server If the switch provide DNS feature it also can be a host name e Syslog Level Indicates what kind of message will send to syslog server Possible modes are E Info Send informations warnings and errors E Warning Send warnings and errors E Error Send errors Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 68 4 2 14 SMTP Configuration User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP This Page facilitates a SMTP Configure the switch The SMTP Configure screen in Figure 4 2 17 appears The Page includes the following fields SMTP Configuration SMTP Mode O Enable SMTP Server lt 128 Digits SMTP Port 1 65535 SMTP Authentication Authentication User Name lt 64 Digits
77. Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter has enabled port security e State Shows the current state of the port It can take one of four values Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in Shutdown The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web Page e MAC Count The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses Current Limit forwarding as well as blocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user modules are enabled on the port the Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash 278 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately
78. Setting disable 504 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Voice VLAN Security Description Set or show the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds Syntax Voice VLAN Security lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Voice VLAN security mode disable Disable Voice VLAN security mode default Show flow Voice VLAN security mode Default Setting disable Voice VLAN Discovery Protocol Description Set or show the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol mode It only work under auto detect mode is enabled We should enable LLDP feature before configure discovery protocol to LLDP or Both Change discovery protocol to OUI or LLDP will restart auto detect process Syntax Voice VLAN Discovery Protocol lt port_list gt ouillldp both Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports OUI Detect telephony device by OUI address LLDP Detect telephony device by LLDP Both Both OUI and LLDP default Show Voice VLAN discovery protocol Default Setting OUI 505 6 21 Loop Protect Command Loop Protect Configuration Description Show Loop Protection configuration Syntax Loop Protect Configuration Loop Protect Mode Description Set or show the Loop Protection mode Syntax Loop Protect Mode enabl
79. Setting 5 Configure ports attribute of 802 1X the same as 802 1X Port Configuration RADIUS Assigned RADIUS Assigned Guest Port based 8021X vw Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize 2 Porttased 8021X v F 7 Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Remitali Figure 4 11 14 802 1x Port Configuration 6 Create user data The establishment of the user data needs to be created on the Radius Server PC For example the Radius Server founded on Win2003 Server and then 263 gt Shortcut to sg Active Directory Domains and Trusts Network Er Active Directory Sites and Services s and Computers EJ Certification Authority Es Cluster Administrator pr My Cor gt Component Services a Computer Management gt Control 3 Configure Your Server Wizard Pas Data Sources ODBC pig Adminis f Distributed File System A s gt Ka Printers 1 ONS Domain Controller Security Policy fev Windows Explorer Y ds Y Help an 6 Domain Security Policy o T Event Viewer Sear e HyperTerminal Internet Authentication Service 25 Windows Catalog Ethereal YY Windows Update ta Internet Information Services 115 Manager Licensing gt Manage Your Server gt Se Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Configuration En Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Wizards A Network Load Balancing Manager KE Performance gt t Remote Desktops gt 3 Routing and Remote Access
80. Source Guard port limitation for dynamic entries Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard limit lt port_list gt lt dynamic_entry_limit gt unlimited Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dynamic_entry_limit gt unlimited dynamic entry limit 0 2 or unlimited Default Setting unlimited Security Network IP Source Guard Entry Description Add or delete IP source guard static entry Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Entry lt port_list gt add delete lt vid gt lt allowed_ip gt lt allowed_mac gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port IP source guard static entry delete Delete existing port IP source guard static entry lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt allowed_ip gt IPv4 address a b c d IP address allowed for doing IP source guard lt ip_mask gt IPv4 mask a b c d IP mask for allowed IP address Security Network IP Source Guard Status Description Show IP source guard static and dynamic entries Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 434 Security Network IP Source Guard Translation Description Translate IP source guard dynamic entries into static entries Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Translation Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration Description
81. The packets number that relayed from client to server e Transmit Error The packets number that errors sending packets to clients e Receive from Server The packets number that received packets from server e Receive Missing Agent The packets number that received packets without agent information options Option e Receive Missing The packets number that received packets which the Circuit ID option was Circuit ID missing e Receive Missing The packets number that received packets which Remote ID option was missing Remote ID e Receive Bad Circuit ID The packets number that the Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID e Receive Bad Remote The packets number that the Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID ID 63 Client Statistics Object User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Description Transmit to Client The packets number that relayed packets from server to client Transmit Error The packets number that error sending packets to servers Receive from Client The packets number that received packets from server Receive Agent Option The packets number that received packets with relay agent information option e Replace Agent Option The packets number that replaced received packets with relay agent information option e Keep Agent Optin The packets number that keepped received packets with relay agent information option e Drop Agent Option The packets num
82. VID to MSTI mapping STP MSTI Add Description Add a VLAN single or range to a MSTI Syntax STP Msti Add lt msti gt lt vid range gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt vid range gt Single VLAN ID 1 4095 or xx yy VLAN ID range 446 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP STP Port Configuration Description Show STP Port configuration Syntax STP Port Configuration lt stp_port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations STP Port Mode Description Set or show the STP enabling for a port Syntax STP Port Mode lt stp_port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations Enable Enable MSTP protocol Disable Disable MSTP protocol Default disable STP Port Edge Description Set or show the STP adminEdge port parameter Syntax STP Port Edge lt stp_port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Enable Configure MSTP adminEdge to Edge Disable Configure MSTP adminEdge to Non edge Default disable 447 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP STP Port AutoEdge Description Set or show the STP autoEdge port parameter Syntax STP Port AutoEdge lt stp_port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Enab
83. VLAN ID 1 4095 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete Description Delete VCL protocol based VLAN group to VLAN mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Vlan Delete lt port_list gt lt group_id gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt group_id gt Protocol group ID 524 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP VCL Protocol based VLAN Configuration Description Show VCL protocol based VLAN entries Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Conf VCL IP based VLAN Configuration Description Show VCL IP Subnet based VLAN configuration Syntax VCL IPVlan Configuration lt vce_id gt Parameters lt vce_id gt Unique VCE ID for each VCL entry VCL IP based VLAN Add Description Add or modify VCL IP Subnet based VLAN entry Syntax VCL IPVlan Add lt vce_id gt lt ip_addr_mask gt lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vce_id gt Unique VCE ID for each VCL entry lt ip_addr_mask gt Source IP address and mask Format a b c d n lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports VCL IP based VLAN Delete Description Delete VCL IP Subnet based VLAN entry Syntax VCL IPVlan Delete lt vce_id gt Parameters lt vce_id gt Unique VCE ID for each VCL entry 525 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 24 SMTP Command SMTP Configuration Description Show SMTP configure Syntax SMTP Configuration SMTP Mode Description
84. and protocol address length PLN settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address space HRD settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 Any Any value is allowed don t care e Ethernet E IP Parameters Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP protocol address space PRO settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 1 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 Any Any value is allowed don t care The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type IPv4 is selected Object Description e IP Protocol Filter Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE Any No IP protocol filter is specified don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears ICMP Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file UDP Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames Extr
85. are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items m Ping m IPv6 Ping m Remote IP Ping m Cable Diagnostics PING The ping and IPv6 ping allow you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues The Managed Switch transmit ICMP packets and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply Cable Diagnostics The Cable Diagnostics performing tests on copper cables These functions have the ability to identify the cable length and operating conditions and to isolate a variety of common faults that can occur on the Cat5 twisted pair cabling There might be two statuses as follow m If the link is established on the twisted pair interface in 1000Base T mode the Cable Diagnostics can run without disruption of the link or of any data transfer m If the link is established in 100Base TX or 10Base T the Cable Diagnostics cause the link to drop while the diagnostics are running After the diagnostics are finished the link is reestablished And the following functions are available Coupling between cable pairs m Cable pair termination m Cable Length 311 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 15 1 Ping This Page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues After you press Start 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The Page r
86. as well The MSTI Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 8 appears MSTI Configuration Add VLANs separated by spaces or comma Unmapped VLANs are mapped to the CIST The default bridge instance Configuration Identification Name 00 30 4f 10 02 00 MSTI Mapping MSTI LANs Mapped Figure 4 7 8 MSTI Configuration Page Screenshot 149 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields Configuration Identification Object Description e Configuration Name The name identifiying the VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as well as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters e Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI configuration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 MSTI Mapping Object Description e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped e VLANs Mapped The list of VLAN s mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI A unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 150 User s Manual
87. be able to access the RADIUS server 265 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 11 10 802 1X Client Configuration Windows XP is originally 802 1X support As to other operating systems windows 98SE ME 2000 an 802 1X client utility is needed The following procedures show how to configure 802 1X Authentication in Windows XP Please note that if you want to change the 802 1x authentication type of a wireless client i e switch to EAP TLS from EAP MD5 you must remove the current existing wireless network from your preferred connection first and add it in again Configure Sample EAP MD5 Authentication 1 Go to Start gt Control Panel double click on Network Connections 2 Right click on the Local Network Connection 3 Click Properties to open up the Properties setting window 3COM 3C940 Status cc General Support Connection Status Connected Duration 03 35 37 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Received 146 938 760 110 212 126 Figure 4 11 18 4 Select Authentication tab 5 Select Enable network access control using IEEE 802 1X to enable 802 1x authentication 6 Select MD 5 Challenge from the drop down list box for EAP type 266 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 3COM 3C940 Properties General Authentication Advanced Select this option to provide authenticated network access for Ethernet networks Enable IEEE 802 1 authentication for this network E
88. carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection ee devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that 0 does not support VLAN tagging Hi VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame 110 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP M Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on th
89. ccoo noc nnnnno cnn crono rca ran n nn rar rre rra 429 Security Network DHCP Relay Server ccoo ii ii 429 Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode ooooccccnnoncnnnoccccnononcnonono nono nono nonn nono nn nana nn rn n rra rar 430 Security Network DHCP Relay Information PoliCY oooooconnnnnnnnnicnnnnocccnnonannnonocnona nono n crono rr rra rre 430 Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics oooonnoninncnnnnnniccnonoccnnnonccnnnnonnnn nono nnnrnnrn cnn ano nr nnnn rn rn 431 Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration oooocccnnnnnnnnoccccnononnncnonancno nono nc nano nor rnnnn rn rra n cnn rre 431 Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode cooocccccoccccconoccncnononcnononcncnanoncncnnno cnn rn nn nn nnnn rr rra rra 431 Security Network DHCP Snooping Port MoOde ooococonoccccconocnnononcncnononcnc nono nnn nooo nn nano nr rr nano rre 432 Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics ooooonnnncnnononiconoccccnnnonnncnonannnnnorn cnn nn tutkin at cnn rra 432 Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration oonmocccninnnnnnnococcnononnnononannnnnnrn cnn ono untiin nt rra rn 433 Security Network IP Source Guard Mode ooooocccccocccccononcncnononcnononcccnnnonnn crono nn rra n cnn rre ren rre 433 Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode oocococccnnoccccnonocnnononononanoncnn nono cnn nao n nn nano rn rn rra 433 Security Network IP Source Guard Limit ooooooccnnnccccnnnacoccnonacnnononcnonnnon cnn nono cnn ron nn naar nr rr narrar
90. cipher Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP used by networked computers clients to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway subnet mask and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique for example no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client s assignment is valid its lease has not expired Therefore IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator 539 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address DHCP Relay DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP pa
91. data as source ports Subscribers cannot be directly connected to source ports NE Receiver Configure a port as a receiver port if it is a subscriber port and should only receive multicast data It does not receive data unless it becomes a member of the multicast group by issuing IGMP MLD messages Be Caution MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management VLAN ports Select the port role by clicking the Role symbol to switch the setting indicates Inactive S indicates Source R indicates Receiver The default Role is Inactive e Immediate Leave Enable the fast leave on the port 178 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Buttons Add New MVR VLAN Click to add new MVR VLAN Specify the VID and configure the new entry Click Save Save Click to save changes Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 15 MVR Status This Page provides MVR status The MVR Status screen in Figure 4 8 18 appears MVR Statistics VLAN ID IGMP MLD IGMP MLD IGMPyv1 IGMP 2 MLDv1 IGMPvy3 MLDv2 IGMP 2 MLDv1 Queries Received Queries Transmitted Joins Received Reports Received Reports Received Leaves Received No more entries Auto refresh C Figure 4 8 18 MVR Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The Multicast VLAN ID e IGMP MLD Queries The number of Received Queries for IGMP and
92. delay gt LLDP transmission delay 1 8192 Default Setting 2 LLDP Reinit Description Set or show LLDP reinit delay Syntax LLDP Reinit lt reinit gt Parameters lt reinit gt LLDP reinit delay 1 10 Default Setting 2 460 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP LLDP Statistics Description Show LLDP Statistics Syntax LLDP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear LLDP statistics LLDP Info Description Show LLDP neighbor device information Syntax LLDP Info lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports LLDP CDP Aware Description User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Set or show if discovery information from received CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol frames is added to the LLDP neighbor table Syntax LLDP cdp_aware lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable CDP awareness CDP discovery information is added to the LLDP neighbor table disable Disable CDP awareness default Show CDP awareness configuration 461 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 12 LLDPMED Command LLDPMED Configuration Description Show LLDP MED configuration Syntax LLDPMED Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports LLDPM
93. disable Disable port BPDU Guard Default disable STP Port Statistic Description Show STP port statistics Syntax STP Port Statistics lt stp_port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear the selected port statistics STP Port Mcheck Description Set the STP mCheck Migration Check variable for ports Syntax STP Port Mcheck lt stp_port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 450 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP STP MSTI Port Configuration Description Show the STP port instance configuration Syntax STP Msti Port Configuration lt msti gt lt stp_port_list gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default auto STP MSTI Port Cost Description Set or show the STP port instance path cost Syntax STP Msti Port Cost lt msti gt lt stp_port_list gt lt path_cost gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations lt path_cost gt STP port path cost 1 200000000 or auto Default Auto STP MSTI Port Priority Description Set or show the STP port instance priority Syntax STP Msti Port Priority lt msti gt lt stp_port_list
94. e eis a a do e el 130 4 6 12 MAC based VLAN Status iii isis 131 4 6 13 IP Subnet based VLAN c ccccecececececeeeeeeeseeeseeaecseeeseaecacecacecaceaeesaeesaeeeesaeeeesaeceaecaeecaeseeesaeseaeceeeeasesaeeeneeaes 132 4 6 14 Protocol based VLAN cuina 133 4 6 15 Protocol based VLAN Membership oooococccicocinonoccccnononcnonononcnnnnncnnn nn nn rn naar rca ran n nn rn 135 4 7 Spanning Tree Protocol sidi inikan cido do a dani ondo aan d sousesteccedecs 136 AGW e 136 4 7 2 STP System Configuration A dd 142 413 Bridge SAUS cet 144 4 14 CIST Port Config r tion sosi eei A 145 ALO MST POE A EE ed Mes de 148 4 7 6 METI Congrats cet 149 4 7 1 MST Ports ConfiguratiON niinniin e oc 151 ATI POM Status cito 153 ANO POR Statistics A A dE A A AA ada 155 EM e E nicas 156 4 8 1 IGMP SNOOPING sc sd eee ee eee oe 156 4 8 2 IGMP Snooping Configurations inn a a a ERARA AEE AAE NE o EEAS EAA AAE AAAA Ananaia 160 4 8 3 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configurati0N ooococcononcnonococonononnnonononnnn non nnnn no tutkun untk naut n rre 162 4 8 4 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering ooooonnonnnnnccnnnococcnononcnnnonccnnnnonc no nono cnn rnonn cnn nn nr nn rra rara 163 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping Status vivi ad ibas 165 4 8 6 IGMP Gro pInf rmatio Miss nesr A de 166 4 8 7IGMPY3 INFORMATION Ee eccccsteeucs cote henineceestebettenccanetes adh canpecunasneasebeatevereastuesuh aut pbeeeusucs sxseabprectenetevecrnnstuecenestobeenasaceses 167 User s Manual of WGSW
95. ennnen 366 Port COMP GUPATION espinassa is pt crol 366 Port Mdee A A ed 366 Port Flow Control aaa ia 367 Pod te inicia 367 Port Maximuni Frei loa 368 el eN EENAA EEEE cnc ath anv ecgds te Ves usececavistcebanvsacatssce cdenseraacndaass tease cueatassaeadeva A A TETT 368 Port EXCMO cnt A he i ee ee es 369 Port Statistics uri ns heeded eed Sas A A ee ee ao Ae SE 369 Port Veni HY eteo aa ret cto area ict eet Madea arde acicate dd io 370 Port Descriptio aiite a aa ititata 370 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 4 MAC Address Table Command cdnminiccicccnnninocncrcccc rc 371 MAG Configuration aci 371 IMAG A shoo as Hot as oh te re Ns e EN oat Sula sae anes ane 371 MAG Delete EE EAEE ee E E EN EAE a eh ee eo is ah 371 MAG LOokUp iii heen eta ee Ge ee ee ee es 372 MAG Age TIME ico A oe Se 372 MAC L Gr WING EE cite eaicactenavbotteecccnenenadhbiapbeueaenta sida 373 MAGS DUM Deia Ati 373 MAC Statistics inaa i a tend id 374 MAC ATE ere rere A Pee eee ee 374 6 5 VLAN Configuration Command conmnmiciinccnnninnccr rr 375 VEAN Configuration crias Ati 375 VLAW PV Dn ete Ate A Be cha BN E ht ed ale E E A A ad Mea are H AeA 375 VLAN Frame Ty pein A ee eee 376 VEAN Ingress Filter ooo A 376 MILAN Mode tucan da mada adaptada 377 VEAN Link ype cosas eB locas Seventh abla ta Mend ee dd add aa ed ia te MD a add y A a tl 377 VLAN QQ Mode oo cccceccceccescugecescgecec cece tecegieseedhgecdesdugeescgshe cece teceudesedeednedddeedeedceedhesteecdeesleeededi
96. every 3 seconds e Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table e the entry with the lowest ID gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 18 7 RMON History Configuration Configure RMON History table on this Page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 18 7 appears RMON History Configuration Buckets Detete 10 Data Source Interval buckets Puerta Figure 4 18 7 RMON History Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Data Source Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored If in stacking switch the value must add 1000 switch ID 1 for example if the port is switch 3 port 5 the value is 2005 e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 1800 seconds e Buckets Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 50 e Buckets Granted The number of data shall be saved in the RMON 339 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Buttons Add New Entry
97. fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation When the current connection is HTTPS to apply HTTPS disabled mode operation will automatically redirect web browser to an HTTP connection Possible modes are a Enabled Enable HTTPS mode operation a Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operation e Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation It only significant if HTTPS mode Enabled is selected Automatically redirects web browser to an HTTPS connection when both HTTPS mode and Automatic Redirect are enabled or redirects web browser to an HTTP connection when both are disabled Possible modes are a Enabled Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation a Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 275 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 12 5 SSH Configure SSH on this Page This Page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forward
98. for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Admin State If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following modes are available Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access Port based 802 1X In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the 234 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows fo
99. found in the Ethernet cables and comes from a power supply within a PoE enabled networking device such as an Ethernet switch or can be injected into a cable run with a mid span power supply The original IEEE 802 3af 2003 PoE standard provides up to 15 4 W of DC power minimum 44 V DC and 350mA to each device Only 12 95 W is assured to be available at the powered device as some power is dissipated in the cable The updated IEEE 802 3at 2009 PoE standard also known as PoE or PoE plus provides up to 25 5 W of power The 2009 standard prohibits a powered device from using all four pairs for power The 802 3af 802 3at define two types of source equipment Mid Span and End Span Mid Span Mid Span device is placed between legacy switch and the powered device Mid Span is tap the unused wire pairs 4 5 and 7 8 to carry power the other four is for data transmit End Span End Span device is direct connecting with power device End Span could also tap the wire 1 2 and 3 6 PoE System Architecture The specification of PoE typically requires two devices the Powered Source Equipment PSE and the Powered Device PD The PSE is either an End Span or a Mid Span while the PD is a PoE enabled terminal such as IP Phones Wireless LAN etc Power can be delivered over data pairs or spare pairs of standard CAT 5 cabling Powered Source Equipment PSE Power sourcing equipment PSE is a device such as a switch that provides sources power on the Etherne
100. four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 59 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 2 7 UPnP Configure UPnP on this Page UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components The UPnP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 9 appears UPnP Configuration Advertising Duration Figure 4 2 9 UPnP Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the UPnP operation mode Possible modes are E Enabled Enable UPnP mode operation E Disabled Disable UPnP mode operation When the mode is enabled two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related packets to CPU The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled e TTL The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 e
101. given group The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below Non Member Leave Group Stop Timer Join Group Send Report Start Timer Leave Group Query Received Start Timer Report Received Stop Timer Timer Expried Send report Figure 4 8 4 IGMP State Transitions Delaying Member Idle Member a IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service ga Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as A DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Note 159 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 8 2 IGMP Snooping Configuration This Page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration The IGMP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 5 appears IGMP Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding Enabled IGMP SSM Range Leave Proxy Enabled Proxy Enabled lt AJ gt Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimit
102. gt lt priority gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations lt priority gt STP port priority 0 16 32 48 224 240 Default 128 451 6 9 Link Aggregation Command Aggregation Configuration Description Show link aggregation configuration Syntax Aggr Configuration Aggregation Add Description Add or modify link aggregation Syntax Aggr Add lt port_list gt lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID 1 14 Aggregation Delete Description Delete link aggregation Syntax Aggr Delete lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID 1 14 452 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Aggregation Lookup Description Lookup link aggregation Syntax Aggr Lookup lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID 1 14 Aggregation Mode Description Set or show the link aggregation traffic distribution mode Syntax Aggr Mode smac dmaclip port enable disable Parameters smac Source MAC address dmac _ Destination MAC address ip Source and destination IP address port Source and destination UDP TCP port enable Enable field in traffic distribution disable Disable field in traffic distribution Default Setting SMAC Enabled DMAC Disabled IP Enabled Port
103. gt IPv4 address a b c d IP address allowed for doing ARP request 436 Security Network ARP Inspection Status Description Show ARP inspection static and dynamic entries Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Security Network ARP Inspection Translation Description Translate ARP inspection dynamic entries into static entries Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Translation Security AAA Configuration Description Show Auth configuration Syntax Security AAA Configuration Security AAA Timeout Description Set or show server timeout Syntax Security AAA Timeout lt timeout gt Parameters lt timeout gt Server response timeout 3 3600 seconds default Show server timeout configuration Default Setting 15 437 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security AAA Deadtime Description Set or show server dead time Syntax Security AAA Deadtime lt dead_time gt Parameters lt dead_time gt Time that a server is considered dead if it doesn t answer a request 0 3600 seconds default Show server dead time configuration Default Setting 300 Security AAA RADIUS Description Set or show RADIUS authentication server setup Syntax Security AAA RADIUS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt l
104. helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host LACP is an IEEE 802 3ad standard protocol The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port 543 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP LLDP is an IEEE 802 1ab standard protocol The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities and the identification of the stations point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP LLDP MED is an extendsion of IEEE 802 1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association TIA 1057 LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and is detected by a MEP and is indicating lost connectivity in the network Can be used as a switch criteria by EPS Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address
105. in Figure 4 8 20 appears MVR SFM Information Auto refresh O LAN ID Source Address Hardware Filter Switch Start from VLAN 1 and Group Address E with 20 entries per page No more entries Figure 4 8 20 MVR SFM Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 When there is no any source filtering address the text None is shown in the Source Address field e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny e Hardware Filter Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the Switch source IPv4 IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not 181 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Buttons pe Auto refresh e Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR SFM Information Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 182 User s Manual of
106. inspect the current Loop Protection configurations and possibly change them as well screen in Figure 4 17 1 appears General Settings Enable Loop Protection Disable v Transmission Time 5 Shutdown Time 180 SEES E 88 SSD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 a A A A A YA A Figure 4 17 1 Loop Protection Configuration Page Screenshot 330 The Page includes the following fields General Settings Object User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Description e Enable Loop Protection Controls whether loop protections is enabled as a whole e Transmission Time The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port valid values are 1 to 10 seconds e Shutdown Time Port Configuration The period in seconds for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is detected and the port action shuts down the port Valid values are 0 to 604800 seconds 7 days A value of zero will keep a port disabled until next device restart Object Description e Port The switch port number of the port e Enable Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port e Action Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port Valid values are Shutdown Port Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only e Tx Mode Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU s or whether it is just passively looking for looped PDU s Buttons Sa
107. login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser After setup completed please press Save button to take effect Please login web interface with new user name and password the screen in Figure 4 2 4 appears Users Configuration Privilege Level admin 15 Figure 4 2 4 Users Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e User Name The name identifying the user This is also a link to Add Edit User e Privilege Level The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups i e that is granted the fully control of the 54 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account Buttons Add New User Click to add a new user Add Edit User This Page configures a user add edit or delete user Add User User Settings User
108. login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser This Page provides an overview of the privilege levels Configure NTP on this Page Configure UPnP on this Page Configure DHCP Relay on this Page This Page provides statistics for DHCP relay This Page displays the CPU load using a SVG graph The Managed Switch system log information is provided here The Managed Switch system detailed log information is provided here Configure remote syslog on this Page Configuration SMTP parameters on this Page This Page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the Managed Switch Upgrade the firmware via TFTP server You can save the Managed Switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags You can load the Managed Switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags Configuration active or alternate firmware on this Page You can reset the configuration of the Managed Switch on this Page Only the IP configuration is retained You can restart the Managed Switch on this Page After restart the Managed Switch will boot normally 50 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 2 1 System Information The System Infomation Page provides information for the current device information System Information Page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address software version and system uptime The screen in Figure 4 2 1 appears
109. mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 517 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IPMC Parameter RV Description Set or show the IPMC Robustness Variable Syntax IPMC Parameter RV mld igmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_rv Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_rv 1 Default Value 2 1 255 Robustness Variable default Show IPMC Interface Robustness Variable IPMC Parameter QI Description Set or show the IPMC Query Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter QI mld igmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_qi Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_qdi 1 Default Value 125 1 31744 Query Interval in seconds default Show IPMC Interface Query Interval 518 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IPMC Parameter QRI Description Set or show the IPMC Query Response Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter QRI mld igmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_qri Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_qri 1 Default Value 100 0 31744 Query Response Interval in tenths
110. new device is plugged into a 231 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port e Reauthentication Period Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds e EAPOL Timeout Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are in the range 1 to 65535 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports e Aging Period This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in a 802 1X based mode this is not so criticial since supplicants th
111. number of RADIUS 258 Requests packets sent to the server This does not include retransmissions Tx Retransmissions Tx Pending Requests Tx Timeouts User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS Retransmissions packets retransmitted to the RADIUS accounting server radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS PendingRequests packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when a Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of a Response timeout or retransmission radiusAccClientExt The number of accounting Timeouts timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout e Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name RFC4670 Name Description IP Address IP address and UDP port for the accounting server in question State Shows the state of the server It takes one of 259 the following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is
112. number of octets received on the interface including framing characters E InUcastPkts The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol E nNUcastPkts The number of broad cast and multi cast packets delivered 333 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP to a higher layer protocol E InDiscards The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal E InErrors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol E InUnknownProtos the number of the inbound packets that were discarded because of the unknown or un support protocol E OutOctets The number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters OutUcastPkts The number of uni cast packets that request to transmit OutNUcastPkts The number of broad cast and multi cast packets that request to transmit E OuiDiscards The number of outbound packets that are discarded event the packets is normal E OuiErrors The The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors E OutQLen The length of the output packet queue in packets e Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are E Absolute Get the sample directly E Delta Calculate the difference between samples default e Value The value of the statisti
113. of seconds default Show IPMC Interface Query Response Interval IPMC Parameter LLQI Description Set or show the IPMC Last Listener Query Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter LLQI mldligmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_llqi Parameters mid igmp mid IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_llqi 1 Default Value 10 0 31744 Last Listener Query Interval in tenths of seconds default Show IPMC Interface Last Listener Query Interval 519 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IPMC Parameter URI Description Set or show the IPMC Unsolicited Report Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter URI mld igmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_uri Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_uri 1 Default Value 1 0 31744 Unsolicited Report Interval in seconds default Show IPMC Interface Unsolicited Report Interval 520 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 23 VLAN Control List Command VCL MAC based VLAN Configuration Description Show VCL MAC based VLAN configuration Syntax VCL Macvlan Configuration VCL MAC based VLAN Add Description Add or modify VCL MAC based VLAN entry Syntax VCL Macvlan Add lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX lt vid gt VLAN ID
114. of time between broadcasts of 2 seconds the hello message by the switch Maximum Age Timer Measures the age of a received BPDU fora 20 seconds port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer Forward Delay Timer The amount time spent by a port in the 15 seconds learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Variable Description Default Value Port Priority A relative priority for each 128 port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths 200 000 100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports STP calculates path costs and selects the 20 000 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet path with the minimum cost as the active ports path Default Spanning Tree Configuration Feature Enable state Port priority Port cost Bridge Priority 0 Auto Default Value STP disabled for all ports 128 0 32 768 139 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User Changeable STA Parameters The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows Priority A Priority
115. rn 434 Security Network IP Source Guard Entry icini e nn rr rra ran rre 434 Security Network IP Source Guard StatuUS oooooocnoncccnnnoccccnononnnonononcnnnoncnnnnnn cnn rn uuna nn rr rra 434 Security Network IP Source Guard Translation oooononccnninnciconocccnnnnonnncnononnnnnorn cnn non rr rra rr 435 Security Network ARP Inspection ConfiguratiON oooononccnnnocccnnonccnnononnnnnnnonnnnnorn cnn ono rn rr narran rn rr ren 435 Security Network ARP Inspection Mode ocooocccccoccccnonoccncnononcno nono nc canon nn crono cnn rn n nro rre rra rn rre 435 Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode oocococconnoccccconoccnononoccnononnncnnno cnn nooo nn nano nr rr narran nr 436 Security Network ARP Inspection ENtlY ooooonccnnoccccnnnoccncnonocnnononcncnnnonnnn nono cnn ran nunan nn rr rra 436 Security Network ARP Inspection Status ooooonionnccnnnoccccnonocnnononcncnnnonnn crono cnn nnonn nn nano rr rra rre 437 13 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network ARP Inspection Translation ooooonnnncnnonocicnnoccccnnnonnncnnnannnnnnrn cnn ano nn r nana rn 437 Security AAA Configuration sisese iae aaea ae A EAER EE ANET aAA AEE AEA EA AEAN KE EAEE aaas 437 Security AAA TIMGOUE anng a Gets A c 437 Security AAA Dead Me ia atada 438 Security AAA RADIUS viii Ed has 438 Security AAA ACCT RADIOS ni e ee 439 Security AAATACA O Shica insaciable 439 Security AAA Statistics 440 6 8 Spanning Tree Protocol Command cccccceeccee
116. secure learning age time The allowed range is 10 to 10000000 seconds It used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled In other cases it will based hardware age time The actual age time will be situated in the age_time 2 age_time interval Traffic Class Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class All traffic on Voice VLAN will apply this class Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode Possible port modes are Disabled Disjoin from Voice VLAN Auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached to the specific port and configures the Voice VLAN members automatically Forced Force join to Voice VLAN e Port Security Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds Possible port modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation e Port Discovery Protocol Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol It will only work when auto detect mode is enabled We should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol to LLDP or Both Changing the discovery protocol to OUI or LLDP will restart auto detect process Possible discovery protocols are OUI Detect telephony device by OUI address LLDP Detect telephony device by LLDP Both Both OUI and LLDP 207 User s Manual of WGSW 201
117. set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid 152 values are in the range 1 to 200000000 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost Buttons cer Click to set MSTx configuration Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 8 Port Status This Page displays the STP CIST port status for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Status screen in Figure 4 7 11 appears STP Port Status CIST Role CIST State Uptime Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Auto refresh C Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Figure 4 7 11 STP Port Status Page Screenshot 153 The Page includes the following fields Object User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e CIST Role The current ST
118. the correct platform ID and version The global section is optional and includes configuration which is not related to specific switch ports The switch section is optional and includes configuration which is related to specific switch ports Module tags lt ip gt lt mac gt lt port gt etc These tags identify a module controlling specific parts of the configuration Group tags lt port_table gt lt vlan_table gt etc These tags identify a group of parameters typically a table Parameter tags lt mode gt lt entry gt etc These tags identify parameters for the specific section module and group The lt entry gt tag is used for table entries Configuration parameters are represented as attribute values When saving the configuration from the switch the entire configuration including syntax descriptions is included in the file The file may then be modified using an editor and loaded to a switch The examples below shows a small configuration file only including configuration of the MAC address age time and the learning mode per port When loading this file only the included parameters will be changed This means that the age time will be set to 200 and the learn mode will be set to automatic Save Configuration 1 Press the Save Configuration button to save the current configuration in manager workstation The following screens in Figure 4 2 22 amp 4 2 23 appear 72 User s Manual of WGSW
119. to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 273 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics This Page provides statistics for access management The Access Management Statistics screen in Figure 4 12 3 appears Access Management Statistics Received Packets Allowed Packets Discarded Packets 0 0 HTTP 0 HTTPS SNMP TELNET 0 SSH 0 Auto refresh C Figure 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Interface The interface that allowed remote host can access the switch e Receive Packets The received packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled e Allow Packets The allowed packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled e Discard Packets The discarded packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled Buttons f Auto refresh i i Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately cra J Clear all statistics 274 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 12 4 HTTPs Configure HTTPS on this Page The HTTPS Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 4 appears HTTPS Configuration o Mode Emha y Disabled v Figure 4 12 4 HTTPS Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The Page includes the following
120. undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Canos Return to the previous Page 221 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration Configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE The ACL Ports Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 4 appears ACL Ports Configuration lt All gt lt All gt lt All gt lt All gt lt All gt lt All gt Disabled Disabled Disabled 8 Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled x Disabled Disabled x Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled x Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Enabled a icahle Disabled Enabled iaaa daadaa EEN E EME EM EN EN o0 0 00 000 0 0 00 ENEE EN EN CH EM EN oN ODO ek WN 4 POoocg amp gooqoosd o 4 4 4 Disabled Disabled w Disabled ADE Uy oo oe Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled y Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled w Disabled Disabled Enabled Disab
121. useful for multi tenant unit multi business unit Telcom or Network Service Provide applications It also empowers the enterprises to take full advantages of the limited network resources and guarantees the best performance in VoIP and Video conferencing transmission Efficient Management For efficient management the WGSW 20160HP Managed Switch is equipped with console WEB and SNMP management interfaces With the built in Web based management interface the WGSW 20160HP offers an easy to use platform independent management and configuration facility The WGSW 20160HP supports standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP and can be managed via any standard based management software For text based management the WGSW 20160HP can be accessed via Telnet and the console port Moreover the WGSW 20160HP offers secure remote management by supporting SSH SSL and SNMPv3 connection which encrypt the packet content at each session 22 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Powerful Security The WGSW 20160HP offers comprehensive Layer 2 to Layer 4 Access Control List ACL for enforcing security to the edge It can be used to restrict network access by denying packets based on source and destination IP address TCP UDP ports or defined typical network applications lts protection mechanism also comprises of 802 1x port based and MAC based user and device authentication With the private VLAN function communication between edge ports can be prevented
122. values 204 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 9 14 QoS Statistics This Page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports The QoS Statistics screen in Figure 4 9 16 appears Queuing Counters Auto refresh Refresh Clear 105 107 ls 100 Io Ja 0000000000 gy 00000000daOOy 2000000000 0000000000 0000000000 000000000a 000000 O 00000000 od E og lo c 00000003 ay 00000000 ay A dE 1 Mo lo amp 4 000000000 00000000 ay 4 0000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 N Figure 4 9 16 Queuing Counters Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Q0 Q7 There are 8 QoS queues per port QO is the lowest priority queue e Rx Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Cea Clears the counters for all ports Auto refresh Cl Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals 205 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 9 15 Voice VLAN Configuration The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID corre
123. 0 4 114 Network ACCESS OVe VW a io 240 4 11 5 Network Access Statistics vital ica 242 4 11 6 Authentication Server ConfiguratiON oooccononicnnnncccnnnocnncnononnnn conc cnica no nn nn nnnnn nn rro n nro rr rr 249 4 11 7 RADIUS Overview oi aaa ele iaa 252 4 11 83 RADIUS DetS 225 25 e ea A ee a ee ee 254 4 11 9 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configurati0N ooocccnonnnnnoccccnnnocnncnonannno nono ncnnn nn nn nana nr nn r nn rre 261 4 1410 802 1 Client ConfiQurationy td di titi 266 PA A 269 4 12 1 Port Limit Control einna A iaa 269 4 12 2 Access Management iii bates 273 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics asi ccscccccesagsneteetcs tedesedenesyaceedegtncdd ica 274 ALAD ATA PS AEE eee Neds ed a Me A sh eM go Ad ed A reat Mes eT a 275 4 12 5 SSH eae asad ane ae nee es ee ee ee ei eae Slee 276 4 12 6 Port Security Status ubica pi oda 277 4 12 7 Port Security Detalla ostia 279 4 12 8 DHCP SNOOPiING e332 derids a A eh BA ee eles ant Oe 280 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Statistics srini eiiie dede 281 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration ce ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceenaeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeesneeeseeaeeeseeeeesneeeseenaeeeeeeaeees 283 4 12 11 IP Source Guard Static Table ica 285 AN2ZAZ ARP INSPOCHOM EEE E gases hacks TE cheat aaa 286 4 12 13 ARP Inspection Static Table ic20cidcca oe hid Seen es Sie ets 288 AIS Address Tal ii 289 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration oooocccnnoninonoccccnonocnncnonannnn corn tnnt nn n rr
124. 0 0 1813 State Disabled Round Trip Time Oms Auto refresh C Figure 4 11 9 RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview Page Screenshot 254 The Page includes the following fields User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP RADIUS Authentication Statistics The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Object Description e Packet Counters RADIUS authentication server packet counter There are seven receive and four transmit counters Direction Name RFC4668 Name Description Rx Access radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS Accepts ccessAccepts Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from the server Rx Access Rejects radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS ccessRejects Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from the server Rx Access radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS Challenges ccessChallenges Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from the server Rx Malformed radiusAuthClientExt The number of malformed Access MalformedAccessRe RADIUS Access Response Responses sponses packets received from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses Rx Bad radiusAuthClientExtB The num
125. 0 65535 or any specific or port range ipv6 IPv6 keyowrd lt sip_v6 gt IPv6 source address a b c d n or any 32 LS bits lt class gt QoS Class class 0 7 default basic classification lt dp gt DP Level dp 0 3 default basic classification lt classified_dscp gt DSCP dscp 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 QoS QCL Delete Description Delete QCE entry from QoS Control list Syntax QoS QCL Delete lt qce_id gt Parameters lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 256 default Next available ID QoS QCL Lookup Description Lookup QoS Control List Syntax QoS QCL Lookup lt qce_id gt Parameters lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 256 default Next available ID 488 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QoS QCL Status Description Show QCL status This can be used to display if there is any conflict in QCE for differnet user types Syntax QoS QCL status combined static voice_vlan conflicts Parameters combined static voice_vlan conflicts combined Shows the combined status static Shows the static user configured status voice_vlan Shows the status by Voice VLAN conflicts Shows all conflict status default Shows the combined status QoS QCL Refresh Description Resolve QCE conflict status Same H W resource is shared by multiple applications and it may not be available even before MAX QCE entry So user can release the resource in use by other applications and use this command t
126. 0 to 200000000 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 3 Illustration of STP A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to switch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop potentially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward 140 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP LAN 1 gt Port cost 200 000 A vor
127. 00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any Control Address Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any e SNAP PID Valid PID a k a ethernet type can have value within Ox00 OxFFFF or Any default value is Any e IPv4 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP Specific Source IP address in value mask format or Any IP and Mask are in the format x y z w where x y Z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 When Mask is converted to a 32 bit binary string and read from left to right all bits following the first zero must also be zero 201 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 IP Fragment IPv4 frame fragmented option yes nolany Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP e IPv6 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP IPv6 source address a b c d or Any 32 LS bits DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specif
128. 1 Set SNMP supported version 1 E SNMP v2c Set SNMP supported version 2c E SNMP v3 Set SNMP supported version 3 e Read Community Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet e Write Community Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII 79 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet e Engine ID Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zero
129. 20160HP File Download Do you want to open or save this file E Name ntent length_18058Server__PLANET_Web_Server Type XML Document 17 6KB From 192 168 0 100 harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or 9 While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially save this file What s the risk Figure 4 2 22 File Download Screen 2 Chose the file save path in management workstation O Contig Backup My Recent Documents Fie name My Network Save as type All Files j Figure 4 2 23 File Save Screen 73 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 2 18 Configuration Upload This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The Configuration Upload screen in Figure 4 2 24 appears Configuration Upload Browse ito Figure 4 2 24 Configuration Upload Page Screenshot Configuration Upload 1 Click the tome configuration button of the main Page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose saved Choose file Look in B Config Backup e PE y My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer My Network File name config xml z Places Files of type fan Files v Cancel Figure 4 2 25 Windows File Selection Menu Popup Upload 2 Select on the configuration file then click Unoa the bo
130. 20160HP This Page provides MVR related configuration The MVR screen in Figure 4 8 17 appears MVR Configurations MVR Mode Osabied VLAN Interface Setting Role I Inactive S Source R Receiver Derete ve vib mva Name mods Tagging rior Lar iterace Channel Setting Add New MVR VLAN Immediate Leave Setting Immediate Leave Disabled ww Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 1 3 4 5 6 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled ENENENENEN ENEE ENE Figure 4 8 17 MVR Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e MVR Mode Enable Disable the Global MVR The Unregistered Flooding control depends on the current configuration in IGMP MLD Snooping It is suggested to enable Unregistered Flooding control when the MVR group table is full e Delete Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the next save e MVR VID Specify the Multicast VLAN ID 177 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Be Caution MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management VLAN ports e MVR Name MVR Name is an optional attribute to indicate the name of the specific MVR VLAN Maximum length of the MVR VLAN Name string is 32 MVR VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers When the optional MVR VLAN name is given it should c
131. 3 View Configuration View Type OID Subtree O default_view included vw Figure 4 3 7 SNMPv3 Views Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed 86 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view type are E included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included E excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded General if a view entry s view type is excluded it should be exist another view entry which view type is included and it s OID subtree overstep the excluded view entry e OID Subtree The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new view entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 5 5 SNMPv3 Access Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this Page The entry index keys are Group Name Security Model and Security
132. 4 512 1k 2k 4k 32768k Default Setting disable 486 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QoS QCL Add Description Add or modify QoS Control Entry QCE If the QCE ID parameter lt qce_id gt is specified and an entry with this QCE ID already exists the QCE will be modified Otherwise a new QCE will be added If the QCE ID is not specified the next available QCE ID will be used If the next QCE ID parameter lt qce_id_next gt is specified the QCE will be placed before this QCE in the list If the next QCE ID is not specified and if it is a new entry added the QCE will be placed last in the list Otherwise if the next QCE ID is not specified and if existing QCE is modified QCE will be in the same location in the list To modify and move the entry to last in the list use the word last for lt qce_id_next gt Syntax QoS QCL Add lt qce_id gt lt qce_id_next gt lt port_list gt lt tag gt lt vid gt lt pcp gt lt dei gt lt smac gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt LLC lt DSAP gt lt SSAP gt lt control gt SNAP lt PID gt ipv4 lt protocol gt lt sip gt lt dscp gt lt fragment gt lt sport gt lt dport gt ipv6 lt protocol gt lt sip_v6 gt lt dscp gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt class gt lt dp gt lt classified_dscp gt Parameters lt qce_id gt lt qce_id_next gt lt port_list gt lt t
133. 60HP Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 16 Voice VLAN OUI Table Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this Page The maximum entry number is 16 Modifying the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4 9 18 appears Voice VLAN OUI Table 00 30 4f PLANET phones 00 03 6b Cisco phones 00 Of e2 H3C phones 00 60 b9 Philips and NEC AG phones D0 d0 1e Pingtel phones 00 e0 75 Polycom phones 00 e0 bb 3Com phones 00 01 e3 Siemens AG phones Figure 4 9 18 Voice VLAN OUI Table Page Screenshot O O O O O O O O The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Telephony OUI An telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit e Description The description of OUI address Normally it describes which vendor telephony device it belongs to The allowed string length is 0 to 32 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new access management entry Save Click to save changes Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 208 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 10 Access Control Lists ACL is an acronym fo
134. 60HP e Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged e UVID Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID Port s UVID determines the packet s behavior at the egress side e Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or Not When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration the following conflicts can occur E Functional Conflicts between feature E Conflicts due to hardware limitation E Direct conflict between user modules Buttons Static Y Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh H El Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 4 6 8 Private VLAN The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here Private VLANs can be added or deleted here Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here Private VLANs are based on the source port mask and there are no connections to VLANs This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets By default all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1 A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs The Private VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 6 appears Auto refresh Refresh
135. 8 CS1 9 10 AF11 11 12 AF12 13 14 AF13 15 16 CS2 17 18 AF21 8 CS1 9 10 AF11 11 12 AF12 13 14 AF13 15 16 CS2 17 18 AF21 HOH CC CCC CC CC OE CO EEE O EEE CCC CC CO CC CO CEC CA 4 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 EF 46 EF 47 47 48 CS6 48 CS6 49 49 50 50 51 51 52 52 53 53 54 54 55 55 56 CS7 56 CS7 57 57 58 58 59 59 60 60 61 61 62 62 63 63 44 45 46 EF 47 48 CS6 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 CS7 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 44 45 46 EF 47 48 CS6 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 CS7 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 2 A AE E E EE E CHICA CAEC CA EC EE EE E CC CC E 4 4 OA AA A ETKI KIET EIET EE ETKI ETET Figure 4 9 10 DSCP Translation Page Screenshot 196 The Page includes the following fields User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Object Description e DSCP Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 e Ingress Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and DPL map There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation Translate Classify e Translate DSCP at Ingress side can be translat
136. 92 4 9 8 DSCP Based QOS EEA ANE A E nn 194 4 9 9 DSCP Translation ii A es 196 4 9 10 DSCP Classification oia AA a oia 198 4 9511 QOS Control ista oriadao el 199 4 9 11 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration oonnnccccnnonicononocnnononcncnnnannnn nono tetkin utkuta ntt AnAk EA nn nn 200 4 9 12 QCL Sas ii dad 203 4 9 13 Storm Control Configuration canina aiii 204 4 9314 QOS Statistics india 205 4 9 15 Voice VLAN Configuration ooooococcccnnnoccccnononnnononcncnnnonnno nono cnn rn nn cnn rre rre rene 206 4 9 16 Voice VLAN OQUI Table innein est 208 A410 ACCESS Control LISTS ai ee lirica 209 4 10 1 Access Control List Status coi ace 209 4 10 2 Access Control List ConfiguratiON oooonccccnnninnnnccccnononnncnonannnn nono nnnn no rn rn nan rn r narran 211 4 10 3 ACE Configura iii va senda ena hes Genes ete cecoet utente a a a ea 213 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeece ce ee eee ceaeaeeeeeeeecceaeaeceeeeeeeeseaaaeaeeeeeeesecaaeaeeeseeqeaeeeeeeesessecaeaeeeeeees 222 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration coco ii ibi 224 ATACA OO diia 225 4 11 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based AuthenticatiON on ooccnnnnniccnnocccnnoccccnnnornnonono cnn nnrrn crono nr nnnrna rn 226 4 1142 Authentication ConfiQuration ss casio aut anaa aeiia ater eara iE eun Aria AEREE iii 229 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 11 3 Network Access Server ConfiguratiON ooooonncinnnnccnnnoccncnononnnnnonn conan non nnnnonnn rn n nn nn 23
137. AN Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 6 2 appears VLAN Port Configuration T All v Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable All All All All All All All OO JO Nah QU N b b b b b b b O ONGONA UOUN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 N ENKI KIKIKI KA EEE EN ETEN ET EEA E Figure 4 6 2 VLAN Port Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e PVID Allow assign PVID for selected port The range for the PVID is 1 4094 The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port The PVID must as same as the VLAN ID that the port belong to VLAN group or the untagged traffic will be dropped Ingress Filtering Enable ingress filtering for a port by checking the box This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded By default ingress filtering is disabled no checkmark e Accept Frame Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged 114 User s Manu
138. ANAGEMENT This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Managed Switch It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device workstation or personal computer and the system It also contains information about port connection options This chapter covers the following topics Requirements Management Access Overview Administration Console Access Web Management Access SNMP Access Standards Protocols and Related Reading 3 1 Requirements Workstations of subscribers running Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista 7 8 2008 MAC OSS9 or later Linux UNIX or other platform compatible with TCP IP protocols Workstation installed with Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card Serial Port connect Terminal e Above PC with COM Port DB9 RS 232 or USB to RS 232 converter Ethernet Port connect e Network cables Use standard network UTP cables with RJ45 connectors Above Workstation installed with WEB Browser and JAVA runtime environment Plug in ga It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7 0 or above to access Managed Switch Note 39 3 2 Management Access Overview User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods E An administration console a Web browser interface a An external SNMP based net
139. AP type Protected EAP PEAP MD5 Challenge Protected EAP PEAP Smart Card or other Certificate Authenticate as computer when computer information is available C Authenticate as quest when user or computer information is unavailable Figure 4 11 19 7 Click OK 8 When client has associated with the Managed Switch a user authentication notice appears in system tray Click on the notice to continue i Local Area Connection 3 x Click here to enter your user name and password for the network Figure 4 11 20 Windows Client Popup Login Request Message 267 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 9 Enter the user name password and the logon domain that your account belongs 10 Click OK to complete the validation process Local Area Connection 3 User name test Password seeeccceee Logon domain Figure 4 11 21 268 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 12 Security This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch includes the user access and management control The Security Page contains links to the following main topics Port Limit Control Access Management HTTPs SSH DHCP Snooping IP Source Guard ARP Inspection 4 12 1 Port Limit Control This Page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port A user is identified by a MAC addres
140. Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active ED PMG CN FM EEE EDA CM COG PN CN NON EDEN ES ED CN JEM CN CM EN NPN CPD ON ED EM EDEN CO EAEE LACP Port Configuration Page Screenshot e Port The switch port number e LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2G LAGs per stack 102 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot The default setting is Auto e Role The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets each second while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to e Timeout The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions Fast will transmit LACP packets each second while Slow will wait for 30 seconds before sending a LACP packet e Priority The Prio controls the priority of the port If the LACP partner wants to form a larg
141. Advertising Duration The duration carried in SSDP packets is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or they should receive a SSDP advertisement message from this switch If a control point does not receive any message within the duration it will think that the switch no longer exists Due to the unreliable nature of UDP in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one half of the advertising duration In the implementation the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds Valid values are in the range 100 to 86400 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 60 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP z My Network Places File Edit view Favorites Tools Help y J wi ya Search 5 Folders EE Address my Network Places Network Tasks se 2 Add a network place E La LA View network a a i i connections 2 Set up a wireless network For a home or small office lt Q Search Active Directory _ Hide icons For networked UPnP devices Print Server Print Server WGSW 20160HP RDM HPS5000 RDM HPLI1320 Other Places Desktop Entire Network i My Computer E My Documents O pon Printers and Faxes enmg on 10 1 1 20 enmg on File ENM_Public on 10 1 1 20 ENM_Public on file
142. Authentication Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client successful as well as unsuccessful 247 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately _ clear This button is available in the following modes e Force Authorized e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X Click to clear the counters for the selected port Clear All This button is available in the following modes Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth Click to clear both the port counters and all of the attached client s counters The Last Client will not be cleared however _ Clear This This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth X Click to clear only the currently selected client s counters 248 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 11 6 Authentication Server Configuration This Page allows you to configure the Authentication Servers The Authentication Server Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 7 appears Authentication Server Configuration Common Server Configuration seconds seconds RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration Figure 4 11 7 Authentication Server Configuration Page Screenshot User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields Common Server Configuration These setting are common for all of the Authentication Servers
143. Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 12 7 Port Security Detail This Page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The Port Security Detail screen in Figure 4 12 7 appears Port Security Port Status Port 1 Poti La J MAC Address VLAN ID Time of Addition Age Hold No MAC addresses attached Auto refresh O Figure 4 12 7 Port Security Detail Screen Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address amp VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port If no MAC addresses ID are learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed e State Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding In the
144. C based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port and doesn t require the user to have special 802 1X supplicant software installed on his system The switch uses the user s MAC address to authenticate against the backend server Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses which makes MAC based authentication less secure than 802 1X authentication The NAS configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Network Access Server Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 4 appears 230 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Network Access Server Configuration System Configuration Port Configuration _ Sal M QoS Enabled VLAN Enabled VLAN Enabled Ak O O O Force Authorized Giobaly Disabled Force Authorized Giobally Disabled Foroz Authorized Giobaly Disabled Force Authorized Giobaly Disabled Giobaly Disabled a a Y A A A 0 AAA Ratesn Figure 4 11 4 Network Access Server Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields System Configuration Object Description e Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames e Reauthentication If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated Enabled after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a
145. Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the Users Delete the current user This button is not available for new configurations Add new user Once the new user is added the new user entry shown in the Users Configuration Page Users Configuration User Name Privilege Level admin 15 quest 5 Loo EY Add New User Figure 4 2 6 User Configuration Page Screenshot After change the default password if you forget the password Please press the Reset button in the front panel of the Managed Switch over 10 seconds and then release the current setting A includes VLAN will be lost and the Managed Switch will restore to the default mode ES 56 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 2 5 Privilege Levels This Page provides an overview of the privilege levels After setup completed please press Save button to take effect Please login web interface with new user name and password the screen in Figure 4 2 7 appears Privilege Level Configuration Group Name pr ne njc onfiguration on Status eo erry ics Status Statistics a Read write sail Bg Bg alh H o ll a LLDP_MED Loop_Protect MAC_Table MVR Maintenance Mirroring Multicast POE Port_Security Ports Private_VLANs Protocol_based_VLAN QoS SNMP Security Spanning_Tree System Timer UPnP VLANs Voice_VLAN poe_ping sieaall sete O kl ala ac dEl f 5 y 5 y 5 y i
146. DP provides two services not provided by the IP layer It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and optionally a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VoIP and Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components User Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame 552 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Virtual LAN A method to restrict communication between switch ports VLANs can be used for the following applications VLAN unaware switching This is the default configuration All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1 This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1 and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags VLAN aware switching This is based on the IEEE 802 10 standard All ports are VLAN aware Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames Other ports are members of one VLAN set up with this Port VLAN ID and transmit untagged frames Prov
147. ED Civic Description Set or show LLDP MED Civic Address Location Syntax LLDPMED Civic country state county city district block street leading_street_direction trailing_street_suffix str_suf house_no house_no_s uffix landmark additional_info name zip_code building apartment floor room_number place_type postal_com_namel p_o box additional_code lt civic_value gt Parameters country Country state National subdivisions state caton region province prefecture county County parish gun JP district IN city City townchip shi JP district City division borough city district ward chou JP block Neighborhood block street Street leading_street_direction Leading street direction trailing_street_suffix Trailing street suffix str_suf Street Suffix house_no House Number house_no_ suffix House number suffix landmark Landmark or vanity address additional_info Additional location information name Bame residence and office occupant 462 zip_code Postal zip code building Building structure apartment Unit apartment suite floor Floor room_number Room number place_type Placetype postal_com_name Postal community name p_o box Post office box P O Box additional_code Addtional code default Show Civic Address Location configuration lt civic_value gt lldpmed The value for the Civic Address Location entry LLDPMED ECS Description Set or sho
148. Enable Profile 1 802 3at Enable Profile 1 802 3at Enable Profile 1 802 3at oon Dn a Wh ca a ot mh md nO ff Wh O HE HE EM ET EI mb Lag Figure 4 16 3 Power over Ethernet Configuration Screenshot 322 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The page includes the following fields Object Description e PoE Mode There are three modes for PoE mode Enable enable PoE function Disable disable PoE function Schedule enable PoE function in schedule mode e Schedule Indicates the schedule profile mode Possible porifles are Profile Profile2 Profile3 Profile4 e AF AT Mode Allows user to select 802 3at or 802 3af compatibility mode The default vaule is 802 3at mode This function wil affect PoE power reservation on Classification power limit mode only as 802 3af mode system is going to reserve 15 4W maximum for PD that supported Class3 level As IEEE 802 3at mode system is going to reserve 30 8Watts for PD that support Class4 level From class1 to class3 level on the 802 3at mode will be reserved the same PoE power with 802 3af mode e Priority The Priority represents PoE ports priority There are three levels of power priority named Low High and Critical The priority is used in the case when total power consumption has been over total power budget In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turn off and offer power for the port of higher priority
149. Enable the TACACS Authentication Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the TACACS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation e Port The TCP port to use on the TACACS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 49 is used on the TACACS Authentication Server e Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the TACACS Buttons Save Click to save changes Authentication Server and the switch Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 251 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 11 7 RADIUS Overview This Page provides an overview of the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the Authentication configuration Page The RADIUS Authentication Accounting Server Overview screen in Figure 4 11 8 appears RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview e naaress 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled RADIUS Accounting Server Status Overview PI ena 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled Auto refresh O Figure 4 11 8 RADIUS Authentication Accounting Server Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview Object Description o T
150. GSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode of IP Source Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard All Guard Configuration configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled e Port Mode Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode Configuration and Port Mode on a given port are enabled IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port e Max Dynamic Clients Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients can be learned on given ports This value can be 0 1 2 and unlimited If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal 0 it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port Buttons Translate Dynamic to Static Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 284 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 12 11 IP Source Guard Static Table This Page provides Static IP Source Guard Table The Static IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4 12 11 appears Static IP Source Guard Table VLAN ID IP Address MAC Address Add New Entry Save Reset Figure 4 12 11 Static IP Source Guard Table Screen Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete C
151. Hi Storm Control support Broadcast Multicast Unknown Unicast Hi Support VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Up to 255 VLANs groups out of 4094 VLAN IDs Provider Bridging VLAN Q in Q support IEEE 802 1ad Private VLAN Edge PVE Protocol based VLAN MAC based VLAN Voice VLAN 25 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Hi Support Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol spanning tree by VLAN BPDU Guard Ml Support Link Aggregation 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Cisco ether channel Static Trunk Maximum 10 trunk groups up to 16 ports per trunk group Up to 32Gbps bandwidth Full Duplex Mode M Provide Port Mirror many to 1 MM Port Mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port Ml Loop protection to avoid broadcast loops gt Quality of Service Ml Ingress Shaper and Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control Ml 8 priority queues on all switch ports MH Traffic classification IEEE 802 1p CoS TOS DSCP IP Precedence of IPv4 IPv6 packets IP TCP UDP port number Typical network application Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin WRR CoS policies Supports QoS and In Out bandwidth control on each port Traffic policing policies on the switch port DSCP remarking gt Multicast Supports IGMP Snooping v1 v2 and v3
152. J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 4 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service based on a specific subscription plan The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and IGMP throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port An IGMP filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled IGMP join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the IGMP join report is dropped IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new IGMP join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multi
153. LAN Specify the VID and configure the new entry Click Save The specific MLD VLAN starts working after the corresponding static VLAN is also created Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 171 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 8 10 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service based on a specific subscription plan The MLD filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and MLD throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join MLD filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port A MLD filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled MLD join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the MLD join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the MLD join report is dropped MLD throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions
154. LAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet 380 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP VLAN Lookup Description Lookup VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Lookup lt vid gt name lt name gt combined static nas mvr voice_vian all Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs name VLAN name string lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet combined Shows All the Combined VLAN database static Shows the VLAN entries configured by the administrator nas Shows the VLANs configured by NAS mvr Shows the VLANs configured by MVR voice_vlan Shows the VLANs configured by Voice VLAN all Shows all VLANs configuration default combined VLAN Users configuration VLAN Name Add Description Add VLAN Name to a VLAN ID Mapping Syntax VLAN Name Add lt name gt lt vid gt Parameters lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 381 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP VLAN Name Delete Description Delete VLAN Name to VLAN ID Mapping Syntax VLAN Name Delete lt name gt Parameters lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should
155. LD SFM Source Filtered Multicast Information Table also contains the SSM Source Specific Multicast information This table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD SFM Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD SFM Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD SFM Information Table The MLDv2 Information screen in Figure 4 8 16 appears MLD SFM Information Auto refresh C Start from VLAN 1 and Group P00 i with 20 entries per page LAN ID Source Address Hardware Filter Switch No more entries Figure 4 8 16 MLD SSM Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny 175 Us
156. LDPMED Configuration ssni incite 462 LEEDPMED CVC a a a o do 462 PIED PMEDSEGS EA E e A o dhe 463 LLDPMED Policy Delete oocoocia a ias 463 ULDPMED Poli Addie aldo e eerie 464 ULDPMED Port Policies ita ad 465 EEDPMED Coordinates tioicii a 465 ELDPMED Datum abs 466 HID RMED RASt 2 o A e A e ia Ro 466 ILDPMEDINfO state tot ase Af alae e ses ae gra Ten elo cd nd e ten due le e Dak lt 466 6 13 POE COMMANA A a 467 POE Configure edil 467 POE Modelo nt ii tata 467 15 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP ARIAT Mode ii ti 467 POE ASIA E a e SE eee 468 PoE Mamagement Mode ceci oa 468 POE Allocated POWER aa at 468 POE Power SUpplY A EC E 469 lA 469 6 14 Quality of Service Command cnmmiccccccccnoninnnnnc rr 470 QOS Configurar atada nd 470 QoS Port ClassificatiOn Classi iii A iaa 470 QoS Port Classification DP ei 471 G0S Port Classification POP vicio da beats 471 QoS Port Classification DEl ivi de aia 471 QoS Port Classification ha Ee e PRERE TE A nn nano cc rn nn A 472 Qos Port Classification Map adictas 472 QoS Port Classification DSC Pisarne n Odd apio 473 QoS Port PoliGer ModE iiics eian aa eiaa pen dace ewe tobenus eiieeii a aaa aa 473 QoS Pont Policer Rate ti A eddie Le IN to 474 QoS Port Policer Unit dea aa ects 474 QoS Port Policer Flow Control ai 475 Qos Port Scheduler Mode iiia a a a e a a aa a aa aa 475 QoS Port Scheduler Weight oooooccnonccinocicoccconcccnoncnonncononcnnnn cnn nc conc astunek tet
157. LLDPMED Datum lt datum_type gt Parameters lt datum_type gt The datum_type parameter takes the following values wgs84 WGS84 nad83_navd88 NAD83_NAVD88 nad83_mllw NAD83_MLLW LLDPMED Fast Description Set or show LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count Syntax LLDPMED Fast lt count gt Parameters User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP lt count gt The number of times the fast start LLDPDU are being sent during the activation of the fast start mechanism defined by LLDP MED 1 10 LLDPMED Info Description Show LLDP MED neighbor device information Syntax LLDPMED Info lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 466 6 13 PoE Command PoE Configuration Description Show PoE configuration Syntax PoE Configuration PoE Mode Description Set or show the PoE mode Syntax PoE Mode lt port_list gt enable disable aflat Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enables PoE disable Disable PoE default Show PoE s mode Default Setting enable AF AT Mode Description Allows user to set up 802 3af type1 or 802 3at type2 mode to per port Syntax PoE mode lt port_list gt aflat Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports af IEEE 802 3af mode at IEEE 802 3at mode 467 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP POE Priority Description Sho
158. LX mini GBIC module 70KM E MGB L120 SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 120KM E MGB LA10 SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm 10KM E MGB LA20 SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm 20KM E MGB LB20 SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1550nm 20KM E MGB LA40 SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm 40KM E MGB LB40 SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1550nm 40KM Fast Ethernet SFP Transceiver Modules a MFB FX SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 2KM a MFB F20 SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 20KM a MFB F60 SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 60KM a MFB FA20 SFP Port 100Base BX Transceiver WDM TX 1310nm 20KM a MFB FB20 SFP Port 100Base BX Transceiver WDM TX 1550nm 20KM 1 It recommends using PLANET SFP on the Managed Switch If you insert a SFP transceiver that is not supported the Managed Switch will not recognize it A 2 Port 17 to Port 20 are shared SFP slot that support Gigabit amp Fast Ethernet SFP transceiver Before connect the other Managed Switches workstation or Media Converter Es In the installation steps below this Manual use Gigabit SFP transceiver as the example However the steps for Fast Ethernet SFP transceiver are similar Note 1 Make sure both side of the SFP transceiver are with the same media type for example 1000Base SX to 1000Base SX 1000Bas LX to 1000Base LX 2 Check the fiber optic cable type match the SFP transceiver model gt To connect to 1000Base SX SFP transceiver use t
159. Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 VLAN ID VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 DSCP DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 Adding a new policy Click Add New Policy to add a new policy Specify the Application type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority and DSCP for the new policy Click Save The number of policies supported is 32 303 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Port Policies Configuration Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration applies e Policy ID The set of policies that shall a
160. Level The SNMPv3 Access screen in Figure 4 3 8 appears SNMPv3 Access Configuration Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name Do default_ro_group any NoAuth NoPriv default view Y i CO default_rw_group any NoAuth NoPriv defanlt_view Y or Figure 4 3 8 SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 87 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are E any Accepted any security model v1 v2c usm E v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 E v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c E usm User based Security Model USM e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are E NodAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy E Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy E Auth Priv Authentication and privacy e Read View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters f
161. MLD respectively Received e IGMP MLD Queries The number of Transmitted Queries for IGMP and MLD respectively Transmitted e IGMPv1 Joins The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins Received e IGMPv2 MLDv1 The number of Received IGMPv2 Joins and MLDv1 Reports respectively Reports Received e IGMPv3 MLDv2 The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins and MLDv2 Reports respectively Reports Received e IGMPv2 MLDv1 Leaves The number of Received IGMPv2 Leaves and MLDv1 Dones respectively Received Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately _ clear J Clears all Statistics counters p 1 Auto refresh _ i Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 179 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 8 16 MVR Groups Information Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this Page The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR Group Table The MVR Groups Information screen in Figure 4 8 19 appears MVR Channels Groups Information Auto refresh Refresh lt lt gt gt Start from VLAN 1 and Group Address with 20 entries per page Port Me
162. No 96 Minquan Ra Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Tatwan R O C p Loop Protecto Tel 886 2 22199518 RMON Fax 255 2 2219 9528 Email Sapportaplanci com tw Copyright 2212 PLANET Tectno og Corgeraton Al rights reserved Figure 3 4 Web Main Screen of Managed Switch 42 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 3 5 SNMP Based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the Managed Switch such as SNMPc Network Manager HP Openview Network Node Management NNM or What s Up Gold This management method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string and the set community string If the SNMP Net work management Station only knows the set community string it can read and write to the MIBs However if it only knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default gets and sets community strings for the Managed Switch are public SNMP Agent Status Enabled PC Workstation SNMP application IP Address 192 168 0 100 Tniternet La IP Address DI 192 168 0 x Figure 3 5 SNMP Management 3 6 PLANET Smart Discovery Utility For easily list the Managed Switch in your Ethernet environment the Planet Smart Discovery Utility from user s manual CD ROM is an ideal solution The following install instructions gu
163. OL StaSUS 0s aie at eens jain R ei Se a een eed 522 VCL Protocol based VLAN Add Ethernet Il ooo cece ceeeneeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeesaeeeseeeaeeesiaeeeeeeaeeesneeeesnateeeneaaes 522 VCL Protocol based VLAN Add SNAP coccococccccocccccononcnnnononcnnnnnnncnnnn nn untk n nn nn unut nr narrar anne nera 522 VCL Protocol based VLAN Add LLC muii nine 523 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete Ethernet ll ooonnnncnnnnnnncnnnncccnnnoncnnnoncncnn non cc nano nn taskut cnn ano rn nnnn rn rar rca 523 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete SNAP ocincccccnnocccccoconcnononnncnannnncnr nono untk unut nr AAA rn rn rre rr rara 523 VCL Protocol based VEAN Delete LLC cocida 524 VCL Protocol based VLAN Add cococccnnocccccononcnononononononcnn nono cnn nan n nn nano rre rre rn rre rre rra 524 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete cuca diia 524 VCL Protocol based VLAN ConfiguratiON oooooncccnonocicinonocnnononcncnononcnn nono cnn nan nnn nano rca rn nn nn rre rear rrnnnn 525 VCL IP based VLAN ConfiguratiON oococcononnnnnoncccnononnncnonncnn non ncnnno nn nr non nn nro rene rra 525 VGE IP based VEAN Adds 2635 ccoo de ith dio bound a cr de add ido opio eae do e td e td ate 525 VCL IP based VLAN Delete siii ienne di 525 024 SMTP Commands a a eis ae r eee aes See a aa a ea Res ae Na 526 SMIP C nfig r tiona A E eae 526 OMA Mode coo e o o e e e da e 526 SMTP VB aora 526 SMEPA UE cie E tn ros oe ose decia dd as em end DR O te ltd E do e a lend AS ON ade 527 SMTP Auth Us de oa
164. P MED Network Connectivity Device Definition LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in TIA 1057 provide 304 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies 1 LAN Switch Router 2 IEEE 802 1 Bridge 3 IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons 4 IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point 5 Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA 1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method LLDP MED Endpoint Device Definition Within the LLDP MED Endpoint Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes as defined in the following Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class Fore example will any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class II also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints Class 1 and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device Class III will also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints Class II and Generic Endpoints Class 1 LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class 1 The LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP disco
165. P port role of the ICST port The port role can be one of the following values AlternatePort BackupPort RootPort DesignatedPort Disable e CIST State The current STP port state of the CIST port The port state can be one of the following values Disabled Learning Forwarding e Uptime Buttons Refresh The time since the bridge port was last initialized Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 154 4 7 9 Port Statistics User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP This Page displays the STP port statistics counters for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 7 12 appears The Page includes the following fields STP Statistics Transmitted Discarded No ports enabled SN uste rste sre rcn msre este ste ren unknown megar No ports enabled OOS S U O Auto refresh C Figure 4 7 12 STP Statistics Page Screenshot Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical RSTP port e MSTP The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port e RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port e STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port e TCN The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s received tran
166. PD classification is to provide information about the maximum power required by the PD during operation Class 0 is the default for PDs However to improve power management at the PSE the PD may opt to provide a signature for Class 1 to 4 The PD is classified based on power The classification of the PD is the maximum power that the PD will draw across all input voltages and operational modes 321 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP APD shall return Class 0 to 4 in accordance with the maximum power draw as specified by Table 4 16 1 Class Usage Range of maximum power used by the PD Class Dsecription MIN Default 0 44 to 12 95 Watts Classification unimplement la Optional 0 44 to 3 84 Watts Very low power MEM Optional 6 49 to 12 95 Watts or to 15 4Watts MN Optional 12 95 to 25 50 Watts or to 30 8Watts High power Table 4 16 1 Device class 4 16 3 Port Configuration This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings screen in Figure 4 16 3 appears Power Over Ethernet Configuration Port PoE Mode Schedule AF AT Mode Power Allocation W lt All gt lt All gt Enable rofile 1 802 3at Enable P 802 3at Enable Profile 1 802 3at Enable Profile 1 802 3at Enable Profile 1 802 3at Enable Profile 1 802 3at Enable Profile 1 802 3at Enable Profile 1 802 3at Enable rofile 1 802 3at Enable Profile 1 802 3at Enable Profile 1 802 3at Enable Profile 802 3at Enable rofile 1 802 3at
167. POL Start frame retransmission rate Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Single 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X In Single 802 1X at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once 235 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP successfully authenticated Multi 802 1X Multi 802 1X is like Single 802 1X not an IEEE standard but a variant that features many of the same characteristics In Mul
168. PSE PD Figure 8 1 Power Supplied over the Spare Pins The data pairs are used Since Ethernet pairs are transformer coupled at each end it is possible to apply DC power to the center tap of the isolation transformer without upsetting the data transfer In this mode of operation the pair on pins 3 and 6 and the pair on pins 1 and 2 can be of either polarity Figure 8 2 Power Supplied over the Data Pins 532 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you solve issues If the Managed Switch is not functioning properly make sure the Managed Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual The Link LED is not lit Solution Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Managed Switch Ml Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port Solution Please check the VLAN settings trunk settings or port enabled disabled status Ml Performance is bad Solution Check the full duplex status of the Managed Switch If the Managed Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex then the performance will be poor Please also check the in out rate of the port M Why the Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution 1 Check the LNK ACT LED on the switch 2 Try another port on the Switch 3 Make sure the cable is installed properly 4 Make sure the cable is the right type 5 Turn off the power After a while t
169. Private VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members a ers estes rvco 5 0 710 oJolodolol elo 1 Y Y MMMM 7 M ml w M M M M M a M e Add New Private VLAN Reset Figure 4 6 6 Private VLAN Membership Configuration Page Screenshot 120 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a private VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next save e Private VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID To include a port in a Private VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New Private Click Add New Private VLAN to add a new private VLAN ID An empty row is VLAN added to the table and the private VLAN can be configured as needed The allowed range for a private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range Any values outside this range are not accepted and a warning message appears Click OK to discard the incorrect entry or click Cancel to return to the editing and make a correction The Private VLAN is enabled when you click Save The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new Private VLANs Buttons Add New Pr
170. Pv6 Ping Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes e Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times e Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds Buttons Stat Click to transmit ICMP packets New Ping Click to re start diagnostics with PING 313 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test This Page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues on special port After you press Test 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The Page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 15 3 appears Remote IP Ping Test Remote IP Address Ping Size Ping Button Result Save Reset Clear Figure 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings e Remote IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes e Result Display the ping result 314
171. QoS Port TagRemarking Map Description Set or show the port tag remarking map This map is used when port tag remarking mode is set to mapped and the purpose is to translate the classified QoS class 0 7 and DP level 0 1 to PCP and DEI Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking Map lt port_list gt lt class_list gt lt dpl_list gt lt pcp gt lt dei gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class_list gt QoS class list or all default All QoS classes 0 7 lt dpl_list gt DP level list or all default All DP levels 0 1 lt pcp gt Priority Code Point 0 7 lt dei gt Drop Eligible Indicator 0 1 480 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QoS Port DSCP Translation Description Set or show DSCP ingress translation mode If translation is enabled for a port incoming frame DSCP value is translated and translated value is used for QoS classification Syntax QoS Port DSCP Translation lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable DSCP ingress translation disable Disable DSCP ingress translation default Show DSCP ingress translation mode Default Setting disable QoS Port DSCP Classification Description Set or show DSCP classification based on QoS class This enables per port to map new DSCP value based on QoS class Syntax QoS Port DSCP Classification lt port_l
172. S attributes to take advantage of this feature The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled for that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned QoS Class is disabled for all ports e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled RADIUS assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled for that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled for all ports e Guest VLAN Enabled A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When
173. SFP Combo interfaces it offer sufficient PoE power for 16 IEEE 802 3af PoE IP camera devices at the same time With 4 Port Gigabit TP interfaces the WGSW 20160HP also supports connect to one 16 Channel NVR or two 8 Channel NVR systems also uplink to backbone switch and monitor center With high performance switch architecture the recorded video files from 16 IEEE 802 3af PoE IP Camera devices can be saved in the NVR systems the NVR systems can be controlled and monitored both in the local LAN and the remote site via Internet the WGSW 20160HP brings an ideal secure surveillance system with lower total cost Robust Layer 2 Features The WGSW 20160HP can be programmed for advanced switch management functions such as dynamic Port link aggregation Q in Q VLAN private VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree protocol Layer 2 to Layer 4 QoS bandwidth control and IGMP MLD Snooping The WGSW 20160HP provides 802 10 Tagged VLAN and the VLAN groups allowed will be maximally up to 255 Via aggregation of supporting ports the WGSW 20160HP allows the operation of a high speed trunk combining multiple ports It enables maximum up to 10 groups of 16 ports for trunking and supports fail over as well Excellent Traffic Control The WGSW 20160HP is loaded with powerful traffic management and QoS features to enhance services offered by telecoms The functionality includes QoS features such as wire speed Layer 4 traffic classifiers and bandwidth limiting that are particular
174. SNMP trap protocol version Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Version 1 2c 3 Parameters 1 SNMP version 1 2c SNMP version 2c 3 SNMP version 3 default Show SNMP trap version Default Setting 1 396 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch SNMP Trap Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP traps Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string Maximum length allowed is upto 256 characters default Show SNMP trap community Default Setting public Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination Description Set or Show the SNMP trap destination address Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination lt ip_addr_string gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination Description Set or Show the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination lt ipv6_addr gt Parameters User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way o
175. Short B Cross pair short to pair B Short C Cross pair short to pair C Short D Cross pair short to pair D Cross A Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair A Cross B Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair B Cross C Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair C Cross D Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair D Length The length in meters of the cable pair The resolution is 3 meters Buttons Star Click to run the diagnostics 316 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 16 Power over Ethernet Providing up to 16 PoE in line power interfaces the WGSW 20160HP PoE Switch can easily build a power central controlled IP phone system IP Camera system AP group for the enterprise For instance 16 camera AP can be easily installed around the corner in the company for surveillance demands or build a wireless roaming environment in the office Without the power socket limitation the WGSW 20160HP PoE Switch makes the installation of cameras or WLAN AP more easily and efficiently Y PLANET WUSW 201bUHP Systam Power Over Ethemet Status Cumart Powar Consumcton SE SS MI 19112 220007 a 190 4 230000 Tanesha 1 CPAN Tangeh WANT Elva Oona vidus wed ro port Ta TO shau ms mare fian ZU wati Thara i VAY rassar Iie Pui dip sl Local Port PD Cass Power Used W Current Used mA Priority Port Status AF AT Mode 1 aa y Hor PoE ON AT 4 zs 525 Hyi PEON PRELUDI y 4 MM an tog SOM fig ation nI Sif Hon POF Oo 72 S23 P
176. Statistics Port 1 Port v Auto refresh CI Port State Force Authorized Globally Disabled Figure 4 11 6 Network Access Statistics Page Screenshot Description e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values e Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states e QoS Class The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here 242 Port Counters Object User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Description e EAPOL Counters These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states Force Authorized Force Unauthorized Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X Direction Name IEEE Name Description Rx Total dotixAuthEapolFrames The number of valid EAPOL Rx frames of any type that have been received by the switch Rx Response ID dotixAuthEapolRespld The number of valid EAPOL FramesRx Response Identity frames that
177. Status This Page shows MAC based VLAN entries configured by various MAC based VLAN users The MAC based VLAN Status screen in Figure 4 6 18 appears MAC based VLAN Membership Status for User Static Static w Auto refresh C Refresh Port Members mc adress vean 10 3 2 3 5 6 7 9 sofss s2 s9 sqfss ao a7 s6fiofzo No data exists for the user Figure 4 6 18 MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration for User Static Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID e Port Members Port members of the MAC based VLAN entry Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 131 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 6 13 IP Subnet based VLAN The IP subnet based VLAN enties can be configured here This Page allows for adding updating and deleting IP subnet based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This Page shows only static entries The IP based VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 19 appears IP Subnet based VLAN Membership Configuration Auto refresh Refresh Port Members A rotas Delete VCE 1 Address masi tengin vean 10 o plioJa afeo e ro io ioa SS Currently no entries present Cd Currently no entries present Add New Entry Reset Figure 4 6 19 Protocol to G
178. TTPS configuration Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Configuration 389 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch HTTPs Mode Description Set or show the HTTPS mode Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable HTTPs disable Disable HTTPs default Show HTTPs mode Default Setting enable Security Switch HTTPs Redirect Description Set or show the HTTPS redirect mode Automatic redirect web browser to HTTPS during HTTPS mode enabled Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Redirect enable disable Parameters enable Enable HTTPs redirect disable Disable HTTPs redirect default Show HTTPs redirect mode Default Setting disable 390 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch Access Configuration Description Show access management configuration Syntax Security Switch Access Configuration Security Switch Access Mode Description Set or show the access management mode Syntax Security Switch Access Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable access management disable Disable access management default Show access management mode Default Setting disable Security Switch Access Add Description Add access management entry default Add all supported protocols Syntax User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch Access Add lt access_id gt lt start_ip_addr gt lt end_ip_addr gt web snmp telnet Para
179. Transmit Hold Count parameter Syntax STP Txhold lt holdcount gt Parameters lt holdcount gt STP Transmit Hold Count 1 10 Default Setting 6 STP MaxHops Description Set or show the MSTP Bridge Max Hop Count parameter Syntax STP MaxHops lt maxhops gt Parameters lt maxhops gt STP BPDU MaxHops 6 40 Default Setting 20 442 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP STP MaxAge Description Set or show the bridge instance maximum age Syntax STP MaxAge lt max_age gt Parameters lt max_age gt STP maximum age time 6 40 and max_age lt forward_delay 1 2 Default Setting 20 STP FwdDelay Description Set or show the bridge instance forward delay Syntax STP FwdDelay lt delay gt Parameters lt delay gt MSTP forward delay 4 30 and max_age lt forward_delay 1 2 Default Setting 15 443 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP STP CName Description Set or Show MSTP configuration name and revision Syntax STP CName lt config name gt lt integer gt Parameters lt config name gt MSTP Configuration name A text string up to 32 characters long Use quotes to embed spaces in name lt integer gt Integer value Default Setting Configuration name MAC address Configuration rev O STP BPDU Filter Description Set or show edge port BPDU Filtering Syntax STP bpduFilter enable disabl
180. User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP If the QoS class has been dynamically changed then the actual QoS class is shown in parentheses after the configured QoS class Syntax QoS Port Classification Class lt port_list gt lt class gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class gt QoS class 0 7 Default Setting 0 470 QoS Port Classification DPL Description Set or show the default Drop Precedence Level Syntax QoS Port Classification DPL lt port_list gt lt dpl gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dpl gt Drop Precedence Level 0 1 Default Setting 0 QoS Port Classification PCP Description Set or show the default Priority Code Point Syntax QoS Port Classification PCP lt port_list gt lt pcp gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt pcp gt Priority Code Point 0 7 Default Setting 0 QoS Port Classification DEI Description Set or show the default Drop Eligible Indicator Syntax QoS Port Classification DEI lt port_list gt lt dei gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dei gt Priority Code Point 0 1 Default Setting 0 471 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QoS Port Classification Tag Description Set or show if the classification is based on the PCP and DEI values in
181. VLAN Description Set or show either global state use the global keyword or per port state of RADIUS assigned VLAN Syntax Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN global lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters global Select the global RADIUS assigned VLAN setting lt port_list gt Select the per port RADIUS assigned VLAN setting default Show current per port RADIUS assigned VLAN state enable Enable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports default Show current RADIUS assigned VLAN state Default Setting disable 421 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN Description Set or show either global state and parameters use the global keyword or per port state of Guest VLAN Unless the global keyword is used the lt reauth_max gt and lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt parameters will not be unused Syntax Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN global lt port_list gt enable disable lt vid gt lt reauth_max gt lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt Parameters global Select the global Guest VLAN setting lt port_list gt Select the per port Guest VLAN setting default Show current per port Guest VLAN state enable disable enable Enable Guest VLAN either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable Guest VLAN either globally or on one or more ports default Show current Guest VLAN st
182. VLAN Table The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 12 appears MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Refresh lt lt la Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page VLAN ID Snooping Enabled MLD Querier Compatibility QI sec QRI 0 1 sec LLQI 0 1 sec URI sec Add New MLD VLAN save Reset Figure 4 8 12 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the next save e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry 170 e MLD Snooping Enable User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Enable the per VLAN MLD Snooping Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected e MLD Querier Enable the MLD Querier in the VLAN e Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is MLD Auto Forced MLDv1 Forced MLDv2 default compatibility value is MLD Auto Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a link The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 Query Interval The Query Interval variable denotes the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interva
183. WGSW 20160HP 4 9 Quality of Service 4 9 1 Understand QOS Quality of Service QoS is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic such as multi media video protocol specific time critical and file backup traffic QoS reduces bandwidth limitations delay loss and jitter It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic You can use QoS on your system to e Control a wide variety of network traffic by e Classifying traffic based on packet attributes e Assigning priorities to traffic for example to set higher priorities to time critical or business critical applications e Applying security policy through traffic filtering e Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter e Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows e Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network e Manage network congestion QoS Terminology e Classifier classifies the traffic on the network Traffic classifications are determined by protocol application source dest
184. _list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable VLAN ingress filtering disable Disable VLAN ingress filtering default Show VLAN ingress filtering Default Setting Disable 376 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP VLAN Mode Description Set or show the VLAN Mode Syntax VLAN Mode portbased dot1q Parameters portbased Port Based VLAN Mode dotiq 802 1Q VLAN Mode default Show VLAN Mode Default Setting IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Link Type Description Set or show the port VLAN link type Syntax VLAN LinkType lt port_list gt untagged tagged Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports untagged VLAN Link Type Tagged tagged VLAN Link Type Untagged default Show VLAN link type Default Setting Un tagged 377 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP VLAN Q in Q Mode Description Set or show the port Q in Q mode Syntax VLAN QinQ lt port_list gt disable man customer Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disable Q in Q VLAN Mode man Q in Q MAN Port Mode customer Q in Q Customer Port Mode default Show VLAN QinQ Mode VLAN Ethernet Type Description Set or show out layer VLAN tag ether type in Q in Q VLAN mode Syntax VLAN Ethtype lt port_list gt man dot1q Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports man Set o
185. a 61 4 2 9 DHCP Relay Statistics iin hnr hPa Ae ea ie 63 42 10 6PU Ea sacd dani 65 4 2 1 System O odes tat ered Maa ied ee ele eels Aciidet cash be peat tears 66 4212 Detailed LOG iii de dd ee 67 4 2 13 Remote SYSIOG ii ota 68 4 214 SMTP Configuration 69 42 15 Web Fitmware Upgrades a a a ara a a aa a sehepsgeedguespeudacersgnocentsigaedevbansareags 70 4 2 16 TFTP Firmware Upgrade a E ANA 71 4 2 17 Configuration Backup niniin en e Eae a e a a a o h 71 4 2 18 Gonfiguration Upload srda a ap cats a atap a a a iaaa sf cata a iae an i iaa aana A ANE aE 74 4 219 Image Select a A A a e ee 75 42 20 Factory Detallada 76 42 21 System Reboot A A da prota 77 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocol cccsecceseeeeeseeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeseseaesasneeeeeeeeseaaesaseeeeeeeesseaeseseenseeeeeeees 78 43T SNMP OVOnIGW cita o de eee 78 4 3 2 SNMP System Configuration oooccccnonccononocnnononcncnnnoncnnnnnn cnn nan nn cnn nr rro r nan r rara n nn anne nn nr ner nnnn nn anne rnnnnnnes 79 4 3 3 SNMP Trap Configuration iii Di ciataa 80 4 34 SNMP System Informatio Meire en ire 82 4 3 5SNMPY3 C nfig r tioM aoee aeren teare aaae aae EA a A rr osados eran REES 83 4 3 5 1 SNMPV3 COMMUNITIES ti A tia 83 ARIZONA tuasidede T EEE edie 84 4 3 5 3 SNMPV3 GlOUPS weiss n a ea O E E EA N E E A aE A Aa Tae E AE sti aoviypeutwe seats 85 4 3 D A SNMPVS VIEWS eo a acia o loe 86 4 3 5 5 SNMPV3 ACCESS A ei 87 4 4 POrt Manage Me nt insir scscelccs cecceecitevecce
186. a fields for defining UDP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file TCP Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file e IP Protocol Value When Specific is selected for the IP protocol value you can enter a specific value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value 217 e IP TTL User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Specify the Time to Live settings for this ACE zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry non zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e IP Fragment Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE This involves the settings for the More Fragments MF bit and the Fragment Offset FRAG OFFSET field for an IPv4 frame No IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must not be able to match this entry Yes Pv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e IP Option Specify the options flag setting for this ACE No IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry Yes Pv4 frames
187. able An empty row is added to the table Frame Type Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new entry Add New Entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds i Click to refresh the Page immediately 134 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 6 15 Protocol based VLAN Membership This Page allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the switch The Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table screen in Figure 4 6 21 appears Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table Port Members AO Delete Group name vran 10 2 3 457 9 50 0 1223 10J55 5J0 59 29 20 o NoGroupenties O O OOOO O No Group entries Add New Entry Reset Auto refresh Refresh Figure 4 6 21 Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e Group Name A valid Group Name is a string of atmost 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 no special character is allowed Whichever Group name yo
188. abled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled bled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled DSen ot Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 4 9 4 QoS Egress Port Shapers Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers For more detail please refe
189. ach single users clients The situation forces the ISP to build up the IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 network infrastructure speedily To fulfill the demand PLANET releases the IPv6 management 802 3at PoE Gigabit Ethernet Switch WGSW 20160HP Managed Switch It supports both IPv4 and IPv6 management functions It can work with original network structure IPv4 and also support the new network structure IPv6 in the future With easy and friendly management interfaces and plenty of management functions included the WGSW 20160HP Managed Switch is the best choice for ISP to build the IPv6 FTTx edge service and for SMB to connect with IPv6 network 21 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP High Performance Cost effective Gigabit solution for Enterprise backbone and Data Center Networking The WGSW 20160HP is the Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Switch which can handle extremely large amounts of data in a secure topology linking to an Enterprise backbone or high capacity network server with 40Gbps switching fabric The powerful features of QoS and network security make WGSW 20160HP to offer effective data traffic control for ISPs and Enterprises such as VoIP video streaming and multicast applications It is ideal for the core layer of campus enterprise networks and the aggregation layer of IP metropolitan networks Perfect Integration Solution for IP PoE Camera and NVR System The WGSW 20160HP provides 16 10 100 1000Mbps 802 3at PoE ports 4 Port Gigabit TP
190. ackets received that were directed to a multicast address e CRC Alignment The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets e Undersize The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets 344 e Oversize User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets e Fragements The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Jabb The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Collision The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment e 64 Bytes The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length e 65 127 Bytes The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 to 127 octets in length e 128 255 Bytes The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 to 255 octets in length e 256 511 Bytes The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 to 511 octets in length e 512 1023 Bytes The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 to 1023 octets in length e 1024 1518 Bytes The total number of packets including bad packets received that were betwe
191. ag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged Ml Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLAN are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default E Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to
192. ag gt lt vid gt lt pcp gt lt dei gt lt smac gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt lic lt dsap gt lt ssap gt lt control gt snap lt pid gt ipv4 lt protocol gt lt sip gt lt dscp gt QCE ID 1 256 default Next available ID Next QCE ID next_id 1 256 or last Port List port lt port_list gt or all default All ports Frame tag untag tag any VID 1 4095 or any either a specific VID or range of VIDs Priority Code Point specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or any Drop Eligible Indicator 0 1 or any Source MAC address xx xx xx or any 24 MS bits OUI Destination MAC type unicast multicast broadcast any Ethernet Type keyword Ethernet Type 0x600 OxFFFF or any but excluding 0x800 IPv4 and Ox86DD IPv6 LLC keyword Destination Service Access Point 0x00 OxFF or any Source Service Access Point 0x00 OxFF or any LLC control 0x00 OxFF or any SNAP keyword Protocol ID EtherType or any IPv4 keyowrd IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or any Source IP address a b c d n or any DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 or any specific or range 487 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP lt fragment gt IPv4 frame fragmented yes nolany lt sport gt Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or any specific or port range lt dport gt Dest TCP UDP port
193. age Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e LogTime Indicates Event log time e LogDescription Indicates the Event description Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 18 6 RMON Event Status This Page provides an overview of RMON Event table entries Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the Event table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Event table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest Event Index and Log Index found in the Event table table screen in Figure 4 18 6 appears RMON Event Overview Auto refresh C Start from Control Index 0 and Sample Index 0 with 20 entries per page Event e No more entries Figure 4 18 6 RMON Event Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Event Index Indicates the index of the event entry 338 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e Log Index Indicates the index of the log entry e LogTime Indicates Event log time e LogDescription Indicates the Event description Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs
194. al of WGSW 20160HP Aggregation Delete denies tageguodededdncebegddeegudycendedegeveneddteysubgeeesdheeteeduessntecoes 452 Aggregation Lo0kUD 0 diia eae 453 Aggregation Mode viii idad 453 6 10 Link Aggregation Control Protocol COMMmanda ceccccetcceseeeeeeeeee snes eeseeeneeeeseeseseaeeeeeeeesneeseneeeensneeees 454 LAG P COnfiQuratlon a rita ata 454 LACP Mode ieshete heen eee aie eae ened Aen cee dee a hd ede E 454 LACARRA ade eaten oo Sees to SE te ae ed Hen ee Se eh eee aie 455 LACP Prior Visitador aseo 455 LAGP System Priority ati AAA 456 ACP Role ii edges a cee tue e aeda veces dveceede eed eg ines etisiedetiietnin eaten 456 LACA SU A NEEL Ae he MSE e ee E 456 LACP StatiSties uri 457 LACA TM EATE rh ee 2d A At eh Ate ha Ais Pa Nie Med od Mie AN E de Seis 457 6 11 EL DP COmimain ices ts cessiececseece ste easedeadect ncctessecteancce sedans secdnededdectteeestiesvadsectuaueqauesysicachagteau ue enact adenda 458 LEDP Configuration Wa A Stacia deans ean do 458 EL DP Mode cit ab 458 ULDPO ptionalMEV lt cto reses atari Ple esteis e aes 459 ULDP tear ee ie Agnes ete eh Midi hearer Mies 459 LD AO A A A Neds a ENS A es a 460 LLDP Delay iii A ee E 460 UE DP RIN Its se 02 seein to ithe e Ae ee nee ee lh a a el eee eis 460 ULDP Statistics a reto al iaa ea ec 461 LEDP INTO cm ch ie ot te dao e dl data on lisa ata de lll aio enla Nace ithe e edita Y dido a ahd 461 LLDP CDP AWATO a 461 6 12 LUDPMED Command iii a a da r 462 L
195. al of WGSW 20160HP frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded By default the field is set to All e Link Type Allow 802 1Q Untagged or Tagged VLAN for selected port When adding a VLAN to selected port it tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress Untag outgoing frames without VLAN Tagged Tagged outgoing frames with VLAN Tagged e Q in Q Mode Sets the Managed Switch to QinQ mode and allows the QinQ tunnel port to be configured The default is for the Managed Switch to function in Disable mode Disable The port operates in its normal VLAN mode This is the default MAN Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for an uplink port to another device within the service provider network Customer Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for a client access port to segregate and preserve customer VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the service provider network Set Out layer VLAN tag The Tag Protocol Identifier TPID specifies the ethertype of incoming packets on a tunnel access port 802 1Q Tag 8100 VMAN Tag 88A8 ether type Default 802 1Q Tag aca The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID Note Buttons Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 115 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 6 5 VLAN Membership E Adding Static
196. ame Type Rate Limiter Port Redirect Mirror CPU CPU Once Conflict No entries Combined Auto refresh Refresh Figure 4 10 1 ACL Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e User Indicates the ACL user e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames 209 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped e Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When
197. ame gt Configuration file name check Check configuration file only default Check and apply file 492 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 17 Firmware Command Firmware Load Description Load new firmware from TFTP server Syntax Firmware Load lt ip_addr_string gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt file_name gt Firmware file name Firmware IPv6 Load Description Load new firmware from IPv6 TFTP server Syntax Firmware IPv6 Load lt ipv6_server gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ipv6_server gt TFTP server IPv6 address lt file_name gt Firmware file name Firmware Information Description Display information about active and alternate firmware images Syntax Firmware Information Firmware Swap Description Activate the alternate firmware image Syntax Firmware Swap 493 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 18 UPnP Command UPnP Configuration Description Show UPnP configuration Syntax UPnP Configuration UPnP Mode Description Set or show the UPnP mode Syntax UPnP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable UPnP disable Disable UPnP default Show UPnP mode Default Setting disable UPnP TTL Description Set or show the TTL value of the IP header in SSDP messages Syntax UPnP TTL lt ttl gt Parameters lt ttl gt ttl range 1 255 default Show UPnP TTL
198. anagement Function Basic Management Interfaces Console Telnet Web Browser SNMP v1 v2c Secure Management Interfaces SSH SSL SNMP v3 Port disable enable Port Configuration Auto Negotiation 10 100 1000Mbps full and half duplex mode selection Flow Control disable enable Display each port s speed duplex mode link status Flow control status Auto negotiation status trunk status Many to 1 monitor 802 1Q Tagged Based VLAN up to 255 VLAN groups Q in Q tunneling Private VLAN Edge PVE MAC Based VLAN Protocol Based VLAN Voice VLAN MVR Multicast VLAN Registration Up to 255 VLAN groups out of 4094 VLAN IDs P IEEE 802 3ad LACP Static Trunk Link Aggregation Support 10 groups of 16 Port trunk support Traffic classification based Strict priority and WRR 8 Level priority for switching Port Number 802 1p priority 802 1Q VLAN tag DSCP TOS field in IP Packet IGMP Snooping IGMP v1 v2 v3 Snooping up to 255 multicast Groups IGMP Querier mode support MLD Snooping MLD v1 v2 Snooping up to 255 multicast Groups MLD Querier mode support Access ControllLiat IP Based el MAC Based ACL Up to 256 entries Per port bandwidth control Bandwidth Control Ingress 500Kb 80Mbps Egress 64Kb 80Mbps RFC 1213 MIB II IF MIB RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB RFC 2863 Interface MIB RFC 2665 Ether Like MIB RFC 2819 RMON MIB Group 1 2 3 and 9 RFC 2737 Entity MIB RFC 2618 RADIUS Client MIB 29 Us
199. and activates additional ports as long as the aggregated power of the system is lower than the power level at which additional PDs cannot be connected When this value is exceeded ports will be deactivated according to user defined priorities The power budget is managed according to the following user definable parameters maximum available power ports priority maximum allowable power per port Reserved Power determined by There are five modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power and when to shut down ports E Classification mode In this mode each port automatic determines how much power to reserve according to the class the connected PD belongs to and reserves the power accordingly Four different port classes exist and one for 4 7 15 4 and 30 8 Watts Class Usage Range of maximum power used by the PD Class Dsecription MIN Default 0 44 to 12 95 Watts Classification unimplement MEM Optional 0 44 to 3 84 Watts Very low power _2 Optional 3 84 to 6 49 Watts uN Optional 6 49 to 12 95 Watts or to 15 4Watts la Optional 12 95 to 25 50 Watts or to 30 8Watts High power gA In this mode the Maximum Power fields have no effect Note 319 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP a Allocation mode In this mode the user allocates the amount of power that each port may reserve The allocated reserved power for each port PD is specified in the Maximum Power fields The ports are shut down when total reserved
200. andby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails If the group is defined as a local static link aggregationing group then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports The aggregation code ensures that frames belonging to the same frame flow for example a TCP connection are always forwarded on the same link aggregation member port Reording of frames within a flow is therefore not possible The aggregation code is based on the following information e Source MAC e Destination MAC e Source and destination IPv4 address e Source and destination TCP UDP ports for IPv4 packets Normally all 5 contributions to the aggregation code should be enabled to obtain the best traffic distribution among the link aggregation member ports Each link aggregation may consist of up to 10 member ports Any quantity of link aggregation s may be configured for the device only limited by the quantity of ports on the device To configure a proper traffic distribution the ports within a link aggregation must use the same link speed 99 4 5 1 Static Aggregation User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP This Page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group The aggregation hash mode settings are global whereas the aggregation group relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the Page header Hash Code Contributors The Static Aggeration screen in Figure 4 5 2 appears Aggregation Mode C
201. ank or space characters are permitted as part of a location Default Setting empty System Log Level Description Show or set the system log level It uses to determine what kind of message will send to syslog server Syntax System Log Level info warninglerror Parameters info Send informations warnings and errors warning Send warnings and errors error Send errors Default Setting info 356 System Timezone Description Set or show the system timezone offset Syntax System Timezone lt offset gt Parameters lt offset gt Time zone offset in minutes 720 to 720 relative to UTC Default Setting 0 System Log Lookup Description Show or clear the system log Syntax System Log Lookup lt log_id gt alllinfo warning error Parameters lt log_id gt System log ID or range default All entries all Show all levels default info Show informations warning Show warnings error Show errors 357 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP System Log Clear Description Clear the system log Syntax System Log Clear alllinfo warning error Parameters all Show all levels default info Show informations warning Show warnings error Show errors System Reboot Description Reboot the system Syntax System Reboot System Restore Default Description Restore factory default configuration Syntax System
202. apability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed e Maximum Frame Size Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS The allowed range is 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes e Excessive Collision Configure port transmit collision behavior Mode Discard Discard frame after 16 collisions default a Restart Restart back off algorithm after 16 collisions e Power Control The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled a PerfectReach Link up power savings enabled a Enabled Link up and link down power savings enabled ga When set each port to run at 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full and 10M Half speed modes The A Auto MDIX function will disable Note 90 Buttons Save Click to save changes User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Reset Click to undo any chang
203. application layers on top of the protocol in order to achieve these related properties Initially a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbour has been detected in order share LLDP MED information as fast as possible to new neighbours Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbours it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility of the neighbours receiving the LLDP frame With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission would be repeated The recommended value is 4 times given that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when an LLDP frame with new information is received It should be noted that LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including Network Connectivity Devices or other types of links Coordinates Location Object Description e Latitud
204. are Security Model and Security Name The SNMPv3 Groups screen in Figure 4 3 6 appears SNMPv3 Group Configuration public default_ro_group private default_rv_group public default_ro_group private default_rw_group default_user default_rw_group Figure 4 3 6 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration Page Screenshot 85 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are E v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 E v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c E usm User based Security Model USM e Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new group entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 5 4 SNMPv3 Views Configure SNMPv3 views table on this Page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree The SNMPv3 Views screen in Figure 4 3 7 appears SNMPv
205. are not able to access each other PCs of each isolate port But they all need to access with the same server AP Printer The screen in Figure 4 6 14 appears This section will show you how to configure the port for the server that could be accessed by each isolate port Promiscuous Public Servers me Bake Pi or tiscuous IIS Y VLAN 1 Private VLAN VLAN 2 Private VLAN Setup steps 1 Assign Port Mode Set Port 1 Port 4 in Isolate port Set Port5 and Port 6 in Promiscuous port The screen in Figure 4 6 15 appears Port Number 11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 E E E BOO Figure 4 6 15 The Configuration of Isolate and Promiscuous Port 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 1 Port 1 Port 2 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 2 Port 3 Port 6 The screen in Figure 4 6 16 appears 129 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Port Members E ora ems att cana aTe ol o efate lv y M 7 7 4 6 11 MAC based VLAN Figure 4 6 16 Private VLAN Port Setting The MAC based VLAN enties can be configured here This Page allows for adding and deleting MAC based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This Page shows only static entries The MAC based VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 17 appears MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Auto refresh C Port Members Tr nembars 2 Delete MAC Address viaw 10 lalo olaa jojo o Currently no ent
206. ased QoS Ingress Port Classification Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 186 4 9 4 Port Scheduler User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP This Page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports The Port Scheduler screen in Figure 4 9 3 appears QoS Egress Port Schedulers 1 2 3 4 5 6 Z Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority afael Figure 4 9 3 QoS Egress Port Schedule Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 5 1 e Mode Shows the scheduling mode for this port e Q0 Q5 Shows the weight for this queue and port 187 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 9 5 Port Shaping This Page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports The Port Shapping screen in Figure 4 9 4 appears QoS Egress Port Shapers Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Dis
207. at are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is by aging the entries For ports in MAC based Auth mode reauthentication doesn t cause direct communication between the switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry e Hold Time This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth If a client is denied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration Security AAA Page the client is put 232 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not count during an on going authentication In MAC based Auth mode the The switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled RADIUS assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIU
208. ate lt vid gt Guest VLAN ID used when entering the Guest VLAN Use the global keyword to change it default Show current Guest VLAN ID lt reauth_max gt The value can only be set if you use the global keyword in the beginning of the command The number of times a Request Identity EAPOL frame is sent without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN default Show current Maximum Reauth Count value lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt The value can only be set if you use the global keyword in the beginning of the command disable The Guest VLAN can only be entered if no EAPOL frames have been received on a port for the lifetime of the port enable The Guest VLAN can be entered even if an EAPOL frame has been received during the lifetime of the port default Show current setting Default Setting disable 422 Security Network NAS Authenticate Description Refresh restart 802 1X authentication process Syntax Security Network NAS Authenticate lt port_list gt now Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports now Force reauthentication immediately default Schedule a reauthentication Security Network NAS Statistics Description Show or clear 802 1X statistics Syntax Security Network NAS Statistics lt port_list gt clear eapol radius Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear statistics eapol Show EAPOL stati
209. ated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches However before making any physical connections between devices use the Link aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends When using a port link aggregation note that e The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type RJ 45 100 Mbps fiber e The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions see below e Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports e None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port e All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN e The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole e Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop e Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop It allows a maximum of 10 ports to be aggregated at the same time The Managed Switch support Gigabit Ethernet ports up to 5 groups If the group is defined as a LACP static link aggregationing group then any extra ports selected are placed in a st
210. atic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Resolve Conflict Click to release the resources required to add QCL entry in case the conflict status for any QCL entry is Click to refresh the Page 4 9 13 Storm Control Configuration Storm control for the switch is configured on this Page There is a unicast storm rate control multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch The Storm Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 15 appears Storm Control Configuration Frame Type Enable Rate pps 1 v Unicast F Multicast Fi Broadcast F Figure 4 9 15 Storm Control Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Frame Type The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here Unicast Multicast or Broadcast e Enable Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type e Rate The rate unit is packets per second pps Valid values are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K 1024K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
211. ation mode enabled E Disabled Disable DHCP relay information mode operation e Relay Information Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy When enable DHCP relay Policy information mode operation if agent receive a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information It will enforce the policy And it only works under DHCP relay information operation mode enabled Possible policies are E Replace Replace the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it E Keep Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it 62 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP E Drop Drop the package when receive a DHCP message that already contains relay information Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 9 DHCP Relay Statistics This Page provides statistics for DHCP relay The DHCP Relay Statistics screen in Figure 4 2 12 appears DHCP Relay Statistics Server Statistics Transmit to Transmit Receive from Receive Missing Agent Receive Missing Receive Missing Receive Bad Receive Bad Server Error Server Option Circuit ID Remote ID Circuit ID Remote ID Auto Refresh Refresh Clear Figure 4 2 12 DHCP Relay Statistics Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Server Statistics Object Description e Transmit to Server
212. ation when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an initial identity request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP response identity frame However if during bootup the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the Es client are dropped If the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame after three attempts to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails If the authentication succeeds the switch port becomes authorized The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Figure 4 11 2 shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP aut
213. atus is don t care MC Frame must be multicast BC Frame must be broadcast UC Frame must be unicast Specific If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DMAC value appears e DMAC Value When Specific is selected for the DMAC filter you can enter a specific destination VLAN Parameters Object MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value Description e 802 1Q Tagged Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802 1Q tagged The allowed values are Any Any value is allowed don t care Enabled Tagged frame only Disabled Untagged frame only The default value is Any e VLAN ID Filter Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE Any No VLAN ID filter is specified VLAN ID filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE choose this value Afield for entering a VLAN ID number appears e VLANID When Specific is selected for the VLAN ID filter you can enter a specific VLAN ID number The allowed range is 1 to 4095 A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value e Tag Priority Specify the tag priority for this ACE A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority The allowed number range is 0 to 7 The value Any means that no tag priority is specified tag priority is don t ca
214. ay retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A 256 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout e Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name RFC4668 Name Description IP Address State Round Tri p Time radiusAuthClient ExtRoundTripTim e 257 IP address and UDP port for the authentication server in question Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matched it from the RADIUS authentication server The granularit
215. below applies e Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values None authentication is disabled and login is not possible Local use the local user database on the switch stack for authentication RADIUS use a remote RADIUS server for authentication TACACS use a remote TACACS server for authentication e Fallback Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box If none of the configured authentication servers are alive the local user database is used for authentication This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to something else than none or local Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 11 3 Network Access Server Configuration This Page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X and MAC based authentication system and port settings The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication One or more central servers the backend servers determine whether the user is allowed access to the network These backend RADIUS servers are configured on the Configuration Security gt AAA Page The IEEE802 1X standard defines port based operation but non standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below MA
216. ber of RADIUS Authenticators adAuthenticators Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes received from the server 255 Tx Tx Tx Tx Unknown Types Packets Dropped Access Requests Access Retransmissio ns Pending Requests Timeouts User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP radiusAuthClientExtU nknownTypes radiusAuthClientExtP acketsDropped radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRequests radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRetransmission S radiusAuthClientExtP endingRequests radiusAuthClientExtT imeouts The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to the server This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to the RADIUS authentication server The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject Access Challenge timeout or retransmission The number of authentication timeouts to the server After a timeout the client m
217. ber that dropped received packets with relay agent information option Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh clear Clear all statistics Click to refresh the Page immediately 64 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 2 10 CPU Load This Page displays the CPU load using a SVG graph The load is measured as averaged over the last 100ms 1sec and 10 seconds intervals The last 120 samles are graphed and the last numbers are displayed as text as well In order to display the SVG graph your browser must support the SVG format Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support Specifically at the time of writing Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG The CPU Load screen in Figure 4 2 13 appears CPU Load Aulorstesh El 100ms 3 1sec 1 10sec 1 all numbers running average Figure 4 2 13 CPU Load Page Screenshot Buttons Auto refresh dl Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds ga If your browser can not displies anythings in this Page please download Adobe SVG tool and install it in your computer 65 4 2 11 System Log User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Managed Switch system log information is provided here The System Log screen in Figure 4 2 14 appears System Log Information v All Clear Level
218. bled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled All Untag_this Auto refresh C Figure 4 6 5 VLAN Port Status for Static User Page Screenshot bh bo obobohbobohbochohbchd ride sec The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e PVID Shows the VLAN identifier for that port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 e Port Type Show the VLAN Awareness for the port If VLAN awareness is enabled the tag is removed from tagged frames received on the port VLAN tagged frames are classified to the VLAN ID in the tag If VLAN awareness is disabled all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed e Ingress Filtering Show the ingress filtering for a port This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded e Frame Type Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port are discarded 119 User s Manual of WGSW 201
219. bles disables the the automatic aging of dynamic entries e Aging Time MAC Table Learning The time after which a learned entry is discarded By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Range 10 10000000 seconds Default 300 seconds If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out another module is in control of the mode so that it cannot be changed by the user An example of such a module is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Object Description e Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received e Disable No learning is done e Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped Static MAC Table Configuration Note Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry Port Members Checkmark
220. blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic e Time of Addition Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port e Age Hold If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seconds expires and no frames have been seen the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely a dash will be shown 279 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh Cl Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 12 8 DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of DUT when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server Configure DHCP Snooping on this Page The DHCP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 8 appears DHCP Snooping Configuration Snooping Mode Port Mode Configuration Figure 4 12 8 DHCP Snooping Configuration Scree
221. c during the last sampling period e Startup Alarm The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are E RisingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold E FallingTrigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold E RisingOrFallingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or less than the falling threshold default e Rising Threshold Rising threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 e Rising Index Rising event index 1 65535 e Falling Threshold Falling threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 e Falling Index Falling event index 1 65535 Buttons Add New Enty Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 334 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 18 2 RMON Alarm Detail This Page provides an Detail of a specific RMON statistics entry screen in Figure 4 18 2 appears Detailed RMON Alarm ID Auto refresh O Interval undefined Variable SampleType Value Startup RisingThreshold Risingindex FallingThreshold Fallingindex O E O E O E O El Figure 4 18 2 Detailed RMON Alarm ID Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing th
222. cast group The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 7 appears 163 The Page includes the following fields User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Figure 4 8 7 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Page Screenshot Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings Buttons Filtering Group Add New Filtering Group The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered Click Add New Filtering Group to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Specify the Port and Filtering Group of the new entry Click Save Add new Filtering Group Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Save Click to save changes Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 164 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping Status This Page provides IGMP Snooping status The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4 8 8 appears Auto refresh E Refresh Clear IGMP Snooping Status Statistics Figure 4 8 8 IGMP Snooping Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version Working Querier Version currently e Host Version Working Host Version currently e Quer
223. cencctessectesuecescdeusdecteadecsscatesdectty ents sndeesdecduesacs ednecTaaddigencesasesisnddusteae 89 4 41 PortiGonflguration s 3i2 dsseid sizes tay A eee hie ee 89 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview ai 91 4 4 3 Port Statistics De tall ii ccctecceigereeenshanzes A oi 92 VA A SFP Informations ai eis ek A Ge Ga de a ee ioe ere sede cated 94 AAS iPOrt O ON 95 45 Link Aggregat ON idad 98 ADIDAS O a ee divi teva ieee E ee eee 100 4 5 2 LACP Configurations miii e Da tase dia pa ds 102 4 5 3 LACP SYStOM Status cito dao pbeeuasuue Ea EAEE Eaa RAER EiT eii 104 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 5 4 LACP Port Status ccoo ies 105 4 5 5 LACP Port att ion a a ic 106 BOM Ni dd 107 4 651 VEAN OverVie Wisin 107 4 62 PORY Ea E EE E AE E ee ah ee A ee ee 108 4 6 3 VLAN Basic Information ienei na el eid a ee eee ei es 111 4 6 4 VLAN Port Configuration 25 cocceccoesesec cused cee tient ce cdasecevieek Geek DA oia 112 4 0 5 VLAN Membership visionar tattoo 116 4 6 0 VLAN Membership Status sii tii Aia 117 4 6 7 VLAN Port Status A iia 119 4 6 8 Private VIANA SPORES AS TENSE SSE Da et nes et eh 120 4 6 9 Port ISOLATION rca a AAA 122 4 6 10 VLAN Setting example des 124 4 6 10 1 Two separate 802 10 VLAN weccsncc seared eee teense ese 124 4 6 10 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware switch o oo eeeseeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeesaaeeeeeneaeeeenaeeeenaaes 127 4 6 10 3 Port Isolate amis adopta ida 129 4o M MAC based VIC N ccoo tado o rai trote e a oh a
224. cer flow control disable Disable port policer flow control default Show port policer flow control mode Default Setting disable QoS Port Scheduler Mode Description Set or show the port scheduler mode Syntax QoS Port Scheduler Mode lt port_list gt strict weighted Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports strict Strict mode weighted Weighted mode default Show port scheduler mode Default Setting strict 475 QoS Port Scheduler Weight Description Set or show the port scheduler weight Syntax QoS Port Scheduler Weight lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt lt weight gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Weighted queue list or all default All weighted queues 0 5 lt weight gt Scheduler weight 1 100 QoS Port Shaper Mode Description Set or show the port queue shaper mode Syntax QoS Port Shaper Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Queue list or all default All queues 0 7 enable Enable port queue shaper disable Disable port queue shaper default Show port queue shaper mode Default Setting disable 476 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QoS Port Shaper Rate Description Set or show the port queue shaper rate Syntax QoS Port Shaper Rate lt p
225. characters 498 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP MVR VLAN Priority Description Set or show per MVR VLAN priority and VLAN tag Syntax MVR VLAN Priority lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt priority tagged untagged Parameters lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt MVR VLAN ID 1 4095 or Name Maximum of 32 characters priority CoS priority value ranges from 0 7 tagged Tagged IGMP MLD frames will be sent untagged Untagged IGMP MLD frames will be sent MVR Immediate Leave Description Set or show MVR immediate leave per port Syntax MVR Immediate Leave lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Immediate Leave disable Disable Immediate Leave default Show MVR Immediate Leave MVR Status Description Show Clear MVR operational status Syntax MVR Status lt vid gt clear Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 clear Clear log 499 MVR Groups Description Show MVR group addresses Syntax MVR Groups lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 MVR SFM Description Show SFM including SSM related information for MVR Syntax MVR SFM lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 500 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 20 Voice VLAN Command Voice VLAN Configuration Descri
226. checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports e Guest VLAN ID This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4095 e Max Reauth Count The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with 233 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 255 e Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen Port Configuration The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life time of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled The table has one row
227. ckets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options Circuit ID option 1 and Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address DHCP Snooping DNS DoS DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System It stores and associates many types of information with domain names Most importantly DNS translates human friendly domain
228. coming and outgoing packet are stored in a routing table This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduce the overall load on the network The Managed Switch performs Store and Fforward therefore no error packets occur More reliably it reduces the re transmission rate No packet loss will occur 529 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 7 5 Auto Negotiation The STP ports on the Switch have built in Auto negotiation This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device usually at Power On or Reset This is done by detect the modes and speeds at the second of both device is connected and capable of both 10Base T and 100Base TX devices can connect with the port in either Half or Full Duplex mode 1000Base T can be only connected in Full duplex mode 530 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 8 Power over Ethernet Overview What is PoE The PoE is an abbreviation of Power over Ethernet the PoE technology means a system to pass electrical power safely along with data on Ethernet UTP cable The IEEE standard for PoE technology requires Category 5 cable or higher for high power PoE levels but can operate with category 3 cable for low power levels Power is supplied in common mode over two or more of the differential pairs of wires
229. conditions Via the Web Management the administrator can setup the Managed Switch by select the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen in Figure 4 1 5 appears 48 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP System SNMP Port Management Link Aggregation VLANS Spanning Tree Multicast QOS Access Control List Authentication Security MAC Address Table LLDP Diagnostics POE Loop Protection gt RMON Figure 4 1 5 Managed Switch Main Functions Menu 49 4 2 System User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items System Information IP Configuration IPv6 Configuration Users Configuration Privilege Levels NTP Configuration UPnP DHCP Relay DHCP Relay Statistics CPU Load System Log Detailed Log Remote Syslog SMTP Configuration Web Firmware Upgrade TFTP Firmware Upgrade Configuration Backup Configuration Upload Image Select Factory Default System Reboot The Managed Switch system information is provided here Configure the Managed Switch managed IP information on this Page Configure the Managed Switch managed IPv6 information on this Page This Page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to
230. contain atleast one alphabet VLAN Name Lookup Description Show VLAN Name table Syntax VLAN Name Lookup lt name gt Parameters lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet 382 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP VLAN Status Description VLAN Port Configuration Status Syntax VLAN Status lt port_list gt combined static nas mvr voice_vlan mstp all conflicts Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports combined combined VLAN Users configuration static static port configuration nas NAS port configuration mvr MVR port configuration voice_vlan Voice VLAN port configuration mstp MSTP port configuration vel VCL port configuration all All VLAN Users configuration default all VLAN Users configuration 383 6 6 Private VLAN Configuration Command PVLAN Configuration Description Show Private VLAN configuration Syntax PVLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports PVLAN Add Description Add or modify Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Add lt pvlan_id gt lt port_list gt Parameters User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID The allowed range for a Private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range lt port_list gt Port list
231. contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group ITU T Y 1731 MDS is an acronym for Message Digest algorithm 5 MD5 is a message digest algorithm used cryptographic hash function with a 128 bit hash value It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991 MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 544 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from multiple ports to a mirror port In this context mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame Both incoming source and outgoing destination frames can be mi
232. cr none 476 QoS Port Shaper Modes iiiiiiini o leeri 476 QoS Port Shaper Rate de 477 QoS Port QueueShaper Modei zeskent retene eerdre anaiai rene 477 QOS P rt QueueshaperRate naa e a a i aa 478 QoS Port QueueShaper EXCESS cion A Ei 478 QoS Port TagRemarking Mode i seeria nnana E cnn ran ae ENE a EAEAN a ERE EA AAE AEAEE EE EEN EENE a 479 QoS Port T gR marking PCP pirig a aan 479 QoS Port TagRemarking DE l e aeaa a a n aa aaa aaa T aaa araa Eae cren 480 QoS Port TagRemarking Map E A AEE A EEE A NE 480 QoS Port DSCP Translation vito a dci 481 QoS Port DSCP Classificatlon isecscscegecsvsenepecveacecetehant a o ori 481 QoS Port DSCP EgressRematk a e Eee e nc nnnn cnn nc n nn cnc rra 482 QOS DSCP Mai dead 482 QoS DSO P Translation A caia 483 eored DISO mE NAE E dir ed eee ed A ee gc dao 483 AAA EIN attt An nt kn AnAk EAEN EEENAEEEENNEEEENNEENEEEEEAAEEEEAEEEE EEEE EE EEEE NEEE nant 484 QoS DSCP Classification MAP coo A e rescore eta eede 484 QoS DSEPEgressReMapD ira isa 485 QOS Port Stor UNCAS tirita iaa diia td 485 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QoS Port Storm Multicast ieii cea 486 Qos Port Storm Broadcast incio aa 486 QOS QCA suo ninia ne sienes ore er sie o e ne ele ole o dde oe ao e o A do Dass Co 487 A A E aca ta eaten i tak A O OOO SN 488 QoS QCL LOOKUP sti A A ed ed 488 QoS OCL SUS A Ra es Se ee o a ea 489 Q0S OCL Retreat aldeas 489 6 15 Mirror Command voii dada iria Ko araoc a cediendo 490 Mirror Configuration
233. ctly It should be configured through its own GUI The Voice VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 17 appears Voice VLAN Configuration lt All gt w lt All gt he lt All gt r oea Disabled w OU Disabled w Disabled OU Disabled w Disabled Ou Disabled w Disabled x OU Disabled w Disabled OU Disabled w Disabled w Ou Disabled Disabled w OU Disabled w Disabled x OU Disabled w Disabled w OU isebled w Disabled w OU Disabled Disave Disabled w Disabled Ou Disabled Disabled w OUI Disabled w Disabled w Ou Disabled w Disabled OU Disabled w Disabled OU Disabled w Disabled OU Disabled Disabled w OUI Figure 4 9 17 Voice VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot 206 The Page includes the following fields Object User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Description e Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation VLAN ID Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is conflict configuration if the value equal management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 Aging Time Indicates the Voice VLAN
234. cts on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of E hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed out wheeled bin symbol Do not dispose of L 4 WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately ai Revision PLANET 16 Port 10 100 1000Mbps 802 3at PoE 4 Port Gigabit TP SFP Combo Managed Switch User s Manual FOR MODEL WGSW 20160HP REVISION 1 0 January 2013 Part No EM WGSW 20160HP_v1 0 2080 AK9130 000 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP TABLE OF CONETNTS TS INTRODU TION ou ii 21 11 Packet Contents iii a IT A T i 21 1 2 Product Descrip cess a aae a cece teste ces vate aaa aa aa aa a aea ar anaa aeaa an ant 21 1 3 How to Use This Manual e a e aa sana a aa aar Ee aaa a ea r aaa aaaea aaora aaea Ea A Aan aaa 24 1 4 Product er AT E EE E E ia E 25 1 5 Prod ct Specification 28 2 INSTALLATION aaa a a aaan aes saa aas sek pack aa aaae aaa ae Eeee aeaaeae disses aiaa 31 2 1 Hardware Description hade er ee ea a a ra r a regnenenceenseceevsecteeccerseteceneceenzdupeccecezeceretsersaancepenee 31 21 1 Switch Front Panel cunoticias a RENNE 31 2 VA LED Indications EA A a datada eo A E AA 32 2 1 3 Switch Rear Panel ccoo ie 33 2 2 Install the Swie h eiei enaena eeen naanin K a 34 22 1 Desktop Installation ci lacas 34 ZRC O UNI e e e a a ee a ate Has aa 35 2 2 3 Installing the SFP Tran
235. curity Network ACL Status Description Show ACL status Syntax Security Network ACL Status combined static loop_protect dhcp upnp arp_inspection ipmc ip_source_guard conflicts Parameters combined Show combined status static Show static user configured status loop_ protect Shows the status by Loop Protect dhcp Show DHCP status upnp Show UPnP status arp_inspection Show ARP Inspection status ipmc Show IPMC status ip_source_guard Show IP Source Guard status conflicts Show conflict status default Show combined status Security Network ACL Port State Description Set or show the ACL port state Syntax Security Network ACL Port State lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable disable ACL port state Default Setting Enable 428 Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration Description Show DHCP relay configuration Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration Security Network DHCP Relay Mode Description Set or show the DHCP relay mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Mode enable disable Parameters User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP enable Enable DHCP relaly mode When enable DHCP relay mode operation the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t flood for security cons
236. curity Switch SNMP Trap Mode oococoonoccccconoccnononcncnononcnononononn non cnn nano rn eaea iaia aeaaee E iaee a rre 396 Security Switch SNMP Trap VersiON oooooocccncnoncconoccncnononcnnnononcnn non cnnnnn nn nr narran rre rre rra 396 Security Switch SNMP Trap Community ccccoooccnnnoccccnononcnononnn cnn nonn ccoo no nn nr nan rra rre rr 397 Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination ici 397 Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination ooooononncnnnoccconnoccccnnnonnno nono nnnnnnrn nn nono n nr rnnnn rn rn 397 Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure o ooconnnncnnonicinonanccnnonannno nono nonn non r crono nn nn rra rara 398 Security Switch SNMP Trap LinkUp iiini Ra eo a daa eN 398 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode ooocccncoccccnonoccnononancnonono conan nc nn nnnn cnn ran n nn nana 399 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform TiMeOUt oooocnoccccnnnoconinonocanononononanoncnnnnnn cnn ron cnn naar nr rr nan rnrnnrrrnrrrrnrrn 399 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry TiMES 0ooooonoccccnnnocanonoccccnononcnnnnno nono nono nn nono nr rr nan rre 400 Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID ooononncnnnncccnnnocccononacnnononononononnnn nano nc nr nnrn cnn nn rra 400 Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine lD oooononcccnninonicnnoccccnononcnnnononcnn nono nc nano nn rr naar nn 401 Security Switch SNMP Trap Security NAME ooooocococccnnoccccnononcnononononono cnn nn nono cnn nro n cnn nar rr rra rra 401 Security
237. d data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and 302 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy Tag Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the
238. d or deleted the order sequence cannot be changed and the priority is highest The Access Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 2 appears Access Control List Configuration Ingress Port Policy Bitmask Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Redirect Port Redirect Mirror Counter Figure 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are All The ACE will match all ingress port Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Policy Bitmask Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Fra
239. d the login screen in Figure 5 1 appears Username admin Password admin i as EE A Y COM5 115200baud Tera Tem V ag TL Se se File Edit Setup Control Window Resize Help mu CAME Username Password RAM 0x80000000 0x88000000 0x80020d78 0x87fe1000 availablel FLASH 0x40000000 0x40ffffff 256 x Ux10000 blocks Executing boot script in 3 000 seconds enter C to abort gt diag a Hardware self test Passed IS1 TCAM self test Passed IS2 TCAM self test Passed ESO TCAM self test DDR SDRAM i DDR Ea P d Testing x80020478 0x87fe1000 Zero Sweep Done SDRAM Testing 0x80020d78 0x87fe10007 Write Sweep ooo ee ee Done tests completed successfully fis load d manaseg mage loaded from 4x80040000 0x8090f cba go Welcome to PLANET Command Line Interface Port Numbers vev E E O coe et ee WGSHW 20160HP l 21 41 61 8i 1101121141161 1181201 1181201 1 11 31 St 71 91111131151 1171191 1171191 sername admin Password X Figure 5 1 Managed Switch Console Login Screen ga 1 For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup 2 Note Only accept command in lowercase letter under c
240. ddress e CRC Alignment The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets e Undersize The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets e Oversize The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets e Fragments The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Jabber The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment e Utilization The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval in hundredths of a percent Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh H l Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 18 9 RMON History Status This Page provides an overview of RMON History entries Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the History table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the History table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest History Index and Sample Index found in the History table screen in Figure 4 18 9 appears RMON History Overview Auto refresh O Start fr
241. ddress such as an Ethernet address ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known Before using IP the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device Auto negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link 538 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP CC is an acronym for Continuity Check lt is a MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message It is a OAM frame transmitted from a MEP to it s peer MEP and used to implement CC functionality CDP is an acronym for Cisco Discovery Protocol DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting enciphering and decrypting deciphering binary coded information Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called
242. de disable Disable system log server mode default Show system Log server mode Default Setting disable System Name Description Set or show the system name Syntax System Name lt name gt Parameters lt name gt System name string 1 255 Use to clear the string User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP System name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character and the first or last character must not be a minus sign 354 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP System Contact Description Set or show the system contact Syntax System Contact lt contact gt Parameters lt contact gt System contact string 1 255 Use to clear the string In CLI No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a contact Default Setting empty System Log Server Address Description Show or set the system log server address Syntax System Log Server Address lt ip_addr_string gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string Default Setting empty 355 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP System Location Description Set or show the system location Syntax System Location lt location gt Parameters lt location gt System location string 1 255 Use to clear the string In CLI no bl
243. delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Engine ID An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to The string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed The SNMPv3 architecture uses the User based Security Model USM for message security and the View based Access Control Model VACM for access control For the USM entry the usmUserEnginelD and usmUserName are the entry s keys Ina simple agent usmUserEnginelD is always that agent s own snmpEnginelD value The value can also take the value of the snmpEnginelD of a remote SNMP engine with which this user can communicate In other words if user engine ID equal system engine ID then it is local user otherwise it s remote user e User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are E NodAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy E Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy E Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication Indicates the authentication protoco
244. dress Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch 250 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Accounting Server and a number of columns which are Object Description o The RADIUS Accounting Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation e Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server e Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Accounting Server and the switch TACACS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each TACACS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are Object Description o The TACACS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled
245. dual ports There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress Translate Classify e Translate To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox e Classify Classification for a port have 4 different values Disable No Ingress DSCP Classification DSCP 0 Classify if incoming or translated if enabled DSCP is 0 Selected Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP All Classify all DSCP e Egress Port Egress Rewriting can be one of m Disable No Egress rewrite m Enable Rewrite enable without remapped m Remap DP Unaware DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value The remapped DSCP value is always taken from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DP0 table m Remap DP Aware DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value Depending on the DP level of the frame the remapped DSCP value is either taken from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DPO table or from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DP table Buttons Save Click to save changes Rese Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 193 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 9 8 DSCP Based QoS This Page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches The DSCP Based QoS screen in Figure 4 9 9 appears DSCP Based
246. e Parameters enable disable enable or disable BPDU Filtering for Edge ports Default Setting Disable 444 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP STP BPDU Guard Description Set or show edge port BPDU Guard Syntax STP bpduGuard enable disable Parameters enable disable enable or disable BPDU Guard for Edge ports Default Setting Disable STP Recovery Description Set or show edge port error recovery timeout Syntax STP recovery lt timeout gt Parameters lt timeout gt Time before error disabled ports are reenabled 30 86400 seconds 0 disables default Show recovery timeout Default Setting Disable STP Status Description Show STP Bridge status Syntax STP Status lt msti gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 445 STP MSTI Priority Description Set or show the bridge instance priority Syntax STP Msti Priority lt msti gt lt priority gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt priority gt STP bridge priority 0 4096 8192 12288 53248 57344 61440 Default 32768 STP MSTI Map Description Show or clear MSTP MSTI VLAN mapping configuration Syntax STP Msti Map lt msti gt clear Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 Clear Clear
247. e switch attempted communication with the backend server Possible retransmissions are not counted MAC based Counts all the backend server 245 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP packets sent from the switch towards the backend server for a given port left most table or client right most table Possible retransmissions are not counted e Last Supplicant Client Info Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate This information is available for the following administrative states Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth Name IEEE Name Description MAC dotixAuthLastEapolF The MAC address of the last supplicant client Address rameSource VLAN ID The VLAN ID on which the last frame from the Version dot1xAuthLastEapolF rameVersion Identity 246 last supplicant client was received 802 1X based The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable 802 1X based The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable Selected Counters Object User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Description Selected Counters Attached MAC Address Object The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is one of the following administrative states Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth The table is
248. e voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 301 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 Control Signaling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration lt should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN Object Description e Delete Check to delete the policy It will be deleted during the next save e Policy ID ID for the policy This is auto generated a
249. e Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status e Bridge ID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance e Root ID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge e Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role e Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge this is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge e Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag for this Bridge instance e Topology Change Last The time since last Topology Change occurred 144 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Buttons Auto refresh Cl Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 4 7 4 CIST Port Configuration This Page allows the user to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well The CIST Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 6 appears STP CIST Port Configuration CIST Aggregated Port Configuration STP Restricted Point to peje Enabled Path Cost Admin Edge Auto o Role Rote Ton ren SPY Guard point 128 w Non Edge w O Forced True w CIST Normal Port Configuration sTP Restricted Point to Enabled Path Cost Admin Edge Auto Edot ore CTO Guard point lt All gt Non Edge Non Edge Non Edge w Non Edge Non Edge Non Edge Non Edge Non Ed
250. e Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator e Longitude Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian e Altitude Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to select between two altitude types floors or meters Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a 299 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance e Map Datum Civic Address Location The Map Datum used for the coordinates given in this Option WGS84 Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land no
251. e Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 6 1 e Mode Shows the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level 4 9 6 1 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for a specific port are configured on this Page The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking sscreen in Figure 4 9 7 appears Portl Qos Egress Port Tag Remarking Port 1 Tag Remarking Mode Classified v Figure 4 9 7 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Controls the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level e PCP DEI Configuration Controls the default PCP and DEI values used when the mode is set to Default e DP level Configuration Controls the Drop Precedence level translation table when the mode is set to Mapped The purpose of this table is to reduce the 2 bit classified DP level to a 1 bit DP level used in the QoS class DP level to PCP DEI mapping process e QoS class DP level Controls the mappi
252. e Power Allocation It can limit the port PoE supply watts Per port maximum value must less than 30 8 watts total ports values must less than the Power Reservation value Once power overload detected the port will auto shut down and keep on detection mode until PD s power consumption lower than the power limit value Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 323 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 16 4 PoE Status This page allows the user to inspect the total power consumption total power reserved and current status for all PoE ports The screen in Figure 4 16 4 appears Power Over Ethernet Status Current Power Consumption 0 230 W Total Power Reserved 0 0 230 W Temperature 1 37 C 99 F Temperature 2 29 C 84 F The total value add from port 1 to 16 should not more than 230 watt There is 30W resvered for PoE chip set 1 0 0 iority High PoE Search High PoE Search High PoE Search High PoE Search High PoE Search High PoE Search High PoE Search High PoE Search High PoE Search High PoE Search High PoE Search High PoE Search High PoE Search High PoE Search High PoE Search High PoE Search 00000000000000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ooooooqcocecoececa amp Auto Refresh C Figure 4 16 4 PoE Status Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Current P
253. e Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States E Device Roles With 802 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below 226 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Authentication server Authentication server RADIUS Server TACACS Server Authenticator PLANET 802 1X aware Switch C Internet Intran p de oad Supplicant C Client with 802 1X authentication Figure 4 11 1 Client the device workstation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1X compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802 1X specification Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is the only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model i
254. e allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled e Logging Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited e Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame 214 MAC Parameters User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Object Description e SMAC Filter Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE Any No SMAC filter is specified SMAC filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an SMAC value appears e SMAC Value When Specific is selected for the SMAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value e DMAC Filter Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE Any No DMAC filter is specified DMAC filter st
255. e an ACE Access Control Entry on this Page An ACE consists of several parameters These parameters vary according to the frame type that you select First select the ingress port for the ACE and then select the frame type Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type selected A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here The ACE Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 3 appears ACE Configuration Logging Ingress Port Ingress Port Policy Filter Policy Filter Frame Type Any oy VLAN Parameters 802 10 Tagged VLAN ID Filter Figure 4 10 3 ACE Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Ingress Port Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies Any The ACE applies to any port Port n The ACE applies to this port number where n is the number of the switch port e Policy Filter Specify the policy number filter for this ACE Any No policy filter is specified policy filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE choose this value Two field for entering an policy value and bitmask appears e Policy Value When Specific is selected for the policy filter you can enter a specific policy value The allowed range is 0 to 255 213 e Policy Bitmask User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP When Specific is selected for the policy filt
256. e console port it provides rich diagnostic information includes IP Address setting factory reset port management link status and system setting Users can use the attached RS 232 cable in the package and connect to the console port on the device After the connection users an run any terminal emulation program Hyper Terminal ProComm Plus Telix Winterm and so on to enter the startup screen of the device 2 1 2 LED Indications The front panel LEDs indicates instant status of power and system status fan status port links PoE In Use data activity helps monitor and troubleshoot when needed Figure 2 2 shows the LED indications of the Managed Switch WGSW 20160HP LED Indication PLANET osv 20 conr D Figure 2 2 WGSW 20160HP LED at Front Panel M System E B Color Function PWR Green Lights to indicate that the Switch has power SYS Green Lights to indicate the system is working M Alert Function m Per 10 100 1000Mbps port with PoE interfaces Port 1 to Port 16 Lights to indicate that the FAN1 failure Lights to indicate that the FAN2 failure LED Color Function To indicate the link through that port is successfully established at LNK ACT 10 100 1000Mbps To indicate that the Switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port To indicate the port is providing 56V DC in line power Orange To indicate the connected device is not a PoE Powered Device PD Ml Per 10
257. e different Frame Types 1 For Ethernet Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype Valid values for etype ranges from 133 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 0x0600 Oxffff For LLC Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub values a DSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 Oxff b SSAP 1 byte long string Ox00 Oxff For SNAP Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub values a OUI OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier is value in format of XX XX xx where each pair xx in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from Ox00 0xff b PID If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000 the protocol ID is the Ethernet type EtherType field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP In other words if value of OUI field is 00 00 00 then value of PID will be etype 0x0600 Oxffff and if value of OUI is other than 00 00 00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to Oxffff e Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16 character long string for every entry which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 Note special character and underscore _ are not allowed e Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Buttons Click Add New Entry to add a new entry in mapping t
258. e disable Parameters enable Enable Loop Protection disable Disable Loop Protection Default Setting enable Loop Protect Transmit Description Set or show the Loop Protection transmit interval Syntax Loop Protect Transmit lt transmit time gt Parameters Transmit time interval 1 10 seconds Default Setting 5 506 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Loop Protect Shutdown Description Set or show the Loop Protection shutdown time Syntax Loop Protect Shutdown lt shutdown time gt Parameters Shutdown time interval 0 604800 seconds A value of zero disables re enabling the port Default Setting 10 Loop Protect Port Configuration Description Show Loop Protection port configuration Syntax Loop Protect Port Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Loop Protect Port Mode Description Set or show the Loop Protection port mode Syntax Loop Protect Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Loop Protection disable Disable Loop Protection 507 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Loop Protect Port Action Description Set or show the Loop Protection port action Syntax Loop Protect Port Action lt port_list gt shutdown shut_log log Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default Al
259. e rising and falling threshold e Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled e Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds e Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period e Startup The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid e Rising Threshold Rising threshold value e Rising Index Rising event index e Falling Threshold Falling threshold value e Falling Index Falling event index Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately FI Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 335 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 18 3 RMON Alarm Status This Page provides an overview of RMON Alarm entries Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the Alarm table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Alarm table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Alarm table screen in Figure 4 18 3 appears RMON Alarm Overview Auto refresh Refresh Ix lt gt gt Start from Control Index 0 with 20 entries per page Vartakbie Sample Startup Rising Rising Falling Falling Type Alarm Threshold Index Threshold Index No more entries Fig
260. e switch is elected as the root switch The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch E A designated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root a A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch Ports included in the STP are selected Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch When STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal For instance connecting higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change STP Port States The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU pack
261. e80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt ipv6_prefix gt IPv6 subnet mask default Show IPv6 prefix lt ipv6_router gt IPv6 router default Show IPv 6 router IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Default Setting IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled IPv6 Link Local Address fe80 6082 cdb9 19ab c0e2 IPv6 Address 1192 168 0 100 IPv6 Prefix 96 IPv6 Router 362 IPv6 State Description User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Disable or enable IPv6 State function Syntax IP IPv6 State lt ipv6_addr gt enable disable Parameters enable Enable IPv6 State function disable Disable IPv6 State function Default Setting disable IPv6 Ping Description Ping IPv6 address ICMPv6 echo Syntax IP IPv6 Ping6 lt ipv6_addr gt Length lt ping_length gt Count lt ping_count gt Interval lt ping_interval gt Paramet
262. eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeae cece eee eeeaaeaeeeeeseseeaaeaeeeeesesecaeaeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeseaeees 412 Security Switch RMON Event LOOKUP oooooocccococccononcncnononcnonono nono nnnncnnnno nn nr non nn nr non nr rra r rra rre 412 Security NetworkP3Sec SWItCR cvcciiicioni et die 413 Security NetworkPsec Port aia 413 Security Network Limit Configuration eee ceeeceeeenneeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeceneeeeesaeeeeesaaeeseeeeaeesseeeessnaeeeseeaeees 413 Security Network Limit Mode nue einen see eee erin dil A aes 414 Security Network Limit AgiNQs coria 414 Security Network Limit AgetiMe sassisccte cscs ecicsceetes atada 415 Security Network Llimit Pom sei vescztz A o 415 Security Network Limit Lit bei 416 Security Network Limit ACON ooconmoonniiiicin ie 416 Security Network Limit R ope Mm cicle e ia adie cote 417 Security Network NAS ConfiguratiON oooocccononnnnnoncccnnnonnncnonannnnnonnccnn non n nn nono nn rn nn rre 417 Security Network NAS Mode ivici ae a Ade 417 Security Network NAS State coincida ei 418 Security Network NAS Reauthentication ooooonncinnncccnnnoccccnonacnnnnoncccnnnonnnn nono cnn rro n nn nan rra 418 Security Network NAS ReauthPeridd oooooocccococcconoccccnononcncnononcnn nono ncnn ano n cnn nono rra r nn n rra nr rr rre 419 12 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network NAS EapolTiMeOUt ooooccccnnoncnnnoccccnononcnnnnnoncnn nono tnnt non n nr nnnn nn ran rre 419 Security Network NAS Agetime sn
263. ed The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format e VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead e Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type One of eight priority levels 0 through 7 e DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 e Auto negotiation Auto negotiation identifies if MAC PHY auto negotiation is supported by the link partner e Auto negotiation status Auto negotiation status identifies if auto negotiation is currently enabled at the link partner If Auto negotiation is supported and Auto negotiation status is disabled the 802 3 PMD operating mode will be determined the operational MAU type field value rather than by auto negotiation e Auto negotiation Capabilities Auto negotiation Capabilities shows the link partners MAC
264. ed Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Router Port Throttling MENEM EN NED EM EN ED Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited SMM MMMM EN ENED EN ETETETT Figure 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping e Unregistered IPMCv4 Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding Flooding Enabled The flooding control takes effect only when IGMP Snooping is enabled When IGMP Snooping is disabled unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding is always active in spite of this setting 160 IGMP SSM Range User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range Leave Proxy Enable Enable IGMP Leave Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side Proxy Enable Enable IGMP Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Router Port Specify which ports act as IGMP router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP router p
265. ed from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network B Multicast Receiver rs ri 8 ral Multicast A Switch Transmitter FF A Y e A A w oe E Server dj Router be Switch Switch a C ER E Multicast Switch Receiver y UN pen ae Cit Multicast gt Y Receiver D Figure 4 8 1 Multicast Service 156 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP B Multicast Receiver Multicast Switch Transmitter A IPTV Server Router Switch Switch C Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 8 2 Multicast Flooding B Multicast Receiver Multicast IGMP Snooping Transmitter Switch A IPTV aii ee Gur enceio IGMP Snooping Switch Switch C IGMP Snooping Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 8 3 IGMP Snooping Multicast Stream Control 157 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data The format of an IGMP packet is shown bel
266. ed image bk e Version The version of the firmware image e Date The date where the firmware was produced Buttons Activate Altemate Image Click to use the alternate image This button may be disabled depending on system state Cancel Cancel activating the backup image Navigates away from this Page 75 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 2 20 Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the Managed Switch on this Page Only the IP configuration is retained The new configuration is available immediately which means that no restart is necessary The Factory Default screen in Figure 4 2 27 appears Factory Defaults Are you sure you want to resetthe configuration to Factory Defaults The default configuration here doesnt involve IP address You can reset configuration included IP by means of pushing the reset button on the machine Figure 4 2 27 Factory Default Page Screenshot Buttons Ye Click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults No Click to return to the Port State Page without resetting the configuration To reset the Managed Switch to the Factory default setting you can also press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device be rebooted You can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx gn Q PLANET WGSW 20160HP Note 10 T Se Hardware Reset button 76 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4
267. ed to any of 0 63 DSCP values e Classify Click to enable Classification at Ingress side e Egress There is following configurable parameter for Egress side Remap e Remap DPO Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 e Remap DP1 Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 Buttons Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 197 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 9 10 DSCP Classification This Page allows you to map DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value The DSCP Classification screen in Figure 4 9 11 appears DSCP Classification QoS Class DSCP 22022020 o j oO O 20 O 1414111 1 lt 1414 1 lt 1 lt 14 1 lt 1 lt lt lt 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 fi 7 Figure 4 9 11 DSCP Classification Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e QoS Class Available QoS Class value ranges from 0 to 7 QoS Class 0 7 can be mapped to followed parameters e DPL Actual Drop Precedence Level e DSCP Select DSCP value 0 63 from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS Class and DPL value Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 198 4 9 11 QoS Control List
268. edeeednesteedeeeaiteaces 378 VLAN Ethernet Type cuca 378 VEAN Add a Mase Mal Goan 8 ad Nl 2s DEN ons Sats ae hla 2a NS a a Na Sd cl ase an 379 VLAN Forbidden Adds 23 sche ek i ee do 379 VLAN Delete ii shane edi ae die eee 379 VLAN Forbidden Delete s c2 ssc saci A Passed i atte Ata Antler 380 VEAN Forbidden LOOKUP cionado lis 380 MILAN IHOOKUP A EE cesar tii coco 8 ad ees crea ced ahead ead I cae htt d Mas od cat Pi Se bo ae aD a 381 VLAN Name Add dt 381 VLAN Name Delete vicio ria 382 VEAN Name LOOKUB cistitis 382 MANES tats oor e eA a Beet ANS Ae ADs AS Ned EN at Meee AN A ed doe 383 6 6 Private VLAN Configuration Command cccsecceseeeeeeeeesneeeneeeeeeeeeseseaeenseeeeeaeeeseaesaseeeeeeeeessnaesnseeensneeees 384 PVEAN ComfiQuration ys siz vee d2 ei rta ta aee A T Ea a a E dee ies 384 PVLAN VAG it 384 PVEAN Delete secs to e e ree 384 PYLAN LOOKUP 00 ita A A et ee ar 385 AA AN ET e e AET ATA E AAA atra 385 6 2 Sec rity CMMA ae 386 Security Switch User Configuration nspd ri ctas 386 Security Switch User Add inci a oie 386 Security Switch User Delete a ion etnicidad erecta 386 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration o ooconnnnccnnnocccnnocccnnononnncnonannnrnnrn cnn narran rar rra 387 Security Switch Privilege Level GrOUP oooooocccnocicnnoccccnononcncnononcno nono ncnn non n nr nono nn narran rare 387 Security Switch Privilege Level Current coooinoicinionnii ice 387 Securi
269. ee ee 500 MVRiSEMocyrios ecrs stasis a ek ae ae eed i el ek eed ee el od A evens 500 17 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 20 Voice VLAN COMMA Nd a a E a aea aa ra araa a aaa rarae aaa aa ara a anaa a aen taada toetada aae toana ddan aanas 501 Voice VLAN Config uration cti aii 501 Voice VLAN IMO zirta cout iii 501 VOICE VEAN Directs sect Ne A eh ee 502 Voice VLAN Agetime ieee eet eee ei en ee ee ed 502 Voice VLAN Traffic Class f sc scenes tests fenie cave AA Ae 502 Voice VLAN QUILAQO cocacola 503 Voice VEAN OUIL Delete coria ketene ida pti eee e ay eed ie tele a Ae eee a abe 503 Voice VLAN QU Clear ui ati 503 Voice VLAN OUI LOOKUP cocido E EO A RaT 504 Voice VLAN PortModesiicstataca ii ona 504 VOICE VAN SEU da 505 Voice VLAN Discovery Protocolo ia 505 6 21 Loop Protect Command narren aaiae enaar rari eaa raea aaeeea ahn moai naan apanan e eink ade eieh danada kie 506 Loop Protect Configuration aicinn io o de thes EE a E eas see EE EN N Ea 506 Loop Protect Mode cocos aia 506 Loop Protect ran Mi 00 ai td 506 Loop Protect SHUtGOWNM aaa ses 507 Loop Protect Port Configuration iento 507 Loop Protect Port Modes tigi ter daa 507 l o0p Protect PoOnt AC EEEE TEETE E deeds A A EAN A E 508 loop Protect Port Transit aaa 508 Loop Protect Statusin ivi A iia 508 6 22 IPMG COMManG PAE nidad 509 IPMG Configuration 509 PMC Moder toocecnicoms enn ota de la e ts Ade le lo te loc do da 509 PMEElOO ao EA AERE dd 510 IPMC
270. eeseeeseeesceseeeeecaeceaeceaecaaecaeesaeeeeesecesaeeeeeeeeesaeceaeceaesaaesaeeeeseeeseaeseaeeaeeeneeesees 327 4 16 7 PoE Alvie Check Configuration 0 ccccccecsesneceeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeeeceeaaeeeeeeeseceeaaaeaeeeeeeesecaaeaeeeeesneaeeeeeeeseseesaeaeeeeeees 328 4 17 LOOP Protect iii dan 330 AN A A 330 4 17 2 Loop Protection Status iii A aci n 332 4 198 MON 0 ii di dd dad Wudevedes 333 4 18 1 RMON Alarm Configuration sirien iein ao dai Rai 333 4 18 2 RMON Alarm Detail ooooociicinnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonconcnnc caceria 335 4 18 3 RMON Alarm StatUS ooooocincinnnnnnnnnnncn Rmn 336 4 18 4 RMON Event Configuration icon EE 337 4189 RMON Event Detalle o a A 337 418 6 RMON Event Statusij20 sessed eae e eee de dvd el ee etd 338 4 18 7 RMON History Configuration ooooccccnnoccccnonocinononcncnononnnc nono nc nn non cnn nar r rre ran rre 339 4 18 8 RMON History Detail cooooccii atada caos 340 4 18 9 RMON Histoty Status A eee dP ee aos 341 4 18 10 RMON Statistics Configuration oonnoccccnnnncnnnccccnnnonnncnonannnnnnrncnnn nn n rr nnnn nara rre 343 4 18 11 RMON Statistics Detail ioi r a ae r E nene 344 4 18 12 RMON Statistics Stats are ioiii idiei iai aia aiea eate ea aada dee 346 5S COMMAND LINE INTER A CE raiar eaaa a aara a eaaa aara a a aaa aa aaa aa adadad adanan idai 348 5 1 Accessingthe Cll id papa dei 348 Logontothe Console vists ad tie 348 Configure IP Address aoei a aa A a A dd 349 AO A E EE EE AAEN E EATE OAOA NEOR 351 6 C
271. efreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 15 1 appears ICMP Ping IP Address Address 0 0 0 0 AS Length CONEA DESEA Ping Count Star Figure 4 15 1 ICMP Ping Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes e Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times e Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds ga Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the Managed Switch or you had Note setup the correct gateway IP address Buttons Star Click to transmit ICMP packets New Ping Click to re start diagnostics with PING 312 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 15 2 IPv6 Ping This Page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues After you press Start 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The Page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMPv6 Ping screen in Figure 4 15 2 appears ICMPv6 Ping 00000000 Ping Length Ping Count Ping Interval Figure 4 15 2 ICM
272. emain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 350 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 5 2 Telnet Login The Managed Switch also supports telnet for remote management The Managed Switch asks for user name and password for remote login when using telnet please use admin for username amp password pa EN Telnet 192 168 0 100 o E 2 Welcome to PLANET Command Line Interface Port Numbers 3 WGSW 26166HP 1 4 1 1 t t e t 116112114116 t gt i 91111131151 4 4 118 126 117119 18 20 1171191 Username admin Password Login in progress WGSHY 2 160HP 7 gt Figure 5 4 Remote Telent Screen 351 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 Command Line Mode The CLI groups all the commands in appropriate modes according to the nature of the command A sample of the CLI command modes are described below Each of the command modes supports specific software commands Command Groups System System Settings and Reset Options IP IP Con
273. en 1024 to 1518 octets in length Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh Cl Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 345 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 18 12 RMON Statistics Status This Page provides an overview of RMON Statistics entries Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the Statistics table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Statistics table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Statistics table screen in Figure 4 18 12 appears ifIndex Start from Control Index 0 RMON Statistics Status Overview Auto refresh Refresh Ix lt _ gt gt with 20 entries per page Data 65 128 256 512 1024 Source Octets Pkts ory poes oe Under Over Frag Jabb Coll Bea w w w mw cas cas rrors size size ytes 127 255 511 1102311518 No more entries Figure 4 18 12 RMON Statistics Status Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e ID Indicates the index of Statistics entry e Data Source iflndex The port ID which wants to be monitored e Drop The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Octets The total number of octets of data includ
274. en in Figure 4 16 8 appears PD Ping Alive Check Mode Ping PD IP Address Retry Count 1 5 Action Reboot Time 30 180 s lt All gt 0 0 0 0 2 lt All gt Enable 192 168 0 10 PDReboot Enable 192 168 0 20 Reboot amp Alarm Enable 192 168 0 30 Alarm Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable CH EM EN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 _ o a cb ENE mb N Ww n Aa MENEE b D Save Reset Figure 4 16 8 PD Alive Check Configuration Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Allows user to enable or disable per port PD Alive Check function As default value all ports are disabled Ping PD IP Address This coulumn allows user to set PoE device IP address here for system making ping to the PoE device Please be noticed that the PD s IP address must be set to the same network segment with WGSW 20160HP PoE Switch e Interval Time 10 300s This column allows user to set how long system should be issue a ping request to PD for detecting PD is alive or dead Interval time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds Retry Count 1 5 This column allows user to set how many times system rerry ping to PD For example if we set count 2 the meaning is that if system retry ping to the PD and the PD does
275. en in Figure 4 5 7 appears LACP Statistics 0000000000000 000003 MIN TERE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Auto refresh L Refresh Clear Figure 4 5 7 LACP Statistics Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port e LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port e Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port Buttons Auto refresh i El Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately clear Clears the counters for all ports 106 4 6 VLAN 4 6 1 VLAN Overview User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by l
276. ently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication e Last ID The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication e QoS Class QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 241 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 11 5 Network Access Statistics This Page provides detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL based IEEE 802 1X authentication For MAC based ports it shows selected backend server RADIUS Authentication Server statistics only Use the port select box to select which port details to be displayed The Network Access Statistics screen in Figure 4 11 6 appears The Page includes the following fields Port State Object NAS
277. er you can enter a specific policy bitmask The allowed range is 0x0 to Oxff e Frame Type Select the frame type for this ACE These frame types are mutually exclusive Any Any frame can match this ACE Ethernet Type Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE The IEEE 802 3 describes the value of Length Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to 1536 decimal equal to 0600 hexadecimal ARP Only ARP frames can match this ACE Notice the ARP frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type IPv4 Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv4 frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type IPv6 Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv6 frames won t match the ACE with ehternet type e Action Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped e Rate Limiter Specify the rate limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 16 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Redirect Frames that hit the ACE are redirected to the port number specified here The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range Disabled indicates that the port redirect operation is disabled e Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror port Th
278. er Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 403 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch SNMP User Changekey Description Change SNMPv3 user password Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Changekey lt engineid gt lt user_name gt lt auth_password gt lt priv_password gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all fFH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string lt user_name gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The name of None is reserved The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt auth_password gt A string identifying the authentication pass phrase lt priv_password gt A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 40 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Security Switch SNMP User Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 user entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 404 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch SNMP Group Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 group entry The entry index key are lt security_model gt and lt security_name gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Add lt security_model gt lt security_name gt lt group_name gt Parameters lt security_model gt v1 Reserved for SNMPv1
279. er LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Overview of MAC Based Authentication Unlike 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP excha
280. er group than is supported by this device then this parameter will control which ports will be active and which ports will be in a backup role Lower number means greater priority Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 103 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 5 3 LACP System Status This Page provides a status overview for all LACP instances The LACP Status Page display the current LACP aggregation Groups and LACP Port status The LACP System Status screen in Figure 4 5 5 appears LACP System Status MID Partner Partner Partner Last Local 99 System ID Key Priority Changed Ports No ports enabled or no existing partners Auto refresh Refresh Refresh Figure 4 5 5 LACP System Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id e Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner e Partner Key The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID e Partner Priority The priority of the aggregation partner e Last changed The time since this aggregation changed e Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch stack The format is Switch ID Port Buttons Refresh Cl
281. er s Manual of WGSW 20160HP RFC 2933 IGMP STD MIB RFC 3411 SNMP Frameworks MIB IEEE 802 1X PAE LLDP MAU MIB Standards Conformance Regulation Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE IEEE 802 3 10Base T IEEE 802 3u 100Base TX 100Base FX IEEE 802 3z 1000Base SX LX IEEE 802 3ab 1000Base T IEEE 802 3x Flow Control and Back pressure IEEE 802 3ad Port trunk with LACP IEEE 802 1D Spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1p Class of service IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Network Control Standards Compliance IEEE 802 1ab LLDP IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3at Power over Ethernet PLUS RFC 768 UDP RFC 793 TFTP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RFC 2068 HTTP RFC 1112 IGMP version 1 RFC 2236 IGMP version 2 RFC 3376 IGMP version 3 RFC 2710 MLD version 1 FRC 3810 MLD version 2 Environment Operatin Temperature 0 50 Degree C i p g Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing Temperature 10 70 Degree C Storage Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing 30 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 2 INSTALLATION This section describes the hardware features and installation of the Managed Switch on the desktop or rack mount For easier management and control of the Managed Switch familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED ind
282. er s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e Hardware Filter Switch Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not Buttons Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields k Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MLD SFM Information Table gt gt L gt J Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 8 14 MVR Multicaset VLAN Registration The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLANs In a multicast television application a PC ora network television or a set top box can receive the multicast stream Multiple set top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port When a subscriber selects a channel the set top box or PC sends an IGMP MLD report message to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast group address Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports It is allowed to create at maximun 8 MVR VLANs with corresponding channel settings for each Multicast VLAN There will be totally at maximun 256 group addresses for channel settings Service Provider a Layer 3 Multicast Router Multicast Server Service Network y da A Rol Box 176 MVR 2 2 Switch User s Manual of WGSW
283. er to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary e To debug network problems selected traffic can be copied or mirrored to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow e The Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Mirroring ZN gt Target Port Monitor Client With Ethereal or Sniffer Pro Figure 4 4 5 Port Mirror Application 95 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows e All frames received on a given port also known as ingress or source mirroring e All frames transmitted on a given port also known as egress or destination mirroring Mirror Port Configuration The Port Mirror screen in Figure 4 4 6 appears Mirror Configuration Port to mirror to Mirror Port Configuration lt All gt Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 4 4 6 Mirror Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port to mirror on Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirr
284. ercase letter under web interface 47 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 1 Main Web Page The Managed Switch provides a Web based browser interface for configuring and managing it This interface allows you to access the Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the Managed Switch s Web browser interface to configure and manage it Main Functions Menu Copper Port Link Status SFP Port Link Status D PLANET WCSW 2016DHP rayan SNMP Port Management Link Agoregabion Welcome to PLANET WGSW 20160HP 16 Port 10 100 1000Mbps 802 3at PoE 4G TP SFP Management Switch PLANET Technology Corporation p Put 10F No 95 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taewan R O C Lanp Pratectin fel GUO 2 2215 3519 RON Fax amp 36 2 2219 9528 Frail Suppart planet ceen tw Cogent PARET tidad Creatas AR caper canst a Figure 4 1 4 Web Main Page alee Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the Managed Switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Link up or Link down Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics Page The port states are illustrated as follows State Disabled Down Link RJ 45 Ports io E SFP SFP Ports Em ia Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the Managed Switch and all its ports or monitor network
285. ers lt ipv6_addr gt length lt ping_length gt count lt ping_count gt interval IPv6 host address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 PING Length keyword Ping ICMP data length 2 1452 Default is 56 excluding MAC IP and ICMP headers PING Count keyword Transmit ECHO_REQUEST packet count 1 60 Default is 5 PING Interval keyword lt ping_interval gt Ping interval 0 30 Default is 0 363 IP NTP Configuration Description Show NTP configuration Syntax IP NTP Configuration Default Setting IP NTP Configuration NTP Mode Disabled Idx Server IP host address a b c d or a host name string 1 pool ntp org 2 europe pool ntp org 3 north america pool ntp org 4 asia pool ntp org 5 oceania pool ntp org IP NTP Mode Description Set or show the NTP mode Syntax IP NTP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable NTP mode disable Disable NTP mode default Show NTP mode Default Setting disable 364 User s Manual
286. es and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user communication appliances such as IP Phones PC based softphones or other communication appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support inventory management e LLDP MED Capabilities LLDP MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s LLDP MED capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 LLDP MED capabilities Network Policy Location Identification Extended Power via MDI PSE Extended Power via MDI PD Inventory NO oO A W ND Reserved e Application Type Application Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this network policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The poosible application types are shown below Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set
287. es are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transits frequently e BPDU Guard If enabled causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not effect this setting A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well e Point to point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transitions to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media 146 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to Port Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 65 535 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Table 4 7 1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range Port Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 100 Half Duplex
288. es made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Click to refresh the Page Any changes made locally will be undone 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview This Page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports The Port Statistics Overview screen in Figure 4 4 2 appears Packets Port Statistics Overview Errors Filtered Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received ame E ao E a E s B a E s E s B CCC C000 CCC ooo 1 2 3 4 5 6 I 8 9 10 a 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 The displayed counters are 0000000000000 00000O000O 0000000000000 00000o0S 0000000000000 000o0o0o0Oa 0000000000000 0000o0O0O 0000000000000 00000O00O 000000000000 000000D00O 000000000000 cc cece Coo oooccecc ccc c8cC cc ccc cC 0o 0 Auto refresh C Download Refresh Clear Print Figure 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview Page Screenshot Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port e Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port e Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port e Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion e Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding proc
289. es primary or community VLANs Enable disable port isolation on port Configures the MAC based VLAN entries Displaies MAC based VLAN entries Configures the IP Subnet based VLAN entries Configures the protocol based VLAN entries Displaies the protocol based VLAN entries 107 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 6 2 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of ne
290. escription Set or show the port policer mode Syntax QoS Port Policer Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port policer disable Disable port policer default Show port policer mode Default Setting disable 473 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QoS Port Policer Rate Description Set or show the port policer rate Syntax QoS Port Policer Rate lt port_list gt lt rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt rate gt Rate in kbps or fps 100 13200000 Default Setting 500 QoS Port Policer Unit Description Set or show the port policer unit Syntax QoS Port Policer Unit lt port_list gt kbps fps Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports kbps Unit is kilo bits per second fps Unit is frames per second default Show port policer unit Default Setting kbps 474 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QoS Port Policer Flow Control Description Set or show the port policer flow control If policer flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode then pause frames are sent instead of discarding frames Syntax QoS Port Policer FlowControl lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port poli
291. esh the Page immediately Lk lt Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 168 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 8 8 MLD Snooping Configuration This Page provides MLD Snooping related configuration The MLD Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 11 appears MLD Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMCv6 Flooding Enabled _ MLD SSM Range Leave Proxy Enabled Proxy Enabled Port Related Configuration Router Port Throttling lt All gt Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited a 2 2 a 4 7 5 a Y 7 a MME MMMM oo 4 Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited omiani KENETET Figure 4 8 11 MLD Snooping Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Enabled Enable the Global MLD Snooping e Unregistered IPMCv6 Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding Flooding enabled The flooding control takes effect only when MLD Snooping is enabled When MLD Snooping is disabled unregistered IPMCv 6 traffic flooding is always active in spite of this setting e MLD SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM awa
292. ess 91 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Clear _ clear Clears the counters for all ports 4 4 3 Port Statistics Detail This Page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The selected port belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the Page header The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit The Port Statistics Detail screen in Figure 4 4 3 appears Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Pot Auto refresh O Receive Total Transmit Total Rx Packets Tx Packets 2066 Rx Octets Tx Octets 1531131 Rx Unicast Tx Unicast 2050 Rx Multicast Tx Multicast Rx Broadcast Tx Broadcast Rx Pause Tx Pause Receive Size Counters Transmit Size Counters Rx 64 Bytes Tx 64 Bytes Rx 65 127 Bytes Tx 65 127 Bytes Rx 128 255 Bytes Tx 128 255 Bytes Rx 256 511 Bytes Tx 256 511 Bytes Rx 512 1023 Bytes Tx 512 1023 Bytes Rx 1024 1526 Bytes Tx 1024 1526 Bytes Rx 1527 Bytes Tx 1527 Bytes Receive Queue Counters Transmit Queue Counters Rx Q0 Tx Q0 Rx Q1 D Tx Q1 Rx Q2 Tx Q2 Rx 03 Tx 03 Rx 04 Tx 04 Rx 05 Tx 05 Rx 06 Tx 06 Rx 07 Tx 07 Receive Error Counters Transmit Error Counters Rx Drops Tx Drops Rx CRC Alignment Tx Late Exc Coll Rx Undersize Rx Oversi
293. ess For example 192 1 2 34 e Prefix Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this Managed Switch The allowed range is 1 through 128 e Router Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this Managed Switch IPv6 address is in 53 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Provide the IPv6 SNTP Server address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Renew Click to renew IPv6 AUTOCOMF This button is only available if IPv6 AUTOCONF is enabled 4 2 4 Users Configuration This Page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to
294. ets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states a Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets a Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets a Forwarding the port is forwarding packets a Disabled the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one state to another as follows From initialization switch boot to blocking E From blocking to listening or to disabled a From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to disabled From forwarding to disabled E From disabled to blocking 137 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Blocking En Learning Disable Forwarding Figure 4 7 1 STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transition
295. f representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once lt also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 397 Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure Description Set or show the SNMP authentication failure trap mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap authentication failure disable Disable SNMP trap authentication failure default Show SNMP trap authentication failure mode Default Setting enable Security Switch SNMP Trap Link up Description Set or show the port link up and link down trap mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Link up enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap link up and link down disable Disable SNMP trap link up and link down default Show SNMP trap link up and link down mode Default Setting enable 398 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode Description Set or show the SNMP trap inform mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap inform disable Disable SNMP trap inform default Show SNMP inform mode Default Setting enable Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout Description Set or show the SNMP trap inform timeout usecs Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout lt timeout gt Parame
296. f the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge e Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 e Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 e Maximum Hop Count This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops e Transmit Hold Count Advanced Settings Object The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second Description e Edge Port BPDU Filtering Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs e Edge Port BPDU Guard Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the act
297. figuration and Ping Port Port Management MAC MAC Address Table VLAN Virtual LAN PVLAN Private VLAN Security Security Management STP Spanning Tree Protocol Aggr Link Aggregation LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDPMED Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media PoE Power Over Ethernet QoS Quality of Service Mirror Port Mirroring Config Load Save of Configuration via TFTP Firmware Download of Firmware via TFTP UPnP Universal Plug and Play MVR Multicast VLAN Registration Voice VLAN Specific VLAN for Voice Traffic Loop Protect IPMC VCL SMTP Loop Protection MLD IGMP Snooping VLAN Control List SMTP Control Configure 352 6 1 System Command System Configuration Description Show system configuration Syntax System Configuration all port lt port_list gt Parameters all Show all switch configuration default Show system configuration port Show switch port configuration lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports System Log Configuration Description Show system log configuration Syntax System Log Configuration System Version Description Show system version information Syntax System Version 353 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP System Log Server Mode Description Show or set the system log server mode Syntax System Log Server Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable system log server mo
298. for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media softphone_voice Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN video_conferencing Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services streaming_video Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type video_signaling Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media tagged The device is using tagged frames unragged The device is using untagged frames lt vlan_id gt VLAN id lt I2_priority gt This field may specify one of eight priority levels O through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 lt dscp gt This field shall contain the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 5 This 6 bit field may contain one of 64 code point values
299. for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Note Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on the Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Es Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Note Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from
300. form the folling 1 Click System gt Web Firmware Upgrade 2 The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4 2 18 Browse 3 Click the button of the main Page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose firmware Upload 4 Select on the firmware then click Unoa the Software Upload Progress would show the file upload status 5 Once the software be loaded to the system successfully The following screen appears The system will load the new software after reboot Firmware Upgrade in progess The uploaded firmware image is being transferred to flash The system will reboot after the Upgrade Until then do not reset or power off the device vV Completed Figure 4 2 19 Software Successfully Loaded Notice Screen DO NOT Power OFF the Managed Switch until the update progress is complete Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade Page without press the OK button after the image be loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade processes again 70 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 2 16 TFTP Firmware Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade Page provides the functions to allow a user to update the Managed Switch firmware from the TFTP server in the network Before updating make sure you have your TFTP server ready and the firmware image is on the TFTP server The TFTP Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 20 appears TFTP Firmware U
301. functions a Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements a Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups a Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree a Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used E The unique switch identifier E The path cost to the root associated with each switch port E The port identifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Each BPDU contains the following information a The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch The path cost to the root from the transmitting port E The port identifier of the transmitting port 136 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning tree topology All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU and if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following a On
302. fy the target IP filter for this specific ACE Any No target IP filter is specified Target IP filter is don t care Host Target IP filter is set to Host Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that appears Network Target IP filter is set to Network Specify the target IP address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear e Target IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation e Target IP Mask When Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted decimal notation e ARP Sender MAC Match Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care e RARP Target MAC Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware 216 Match User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP address field THA settings 0 RARP frames where THA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 RARP frames where THA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care e IP Ethernet Length Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address length HLN
303. g Tree Protocol STP Provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops Normal Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops Extension Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs VLANs This Per VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spanning Tree The STP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 4 appears STP Bridge Configuration Basic Settings Protocol Version Bridge Priority Forward Delay Maximum Hop Count Transmit Hold Count Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering RUE Port BPDU Guard Port Error __PortError Recovery Figure 4 7 4 STP Bridge Configuration Page Screenshot 142 The Page includes the following fields Basic Settings Object User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Description e Protocol Version The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP RSTP and MSTP e Bridge Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority o
304. g list group_addr IPv4 IPv6 multicast group address accordingly 515 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IPMC Router Description Set or show the IPMC snooping router port mode Syntax IPMC Router mld igmp lt port_list gt auto fix none Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Enable IGMP router mode auto fix Enable IGMP router mode fix none Enable IGMP router mode none IPMC Status Description Show IPMC operational status accordingly Syntax IPMC Status mld igmp lt vid gt Parameters mldligmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs 516 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IPMC Groups Description Show IPMC group addresses accordingly Syntax IPMC Groups mld igmp lt vid gt Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs IPMC Version Description Show IPMC Versions Syntax IPMC Version mld igmp lt vid gt Parameters mldligmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs IPMC SFM Description Show SFM including SSM related information for IPMC Syntax IPMC SFM mldligmp lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters
305. g protocol used in Microsoft Windows networking Samba can be installed on a variety of operating system platforms including Linux most common Unix platforms OpenVMS and IBM OS 2 Samba can also register itself with the master browser on the network so that it would appear in the listing of hosts in Microsoft Windows Neighborhood Network SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm It designed by the National Security Agency NSA and published by the NIST as a U S Federal Information Processing Standard Hash algorithms compute a fixed length digital representation known as a message digest of an input data sequence the message of any length A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames It is located after the ingress queues SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is a text based protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail 549 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The SubNetwork Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Pr
306. g_event_index gt rising falling both Parameters lt alarm_id gt Alarm ID 1 65535 lt interval gt Sampling interval 1 2147483647 default 30 lt alarm_vairable gt The MIB OID that need to be referenced 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 xxx iflnOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 11 xxx iflnUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 12 xxx iflnNUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 13 xxx iflnDiscards 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 14 xxx iflnErrors 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 15 xxx iflnUnkownProtos 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 16 xxx ifOutOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 17 xxx ifOutUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 18 xxx ifOutNUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 19 xxx ifOutDiscards 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 20 xxx ifOutErrors 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 21 xxx ifOutQLen xxx means the interface identified by a particular value of this index is the same interface as identified by the same value of OID iflndex absolute Get the sample directly delta Calculate the difference between samples default 410 lt rising_threshold gt Rising threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 lt rising_event_index gt Rising event index 1 65535 lt falling_threshold gt Falling threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 lt falling_event_index gt Falling event index 1 65535 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP rising Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold falling Trigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling thresh
307. ge N o 9 E a a o a EY pr J hh oo dd El E A dl Ed dl E SUE E oo o fa x Cal ea en Ll a N o TSE SBSBSB8S8S8S88 Non Edge Non Edge Non Edge Non Edge y Non Edge w Non Edge x Non Edge 7 Non Edge w Non Edge w a J N oo N 00 000 a a al ea a a a pan J N fh oo rara aaa aa ENENENEMENE NENE Figure 4 7 6 STP CIST Port Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e STP Enabled Controls whether RSTP is enabled on this switch port e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost 145 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having ident
308. gurable PVID tagging is implemented Tagging 111 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 6 4 VLAN Port Configuration This Page is used for configuring the Managed Switch port VLAN The VLAN per Port Configuration Page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration Page All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID Understand nomenclature of the Switch Ml IEEE 802 10 Tagged and Untagged Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged e Tagged Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions e Untagged Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 10 tag from all packets that flow into those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 10 VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network
309. have been received by the switch Rx Responses dotixAuthEapolRespFr The number of valid EAPOL amesRx response frames other than Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch Rx Start dot1xAuthEapolStartFra The number of EAPOL Start mesRx frames that have been received by the switch Rx Logoff dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFr The number of valid EAPOL amesRx Logoff frames that have been received by the switch Rx Invalid Type dot1xAuthInvalidEapolF The number of EAPOL ramesRx frames that have been received by the switch in which the frame type is not recognized Rx Invalid Length dot1xAuthEapLengthErr The number of EAPOL 243 orFramesRx frames that have been User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Tx Total dot1xAuthEapolFrames Tx Tx Request ID dot1xAuthEapolReqldFr amesTx Tx Requests dot1xAuthEapolReqFra mesTx received by the switch in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by the switch The number of EAPOL Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch The number of valid EAPOL Request frames other than Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch e Backend Server Counters These backend RADIUS frame counters are available for the following administrative states Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth Direction Name IEEE Name Description
310. he alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 dot dash Spaces are not allowed the first character must be an alpha character and the first and last characters must not be a dot or a dash Trap Destination IPv6 Address Indicates the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can appear only once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Trap Authentication Failure Indicates the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failure traps Possible modes are E Enabled Enable SNMP trap authentication failure E Disabled Disable SNMP trap authentication failure Trap Link up and Link down Indicates the SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation E Disabled Disable SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Trap Inform Mode Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation E Disabled Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation Trap Inform Timeout seconds Indicates the SNMP trap inform t
311. he 802 10 VLAN Trunk port 2 Assign Port 8 to both VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 at the VLAN Member configuration Page 3 Define a VLAN 1 as a Public Area that overlapping with both VLAN 2 members and VLAN 3 members 4 Assign the VLAN Trunk Port to be the member of each VLAN which wants to be aggregated At this sample add Port 8 to be VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 member port The screen in Figure 4 6 12 appears Refresh lt lt gt gt Port Members ses wan o vannene Lele eepose CI E SN eee YY leales Tea FF Tea Tes fesTes Figure 4 6 12 VLAN Overlap Port Setting amp VLAN 1 The Public Area Member Assign 5 Specify Port 8 to be the 802 1Q VLAN Trunk port and the Trunking port must be a Tagged port while egress The Port 8 configuration as the following screen in Figure 4 6 13 e 1 O Al y Tagged v Disable y Figure 4 6 13 The Configuration of VLAN Trunk Port That is although the VLAN 2 members Port 1 to Port 3 and VLAN 3 members Port 4 to Port 6 also belongs to VLAN 1 But with different PVID settings packets form VLAN 2 or VLAN 3 is not able to access to the other VLAN 6 Repeat Step 1 to 5 setup the VLAN Trunk port at the partner switch and add more VLANs to join the VLAN trunk repeat Step 1 to 3 to assign the Trunk port to the VLANs 128 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 6 10 3 Port Isolate The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handles isolate and promiscuous ports and the each PCs
312. he Multi mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type gt To connect to 1000Base LX SFP transceiver use the Single mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type 37 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Connect the Fiber Cable Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable into the SFP transceiver Connect the other end of the cable to a device switches with SFP installed fiber NIC on a workstation or a Media Converter Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front ofthe Managed Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link failed Co works with some fiber NICs or Media Converters set the Link mode to 1000 Force or 100 Force is needed Remove the Transceiver Module Make sure there is no network activity by consult or check with the network administrator Or through the management interface of the switch converter if available to disable the port in advance Remove the Fiber Optic Cable gently Turn the handle of the MGB module to horizontal Pull out the module gently through the handle Figure 2 8 Pull out the SFP Transceiver Ly Never pull out the module without pull the handle or the push bolts on the module Direct pull ES out the module with violent could damage the module and SFP module slot of the Managed aja Switch 38 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 3 SWITCH M
313. he RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server e State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values E Disabled The server is disabled E Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running a Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts a Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled 252 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP RADIUS Accounting Server Status Overview Object Description o The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server e State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values a Disabled The server is disabled a Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running a Ready The server is enabled IP communicatio
314. he VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box When ALL VLAN Users are selected it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users and this is by default VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded on the respective VLAN member ports Buttons Static Y Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately k Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 118 4 6 7 VLAN Port Stat User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP us This Page provides VLAN Port Staus The VLAN Port Status screen in Figure 4 6 5 appears VLAN Port Status for Static User Static Port PVID Port Type Ingress Filtering Frame Type 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disabled Untag_this UnAware Disa
315. he security name for a principal default Show SNMP trap security name The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Security Switch SNMP Engine ID Description Set or show SNMPv3 local engine ID Syntax Security Switch SNMP Engine ID lt engineid gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ffH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string Default Setting 800007e5017f000001 401 Security Switch SNMP Community Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 community entry The entry index key is lt community gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Add lt community gt lt ip_addr gt lt ip_mask gt Parameters lt community gt Community string lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address lt ip_mask gt lPv4 subnet mask a b c d default Show IP mask Security Switch SNMP Community Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 community entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 community entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 402 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch SNMP User Add Description Add SNMPv3 user entry The entr
316. heck to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings e IP Address Allowed Source IP address e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address Buttons _ Add New Enty Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 285 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 12 12 ARP Inspection ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through DUT This Page provides ARP Inspection related configuration The ARP Inspection Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 12 appears ARP Inspection Configuration Mode Disabled gt Port Mode Configuration Figure 4 12 12 ARP Inspection Configuration Screen Page Screenshot 286 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode of ARP Inspection Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection Configuration e Port Mode Configuration Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port
317. hentication method with a RADIUS server Authentication pe 802 1X Switch fone EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request EAP Request OTP RADIUS Access Challenge EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Request EAP Success RADIUS Access Accept Port Authorized EAPOL Logoff Port Unauthorized Figure 4 11 2 EAP Message Exchange 228 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP E Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802 1X protocol packets When a client is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally If a client that does not support 802 1X is connected to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and the client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1X enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames a
318. hich wants to be monitored If in stacking switch the value must add 1000 switch ID 1 for example if the port is switch 3 port 5 the value is 2005 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 343 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 18 11 RMON Statistics Detail This Page provides an Detail of a specific RMON statistics entry screen in Figure 4 18 11 appears Detailed RMON Statistics ID Auto refresh O Port undefined Drops Octets Pkts Broadcast Multicast CRC Alignment Undersize Oversize Fragments Jabber Collisions 64 Bytes 65 127 Bytes 128 255 Bytes 256 511 Bytes 512 1023 Bytes 1024 1518 Bytes E oO E oO E o E o c0c 00 0 000 Figure 4 18 11 RMON Statistics Detail Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Data Source The port ID which wants to be monitored e Drop The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network e Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received e Broadcast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address e Multicast The total number of good p
319. hod you can view the administration console from a terminal personal computer Apple Macintosh or workstation connected to the Managed Switch s console serial port There are two ways to use this management method via direct access or modem port access The following sections describe these methods For more information about using the console refer to Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Console Management 40 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP PC f Workstation with Terminal emulation software Serial Port Serial Port 115200 8 n 1 Figure 3 1 Console Management Direct Access Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal to the Managed Switch console serial port When using this management method a straight DB9 RS 232 cable is required to connect the switch to the PC After making this connection configure the terminal emulation program to use the following parameters The default parameters are E 115200 bps E 8 data bits E No parity E 1 stop bit COMT Properties Port Settings Bits per second JAE Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control Figure 3 2 Terminal Parameter Settings You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots A
320. ic User Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN User AVLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID UVID Currently we support following VLAN CLI Web SNMP This are reffered as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic 117 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID If a port is included in a VLAN an image KI will be displayed If a port is included in a Forbidden port list an image Ls will be displayed If a port is included in a Forbidden port list and dynamic VLAN user register VLAN on same Forbidden port then conflict port will be displayed as conflict port e VLAN Membership T
321. ic entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration The MAC Address Table is configured on this Page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here The MAC Address Table Configuration screen in Figure 4 13 1 appears MAC Address Table Configuration Aging Configuration Disable Automatic Aging FJ Aging Time 300 seconds MAC Table Learning Port Members lil2 3 4 5 6 7 s 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Static MAC Table Configuration a Delete VLAN 10 mac Address 1 2 2 4 5 0 7 9 9 0 002 0 10 5 10 17 19 15 20 Add New Static Entry Figure 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Page Screenshot 289 The Page includes the following fields Aging Configuration User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Object Description e Disable Automatic Aging Ena
322. ic or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP e Action Parameters Class QoS class 0 7 or Default DPL Valid Drop Precedence Level can be 0 3 or Default DSCP Valid DSCP value can be 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 or Default Default means that the default classified value is not modified by this QCE Buttons Save Click to save the configuration and move to main QCL Page Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous Page without saving the configuration change 202 4 9 12 QCL Status User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP This Page shows the QCL status by different QCL users Each row describes the QCE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch The QoS Control List Status screen in Figure 4 9 14 appears Cine Y Autorefesh E QoS Control List Status action User QCE Frame Type Port Conflict The Page includes the following fields No entries Figure 4 9 14 QoS Control List Status Page Screenshot Object Description e User Indicates the QCL user e QCE Indicates the index of QCE e Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Pos
323. ical port cost See above Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 e AdminEdge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as beeing set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized e AutoEdge Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU s are received on the port or not Restricted Role If enabled causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influence the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also known as Root Guard e Restricted TCN If enabled causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree s active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridg
324. ication fails With 802 1X access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification like ICMP for unicast connections IGMP can be used for online video and gaming and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these uses A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This router is called the Querier IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages 542 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP from a mail server IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4 It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 POP3 but offers additional and more complex features For example the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer If you wish to remove your messages from the server you must use your
325. icators Before connecting any network device to the Managed Switch please read this chapter completely 2 1 Hardware Description 2 1 1 Switch Front Panel The front panel provides a simple interface monitoring the Managed Switch Figure 2 1 shows the front panel of the Managed Switch WGSW 20160HP Front Panel PLANET wos Figure 2 1 WGSW 20160HP Front Panel Ml Gigabit TP interface 10 100 1000Base T Copper RJ 45 Twist Pair Up to 100 meters E SFP slots 100 1000Base X mini GBIC slot SFP Small Factor Pluggable transceiver module From 550 meters to 2km Multi mode fiber up to above 10 20 30 40 50 70 120 kilometers Single mode fiber M Reset button At the left of front panel the reset button is designed for reboot the Managed Switch without turn off and on the power The following is the summary table of Reset button functions Reset Button Pressed and Released Function lt 5 sec System reboot Reboot the Managed Switch Reset the Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration The Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default settings as below Default Username admin gt 5 sec Factory Default Default Password admin Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 31 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Ml Console Port The console port is a DB9 RS 232 male serial port connector lt is an interface for connecting a terminal directly Through th
326. ick to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh H Cl Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 104 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 5 4 LACP Port Status This Page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports The LACP Port Status screen in Figure 4 5 6 appears LACP Status Partner Partner Partner No 2 a A gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Auto refresh C Refresh Figure 4 5 6 LACP Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves Meanwhile it s LACP status is disabled e Key The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group e Partner System ID The partner s System ID MAC address e Partner Port The partner s port number connected to this port e Partner Priority The partner s port priority 105 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh i L Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 5 5 LACP Port Statistics This Page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports The LACP Port Statistics scre
327. icular port e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e IP Address The IP address of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields _ clear Flushes all dynamic entries Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 294 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 14 LLDP 4 14 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and
328. identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table and will be empty if no MAC address is currently selected To populate the table select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below Description Identity Shows the identity of the supplicant as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame Clicking the link causes the supplicant s EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no supplicants are attached it shows No supplicants attached This column is not available for MAC based Auth MAC Address VLAN ID For Multi 802 1X this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant For MAC based Auth this column holds the MAC address of the attached client Clicking the link causes the client s Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module State The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated In the authenticated state it is allowed to forward frames on the port and in the unauthenticated state it is blocked As long as the backend server hasn t successfully authenticated the client it is unauthenticated If an authentication fails for one or the other reason the client will remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds Last
329. ider switching This is also known as Q in Q switching Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware members of one VLAN and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware members of multiple VLANs and set up to tag all frames Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag VLAN ID is a 12 bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality WEP is an acronym for Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a deprecated algorithm to secure IEEE 802 11 wireless networks Wireless networks broadcast messages using radio so are more susceptible to eavesdropping than wired networks When introduced in 1999 WEP was intended to provide confidentiality comparable to that of a traditional wired network Wikipedia WiFi is an acronym for Wireless Fidelity It is meant to be used generically when referring of any type of 802 11 network whether 802 11b 802 11a dual band etc The term is promulgated by the Wi Fi Alliance WPA is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access It was created in response
330. idered disable Disable DHCP relaly mode default Show flow DHCP relaly mode Default Setting disable Security Network DHCP Relay Server Description Show or set DHCP relay server Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Server lt ip_addr gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address Default Setting null 429 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode Description Set or show DHCP relay agent information option mode When enable DHCP relay information mode operation the agent insert specific information option 82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and remote it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable DHCP relay agent information option mode disable Disable DHCP relay agent information option mode default Show DHCP relay agent information option mode Default Setting disable Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy Description Set or show the DHCP relay mode When enable DHCP relay information mode operation if agent receive a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information It will enforce the policy Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy replace keep drop Parameters replace Replace the origina
331. iding you for run the Planet Smart Discovery Utility 1 Deposit the Planet Smart Discovery Utility in administrator PC 2 Run this utility and the following screen appears Select Adapter 192 168 0 10 00 18 38 2E 40 44 I Control Packet Force Broadcast Message Figure 3 6 Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen 43 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP g If there are two LAN cards or above in the same administrator PC choose different LAN card by dd use the Select Adapter tool Note 3 Press Refresh button for list current connected devices in the discovery list the screen is shown as follow File Option Help Refresh z Exit uc cies Paes 00 30 4F 00 00 01 WGS w 20160H 1 0b121211 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 PLANET WGSw 20160 SelectAdapter 192 168 0 10 00 18 38 2E A0 44 I Control Packet Force Broadcast Update Device Update Multi Update All a Connect to Device Device WGSW 20160HP 00 30 4F 00 00 01 C Device Information done Figure 3 7 Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen 1 This utility show all necessary information from the devices such as MAC Address Device Name firmware version Device IP Subnet address also can assign new password IP Subnet address and description for the devices 2 After setup completed press Update Device Update Multi or Update All button to take affect The meaning of the 3 buttons above are show
332. ienek eni cnn non n nn nano rn rr narran 420 Security NetworkNAS HoldtiME ccoioocoiliidiaa adi ce 420 Security Network NAS RADIUS_Q0S cononcccccoccccccoccccnononononononcnnnnnncnonnn nn nn nan n nr r enn 421 Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN occcccicocccccocccccnnoncnononononnnnncnnnno nn nr nano nn nr nn r rn rre renace rrrn 421 Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN n isinrctiiimrin i hogen cnn non cnn nano rr e da iewi aa e 422 Security Network NAS Authenticate oooooccccinonncnnnoccccnononcncnononcnn non tnnt no nn nr nono cnn non n nn rn 423 security Network NAS StatiStiCS caco A it 423 Security Network ACL Configuration oooooocccnnnnncnnoccccnnnonnnnnononcnnnnrncnnn tntu cr nano rra nn rear rr rre 423 Security Network ACL Action cocino a Ee AAA ENE ea AEAEE NE ETRE ENNE AANE OERE AA EE ANENE a 424 Security Network ACL Polly viciosa iii 424 Security Network ACL Rate ooooonccinnncccnonoccconononcnononnnononnn nn reee aAa LE n cnn erre 425 Security Network ACL Add civic i ccias 425 Security Network ACL Delete coccion daria 427 Security Network ACL LOOKUP sesiones tapas dico 427 security Network ACL Cleo oi A peed ue tle eee 427 Security Network ACL Matus dei 428 Security Network AGL Port States niinniin n ena a a anaE AEE AAE AE AAS EAA EAK A Ea AEE EEE aaan 428 Security Network DHCP Relay ConfiguratiON ooooocccononccnnnnocnnononccnononnnc nono nnnnnonn nn nn nn rr r cnn rre 429 Security Network DHCP Relay Mode oooooccccococccocococccononcncnnnn
333. ier Status Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE e Querier Transmitted The number of Transmitted Querier e Querier Received The number of Received Querier e V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports 165 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports e V2 Leave Received The number of Received V2 Leave e Router Port Display which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port e Port Switch port number e Status Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately _ clear J Clears all Statistics counters Auto refresh H i Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 8 6 IGMP Group Information Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this Page The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP
334. ific 218 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP DIP mask in dotted decimal notation ICMP Parameters Object e ICMP Type Filter Description Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE Any No ICMP filter is specified ICMP filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP value A field for entering an ICMP value appears e ICMP Type Value When Specific is selected for the ICMP filter you can enter a specific ICMP value The allowed range is O to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value e ICMP Code Filter Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears e ICMP Code Value TCP UDP Parameters Object When Specific is selected for the ICMP code filter you can enter a specific ICMP code value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value Description e TCP UDP Source Filter Specify the TCP UDP source filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP source filter is specified TCP UDP source filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP s
335. imeout The allowed range is 0 to 2147 Trap Inform Retry Times Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allowed range is 0 to 255 Trap Probe Security Engine ID Indicates the SNMPv3 trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Possible values are E Enabled Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation E Disabled Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Trap Security Engine ID Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID SNMPv3 sends traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique engine ID for these traps and informs is needed When Trap Probe Security Engine ID is enabled the ID will be probed automatically Otherwise the ID specified in this field is used The string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits 81 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed e Trap Security Name Indicates the SNMP trap security name SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique security name is needed when traps and informs are enabled Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 4 SNMP System Information The switch system information is provided here The SNMP System Information screen in Figure 4 3 3 appears System Information Configuration
336. imit Control functionality e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid traffic received on the supplicant s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access Accept packet Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rule e All 8 octets in the attribute s value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 7 which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0 7 e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked
337. ination and so on You can create and modify classifications The Switch then groups classified traffic in order to schedule them with the appropriate service level e DiffServ Code Point DSCP is the traffic prioritization bits within an IP header that are encoded by certain applications and or devices to indicate the level of service required by the packet across a network e Service Level defines the priority that will be given to a set of classified traffic You can create and modify service levels e Policy comprises a set of rules that are applied to a network so that a network meets the needs of the business That is traffic can be prioritized across a network according to its importance to that particular business type e QoS Profile consists of multiple sets of rules classifier plus service level combinations The QoS profile is assigned to a port s e Rules comprises a service level and a classifier to define how the Switch will treat certain types of traffic Rules are associated with a QoS Profile see above To implement QoS on your network you need to carry out the following actions 1 Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic 2 Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch 3 Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier 4 Apply a QoS profile to a port s 183 User s Ma
338. ind the environmental restrictions discussed in Chapter 1 prd Note Section 4 and Specification Step4 Connect the Managed Switch to network devices Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10 100 1000 RJ 45 ports on the front of the Managed Switch Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer servers workstations or routers etc ga Connection to the Managed Switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ 45 tips For more nn Note information please see the Cabling Specification in Appendix A 34 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Step5 Supply power to the Managed Switch Connect one end of the power cable to the Managed Switch Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet When the Managed Switch receives power the Power LED should remain solid Green 2 2 2 Rack Mounting To install the Managed Switch in a 19 inch standard rack please follows the instructions described below Step1 Place the Managed Switch on a hard flat surface with the front panel positioned towards the front side Step2 Attach the rack mount bracket to each side of the Managed Switch with supplied screws attached to the package Figure 2 5 shows how to attach brackets to one side of the Managed Switch Figure 2 5 Attach Brackets to the Managed Switch You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets Damage caused to the parts by using incorrect screws
339. ing length is 1 32 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and underscores lt password gt The password for this user name The allowed string length is 0 32 Use clear or as null string lt privilege_level gt User privilege level 1 15 Security Switch User Delete Description Delete users entry Syntax Security Switch Users Delete lt user_name gt Parameters lt user_name gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and underscores 386 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration Description Show privilege configuration Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration Security Switch Privilege Level Group Description Configure a privilege level group Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Group lt group_name gt lt cro gt lt crw gt lt sro gt lt srw gt Parameters lt group_name gt Privilege group name lt cro gt Configuration read only privilege level 1 15 lt crw gt Configuration Execute read write privilege level 1 15 lt sro gt Status Statistics read only privilege level 1 15 lt srw gt Status Statistics read write privilege level 1 15 Security Switch Privilege Level Current Description Show the current privilege level Syntax Security Switch Pr
340. ing state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status Page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status The SSH Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 5 appears SSH Configuration Model Entity Figure 4 12 5 SSH Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SSH mode operation a Disabled Disable SSH mode operation Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 276 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 12 6 Port Security Status This Page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If onl
341. ing those in bad packets received on the network e Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received e Broadcast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address e Multicast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address e CRC Errors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets e Undersize The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets e Oversize The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets e Frag The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Jabb The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Coll The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment 346 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e 64 Bytes The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length e 65 127 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 to 127 octets in length e 128 255 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 to 255 octets in length e 256 511 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were be
342. ion User name admin Password PEPEE C Remember my password Figure 4 1 2 Login Screen Default User name admin Default Password admin After entering the username and password the main screen appears as Figure 4 1 3 46 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP WGSW 2U100HP gt System gt SNMP p Purl Management Welcome to PLANET y gt Spanning Tree gt Multicast WGSW 20160HP 16 Port 10 100 1000Mbps 802 3at PoE 4G TP SFP p MAC Address Table Management Switch Une IAS PLANET Technology Corporation PoF 10F No 96 Minquan Re Xindian Dist New Talpel City 231 Tawan R 0 C p Loop Prolecuor Tel 886 2 2219 9518 RMON Fax 884 2219 9528 Email Sapportaplanci com tw Copyright 2212 PLANET Teceno og Corseraten Al rights reserved Figure 4 1 3 Web Main Page Now you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Managed Switch by Web interface The Switch Menu on the left of the web Page let you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch provides It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7 0 or above to access Managed Switch 1 La 2 The changed IP address take effect immediately after click on the Save button you need to g use the new IP address to access the Web interface 3 Note For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup 4 Only accept command in low
343. is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted e Queue Scheduler Percent Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted 189 e Port Shaper Enable User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port e Port Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 13200 when the Unit is Mbps e Port Shaper Unit Buttons Save Click to save changes Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous Page 4 9 6 Port Tag Remarking This Page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports The Port Tag Remarking screen in Figure 4 9 6 appears QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Figure 4 9 6 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Page Screenshot 190 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Th
344. is Page allows you to configure the LLDP MED The LLDPMED Configuration screen in Figure 4 14 2 appears LLDP MED Configuration Fast Start Repeat Count Coordinates Location a Ja JT ja Y Civic Address Location City district Leading street direction Additional location info Emergency Call Service tame Policies Delete Policy ID Application Type Tag LAN ID L2 Priority DSCP No entries present Figure 4 14 2 LLDPMED Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Object Description e Fast start repeat count Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy 298 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP With this in mind LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the
345. is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other requirements to the aging period The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled The end host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that the end host logs off or powers down If it wasn t for aging the end host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from the end host and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period the end host is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Mode Controls whether Limit Control is enabled
346. is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by e Management Address Management Address is the neighbor unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist the discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbor s IP address Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh H Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 308 4 14 6 Port Statistics User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP This Page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole stack switch while local counters refers to counters for the currently selected switch The LLDP Statistics screen in Figure 4 14 5 appears LLDP Global Counters Global Counters Neighbour entries were last changed 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 00 00 00 5502 sec ago Total Neighbours Entries Added 0 Total Neighbours Entries Deleted 0 Total Neighbours Entries Dropped 0 Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out 0 Local Port Tx Frames Rx Frames Rx Errors Frames Discarded TLVs Discarded TLVs Unrecognized Org Discarded Age Outs 1 0 0 0 0 0 00000000600 500000000 LLDP Statistics Local Counters 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ooo oo o00 O amp O eooooceo a 500000032 500000000 ooooccoc 0 The Page includes the following field
347. is switch Hi Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets 4 6 3 VLAN Basic Information The VLAN Basic Information Page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the Managed Switch The VLAN Basic Information screen in Figure 4 6 1 appears VLAN Basic Information VLAN Basic Information Mode IEEE 802 10 Maximum VLAN ID 4094 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 255 Current Number of VLANs 1 VLAN Learning PL Configurable PVID Taggin Yes Figure 4 6 1 VLAN Basic Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Display the current VLAN mode used by this Managed Switch a Port Based IEEE 802 1Q VLAN e Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this Managed Switch e Maximum Number of Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this Managed Switch Supported VLANs e Current number of Display the current number of VLANs VLANs e VLAN Learning Display the VLAN learning mode The Managed Switch supports IVL IVL Independent vlan learning e Configurable PVID Indicates whether or not confi
348. ist gt none zero selected all Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports none No DSCP ingress classification zero Classify DSCP if DSCP 0 selected Classify DSCP for which class mode is enable all Classify all DSCP default Show port DSCP ingress classification mode Default Setting none 481 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark Description Set or show the port DSCP remarking mode Syntax QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark lt port_list gt disable enable remap_dp_unaware remap_dp_aware Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disable DSCP egress rewrite enable Enable DSCP egress rewrite with the value received from analyzer remap Rewrite DSCP in egress frame with remapped DSCP default Show port DSCP egress remarking mode Default Setting disable QoS DSCP Map Description Set or show DSCP mapping table This table is used to map QoS class and DP level based on DSCP value DSCP value used to map QoS class and DPL is either translated DSCP value or incoming frame DSCP value Syntax QoS DSCP Map lt dscp_list gt lt class gt lt dpl gt Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 list or all default Show DSCP ingress map table i e DSCP gt class DPL lt class gt QoS class 0 7 lt dpl gt Drop Precedence Level 0 3 482 User s Man
349. ith the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over 292 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e IP Address The IP address of the entry Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields crear J Flushes all dynamic entries lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 13 4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this Page The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by IP address and then by IP mask The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4 13 4 appears Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Start from Port 1
350. ivate VLAN Click to add new VLAN Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 121 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 6 9 Port Isolation Overview When a VLAN is configured to be a private VLAN communication between ports within that VLAN can be prevented Two application examples are provided in this section e Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the same VLAN but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN e Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone DMZ are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment but are not allowed to communicate with each other Unprotected Public Servers Permit Unprotected Protected Protected Protected Protected Access Deny Access Deny Access Deny Protected Group Private VLAN For private VLANs to be applied the switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation When this is in place one or more of the configured VLANs can be configured as private VLANs Ports in a private VLAN fall into one of these two groups a Promiscuous ports Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN Por
351. ive topology e Port Error Recovery Control whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and re enabled for normal STP operation The condition is also cleared by a system 143 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP reboot e Port Error Recovery The time that has to pass before a port in the error disabled state can be Timeout enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours The Managed Switch implement the Rapid Spanning Protocol as the default spanning tree protocol Es While select Compatibles mode the system use the RSTP 802 1w to compatible and co work Note with another STP 802 1DYs BPDU control packets Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 3 Bridge Status This Page provides a status overview for all STP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance where the column displays the following information The Bridge Status screen in Figure 4 7 5 appears STP Bridges Root Topolo Topolo arideem Poot topology Topology IST 60 00 00 30 4F 11 22 55 80 00 00 30 4F 11 22 55 O Steady gt Auto refresh O Figure 4 7 5 STP Bridge Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI The Bridg
352. ivilege Level Current Default Setting 15 387 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch Authentication Configuration Description Show Auth configuration Syntax Security Switch Auth Configuration Security Switch Authentication Method Description Set or show Auth method default Show Auth method Syntax Security Switch Auth Method console telnet ssh web none local radius tacacs enable disable Parameters console Settings for console telnet Settings for telnet ssh Settings for ssh web Settings for web default Set or show the specific client authentication method none Authentication disabled local Use local authentication radius Use remote RADIUS authentication tacacs Use remote TACACS authentication default Show client authentication method enable Enable local authentication if remote authentication fails disable Disable local authentication if remote authentication fails The parameter is effective when it is typed Default Setting disable 388 Security Switch SSH Configuration Description Show SSH configuration Syntax Security Switch SSH Configuration Security Switch SSH Mode Description Set or show the SSH mode Syntax Security Switch SSH Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SSH disable Disable SSH default Show SSH mode Default Setting enable Security Switch HTTPs Configuration Description Show H
353. l is 125 seconds e QRI Query Response Interval The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds e LLQI Last Listener Query Interval The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address Specific Queries sent in response to Version 1 Multicast Listener Done messages It is also the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and Source Specific Query messages The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last listener query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second e URI Buttons Refresh Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a node s initial report of interest in a multicast address The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields e Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed Add New MLD VLAN Click to add new MLD V
354. l ports shutdown Shutdown the port shut_log Shutdown the port and Log event log Only Log the event Loop Protect Port Transmit Description Set or show the Loop Protection port transmit Syntax Loop Protect Port Transmit lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Loop Protection port transmit disable Disable Loop Protection port transmit Loop Protect Status Description Show specific port Loop Protect Status Syntax Loop Protect Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 508 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 22 IPMC Command IPMC Configuration Description Show IPMC snooping configuration Syntax IPMC Configuration mldligmp Parameters mldligmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP IPMC Mode Description Set or show the IPMC snooping mode Syntax IPMC Mode mldligmp enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC snooping disable Disable IPMC snooping default Show global IPMC snooping mode Default Setting disable 509 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IPMC Flooding Description Set or show the IPMC unregistered addresses flooding operation Syntax IPMC Flooding mld igmp enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igm
355. l relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it keep Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it drop Drop the package when receive a DHCP message that already contains relay information default Show DHCP relay information policy Default Setting replace 430 Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics Description Show or clear DHCP relay statistics Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics clear Parameters clear Clear DHCP relay statistics Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration Description Show DHCP snooping configuration Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode Description Set or show the DHCP snooping mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable DHCP snooping mode User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports disable Disable DHCP snooping mode default Show flow DHCP snooping mode Default Setting disable 431 Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode Description Set or show the DHCP snooping port mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode lt port_list gt trusted untrusted Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All p
356. l that this entry should belong to Possible Protocol authentication protocol are E None None authentication protocol E MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication 84 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP protocol E SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol E The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication Password A string identifying the authentication pass phrase For MD5 authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocol are E None None privacy protocol E DES An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol e Privacy Password Buttons A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Add New Entry Click to add a new user entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 5 3 SNMPv3 Groups Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this Page The entry index keys
357. le Enable MSTP autoEdge Disable Disable MSTP autoEdge Default enable STP Port P2P Description Set or show the STP point2point port parameter Syntax STP Port P2P lt stp_port_list gt enable disable auto Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MSTP point2point disable Disable MSTP point2point auto Automatic MSTP point2point detection Default auto 448 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP STP Port RestrictedRole Description Set or show the MSTP restrictedRole port parameter Syntax STP Port RestrictedRole lt stp_port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MSTP restricted role disable Disable MSTP restricted role Default disable STP Port RestrictedTcn Description Set or show the MSTP restrictedTcn port parameter Syntax STP Port RestrictedTcn lt stp_port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MSTP restricted TCN disable Disable MSTP restricted TCN Default disable 449 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP STP Port bpduGuard Description Set or show the bpduGuard port parameter Syntax STP Port bpduGuard lt stp_port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port BPDU Guard
358. le 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 web Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS snmp Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP telnet Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH Security Switch Access Delete Description Delete access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Delete lt access_id gt Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 392 Security Switch Access Lookup Description Lookup access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Lookup lt access_id gt Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 Security Switch Access Clear Description Clear access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Clear Security Switch Access Statistics Description Show or clear access management statistics Syntax Security Switch Access Statistics clear Parameters clear Clear access management statistics Security Switch SNMP Configuration Description Show SNMP configuration Syntax Security Switch SNMP Configuration 393 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch SNMP Mode Description Set or show the SNMP mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP disable Disable SNMP default Show SNMP mode Default Set
359. led Disabled x Disabled x Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled y Disabled w Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled y Disabled w Disabled Disabled Enabled Figure 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration Page Screenshot oe ooeoeocodccoc amp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Policy ID Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 0 through 255 The default value is 0 Action Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit Rate Limiter ID Select which rate limiter to apply on this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 16 The default value is Disabled Port Redirect Select which port frames are redirected on The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number and it can t be set when action is permitted The default value is Disabled 222 Mirror User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Logging Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Fra
360. list gt active passive Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports active Initiate LACP negotiation passive Listen for LACP packets default Show LACP role Default Setting active LACP Status Description Show LACP Status Syntax LACP Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 456 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP LACP Statistics Description Show LACP Statistics Syntax LACP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear LACP statistics LACP Timeout Description Set or show the LACP timeout Syntax LACP Timeout lt port_list gt fast slow Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports fast Fast PDU transmissions fast timeout slow Slow PDU transmissions slow timeout default Show LACP timeout Default Setting fast 457 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 11 LLDP Command LLDP Configuration Description Show LLDP configuration Syntax LLDP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports LLDP Mode Description Set or show LLDP mode Syntax LLDP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable rx tx Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable LLDP reception a
361. ll default All queues 0 7 enable Enable use of excess bandwidth disable Disable use of excess bandwidth default Show port queue excess bandwidth mode Default Setting disable 478 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QoS Port TagRemarking Mode Description Set or show the port tag remarking mode Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking Mode lt port_list gt classified default mapped Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports classified Use classified PCP DEI values default Use default PCP DEI values mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level default Show port tag remarking mode Default Setting classified QoS Port TagRemarking PCP Description Set or show the default PCP This value is used when port tag remarking mode is set to default Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking PCP lt port_list gt lt pcp gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt pcp gt Priority Code Point 0 7 Default Setting 0 479 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QoS Port TagRemarking DEI Description Set or show the default DEI This value is used when port tag remarking mode is set to default Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking DEI lt port_list gt lt dei gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dei gt Drop Eligible Indicator 0 1 Default Setting 0
362. logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods such as telnet and Web browser This Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following options m Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS m Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS m Local user name and Priviledge Level control RADIUS and TACACS are logon authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the Managed Switch 4 11 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL traffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is successful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Devic
363. lso certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 41 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 3 4 Web Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer After you set up your IP address for the switch you can access the Managed Switch s Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the Managed Switch PC Workstation with IE Browser J a RJ 45 UTP Cable LE IP Address IP Address 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 x Figure 3 3 Web Management You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location just as if you were directly connected to the Managed Switch s console port Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 0 or later Safari or Mozilla Firefox 1 5 or later WGSW 20U100HP Systern SNMP p Pork Management Welcome to PLANET WGSW 20160HP 16 Port 10 100 1000Mbps 802 3at PoE 4G TP SFP MAC Address Table Management Switch IDP p Diagnostics PLANET Technology Corporation PoF L0F
364. ltered Show filtered statistics 0 7 Show priority statistics default Show all port statistics up Show ports which are up down Show ports which are down 369 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Port VeriPHY Description Run cable diagnostics Syntax Port VeriPHY lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Port Description Description Set or show Port Description Syntax Port Description lt port_list gt lt descr_text gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt descr_text gt Text of port description Default Setting empty 370 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 4 MAC Address Table Command MAC Configuration Description Show MAC address table configuration Syntax MAC Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports MAC Add Description Add MAC address table entry Syntax MAC Add lt mac_addr gt lt port_list gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XXXXXXXXXXXX X is a hexadecimal digit lt port_list gt Port list or all or none lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 MAC Delete Description Delete MAC address entry Syntax MAC Delete lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_add
365. mail client to generate local folders copy messages to your local hard drive and then delete and expunge the messages from the server IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across a internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over it is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It
366. main shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Boot the stack or elect a new masterthe switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the stackswitch 3 Click the Reopen button Trap 8 Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken e State This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for all actions Limit Reached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap amp Shutdown Buttons Save e Re open Button Click to save changes If a port is shutdown by this module you may reopen it by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the case For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section Note that clicking the reopen button causes the Page to be refreshed so non committed changes will be lost Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Click to refresh the Page Note that non committed changes
367. mbers VLAN 1D Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 s 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 No more entries Figure 4 8 19 MVR Groups Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group ID of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR Channels Groups Information Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 180 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 8 17 MVR SFM Information Entries in the MVR SFM Information Table are shown on this Page The MVR SFM Source Filtered Multicast Information Table also contains the SSM Source Specific Multicast information This table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR SFM Information Table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR SFM Information Table The Start from VLAN and Group Address input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR SFM Information Table The MVR SFM Information screen
368. mes matching the ACE are dropped e Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Redirect Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are redirected to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port redirect operation is disabled 211 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame e Modification Buttons You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons O Inserts a new ACE before the current row Edits the ACE row Moves the ACE up the list Moves the ACE down the list 6 Deletes the ACE O The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings Buttons Click to refresh the Page any changes made locally will be undone Click to clear the counters Remove AN Click to remove all ACEs 212 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 10 3 ACE Configuration Configur
369. mes received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled e State Specify the port state of this port The allowed values are Enabled To reopen ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module Disabled To close ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module The default value is Enabled e Counter Ow ta Ss o 5 D ave et e fF E Click to save changes Click to clear the counters Counts the number of frames that match this ACE Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Click to refresh the Page any changes made locally will be undone 223 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 5 appears ACL Rate Limiter Configuration p 0 4001 Ah UN MN Qu E E a
370. meters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 lt start_ip_addr gt Start IP address a b c d lt end_ip_addr gt End IP address a b c d web Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS snmp Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP telnet Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH 391 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch Access IPv6 Add Description Add access management IPv6 entry default Add all supported protocols Syntax Security Switch Access lpv6 Add lt access_id gt lt start_ipv6_addr gt lt end_ipv6_addr gt web snmp telnet Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 lt start_ipv6_addr gt Start IPv6 address lt end_ipv6_addr gt IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 End IPv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multip
371. munities Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string e Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address A particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask e Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 83 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 3 5 2 SNMPv3 Users Configure SNMPv3 users table on this Page The entry index keys are Engine ID and User Name The SNMPv3 Users screen in Figure 4 3 5 appears SNMPv3 User Configuration Delete User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Name Level Protocol Password Protocol Password 800007 e50177000001 default_user NoAuth NoPriv None None None None Figure 4 3 5 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to
372. must be set on same the IP subnet address with the Managed Switch For example the default IP address of the Managed Switch is 192 168 0 100 then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 0 x where x is a number between 1 and 254 except 100 and the default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 If you have changed the default IP address of the Managed Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via console then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 2 and 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC PC Workstation with IE Browser A RJ 45 UTP Cable IP Address IP Address 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 x Figure 4 1 1 Web Management 45 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP m Logging on the Managed Switch 1 Use Internet Explorer 7 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface The factory default IP Address as following http 192 168 0 100 2 When the following login screen appears please enter the default username admin with password admin or the username password you have changed via console to login the main screen of Managed Switch The login screen in Figure 4 1 2 appears Connect to 192 168 0 100 The server 192 168 0 100 at Web Management requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connect
373. n t response continuously the PoE port will be reset e Action Allows user to set which action will be apply if the PD witout any response WGSW 20160HP PoE Switch offers 3 actions as following gt PD Reboot It menas system will reset the PoE port that connected the PD gt Reboot amp Alarm It means system will reset the PoE port and issue an alarm message via Syslog SMTP gt Alarm It means system will issue an alarm message via Syslog SMTP 328 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e Reboot Time 30 180s This column allows user to set the PoE device rebooting time due to there are so many kind of PoE device on the market and theyhave different rebooting time The PD Alive check is not a defining standard so the PoE device on the market doesn t report reboots done information to WGSW 20160HP PoE Switch so user has to make sure how long the PD will be finished to boot and then set the time value to this column System is going to check the PD again according to the reboot time If ou can not make sure precisely booting time we suggest you to set it longer Buttons Save Click it to save changes Click it to reset configuration which doesn t to be saved yet 329 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 17 Loop Protection This chapter describes enabling loop protection function that provides loop protection to prevent broadcast loops in Managed Switch 4 17 1 Configuration This Page allows the user to
374. n e Zip code Postal zip code Example 2791 e Building Building structure Example Low Library e Apartment Unit Apartment suite Example Apt 42 e Floor Floor Example 4 e Room no Room number Example 450F e Place type Place type Example Office e Postal community Postal community name Example Leonia name e P O Box Post office box P O BOX Example 12345 e Additional code Additional code Example 1320300003 Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service e g E911 and others such as defined by TIA or NENA Object Description e Emergency Call Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN Service identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling Policies Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactiv
375. n Page Screenshot 280 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation e Port Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Configuration Trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Statistics This Page provides statistics for DHCP snooping The statistics only counter packet under DHCP snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled And it doesn t count the DHCP packets for system DHCP client The DHCP Snooping Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 12 9 appears DHCP Snooping Port Statistics Port 1 Poti v Receive Packets Transmit Packets Rx Discover Tx Discover Rx Offer Tx Offer Rx Request Tx Request Rx Decline Tx Decline Rx ACK Tx ACK Tx NAK Tx Release Tx Inform Tx Lease Query Tx Lease Unassigned Tx Lease Unknown Tx Lease Active Auto refresh O Figure 4 12 9 DHCP S
376. n as below E Update Device use current setting on one single device E Update Multi use current setting on choose multi devices E Update All use current setting on whole devices in the list The same functions mentioned above also can be finding in Option tools bar 3 To click the Control Packet Force Broadcast function it can allow assign new setting value to the Web Smart Switch under different IP subnet address 4 Press Connect to Device button then the Web login screen appears in Figure 3 4 5 Press Exit button to shutdown the planet Smart Discovery Utility 44 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 WEB CONFIGURATION This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web Based management from Managed Switch About Web based Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer The Web Based Management supports Internet Explorer 7 0 It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network bandwidth consumption enhance access speed and present an easy viewing screen eis By default IE7 0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets The user has to Note explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports The Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection make sure the manager PC
377. n is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 253 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 11 8 RADIUS Details This Page provides detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server The RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview screen in Figure 4 11 9 appears RADIUS Authentication Statistics for Server 1 Server 1 v Receive Packets Transmit Packets Access Accepts Access Requests Access Rejects Access Retransmissions Access Challenges Pending Requests Malformed Access Responses Timeouts Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Other Info IP Address 0 0 0 0 1812 State Disabled Round Trip Time DO ms RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server 1 Receive Packets Transmit Packets Responses Requests Malformed Responses Retransmissions Bad Authenticators Pending Requests Unknown Types Timeouts Packets Dropped sae Info IP Address 0 0
378. n the rear panel of the Managed Switch Plug the other end of the power cord into an electric service outlet then the power will be ready The device is a power required device it means it will not work till it is powered If your networks should active all the time please consider using UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply for your device It will Power Notice prevent you from network data loss or network downtime In some area installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your Managed Switch from being damaged by unregulated surge or current to the Switch or the power adapter 33 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 2 2 Install the Switch This section describes how to install your Managed Switch and make connections to the Managed Switch Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented To install your Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf simply complete the following steps 2 2 1 Desktop Installation To install the Managed Switch on desktop or shelf please follows these steps Step1 Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the Managed Switch Step2 Place the Managed Switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source as shown in Figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 Place the Managed Switch on the Desktop Step3 Keep enough ventilation space between the Managed Switch and the surrounding objects ga When choosing a location please keep in m
379. n transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease The number of lease active option 53 with value 13 packets received and Active transmitted Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately clear Clears the counters for the selected port 282 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings lt helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host This Page provides IP Source Guard related configuration The IP Source Guard Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 10 appears Translate Dynamic to Static Port Mode Configuration lt All gt w lt All gt Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled w Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Cl infimite DJov Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled w Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled x Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Figure 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration Screen Page Screenshot 283 User s Manual of W
380. n which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authentication server requesting identity information from the client verifying that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to the client The switch includes the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the 227 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client a Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentic
381. naged Switch Section 9 TROUBSHOOTING The chapter explains how to trouble shooting of the Managed Switch Appendix A The section contains cable information of the Managed Switch 24 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 1 4 Product Features gt Physical Port m 16 Port 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 copper with IEEE 802 3at 802 3af Power over Ethernet Injector function m 4 10 100 1000Mbps TP and SFP shared combo interfaces SFP Mini GBIC supports 100 1000Mbps Dual mode shared with Port 17 to Port 20 m RS 232 DB9 console interface for basic management and setup gt Power over Ethernet Hi Comply with IEEE 802 3at High Power over Ethernet End Span PSE Comply with IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet End Span PSE Up to 16 ports for IEEE 802 3af 802 3at devices powered Support PoE Power up to 30 8 Watts for each PoE ports Auto detect powered device PD Circuit protection prevent power interference between ports Remote power feeding up to 100m PoE Management Total PoE power budget control Per port PoE function enable disable PoE Port Power feeding priority Per PoE port power limit PD classification detection PD Alive check POE schedule gt Layer 2 Features M Prevents packet loss with back pressure Half Duplex and IEEE 802 3x PAUSE frame flow control Full Duplex Wi High performance of Store and Forward architecture and runt CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth
382. names and computer hostnames into computer friendly IP addresses For example the domain name www example com might translate to 192 168 0 1 DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service In a denial of service DoS attack an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services By targeting at network sites or network connection an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email web sites online accounts banking etc or other services that rely on the affected computer Dotted Decimal Notation Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets An Pv4 dotted decimal address has the form x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 540 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Ethernet defined in IEEE 802 3az EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU T G 8031 Ethernet Type or EtherType is a field in the Ethernet MAC header defined by the Ethernet networking standard It is used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP
383. nd shall be used when selecting the polices that shall be mapped to the specific ports e Application Type Intended use of the application types Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagge
384. nd transmission disable Disable LLDP rx Enable LLDP reception only tx Enable LLDP transmission only default Show LLDP mode Default Setting disable 458 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP LLDP Optional TLV Description Show or Set LLDP Optional TLVs Syntax LLDP Optional_TLV lt port_list gt port_descr sys_name sys_descr sys_capa mgmt_addr enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports port_descr Description of the port sysm_name System name sys_descr Description of the system sys_capa System capabilities mgmt_addr Master s IP address default Show optional TLV s configuration enable Enables TLV disable Disable TLV default Show optional TLV s configuration Default Setting Description of the port Enable System name Enable Description of the system Enable System capabilities Enable Master s IP address Enable LLDP Interval Description Set or show LLDP Tx interval Syntax LLDP Interval lt interval gt Parameters lt interval gt LLDP transmission interval 5 32768 Default Setting 30 459 LLDP Hold Description Set or show LLDP Tx hold value Syntax LLDP Hold lt hold gt Parameters lt hold gt LLDP hold value 2 10 Default Setting 3 LLDP Delay Description Set or show LLDP Tx delay Syntax LLDP Delay lt delay gt Parameters lt
385. ne with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table The Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MAC Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text no more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over 291 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry e VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry Buttons Auto refresh i Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh F E i Wi Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields cier J Flushes all dynamic entries Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt gt Updates the table s
386. network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology 4 14 2 LLDP Configuration This Page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings The LLDP Configuration screen in Figure 4 14 1 appears LLDP Configuration LLDP Parameters LLDP Port Configuration IS ENT Port mode CDP Aware Port Description System Name System Description System Capabilities Management Address lt All gt Oo Oo E E D Disabled Fil 7 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 1 2 2 4 5 6 dE E SS BAL SBESBESESBSBRBBBI Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled CCT ET Ea EEE a aC SSBSBS8S8S8S888 SBSBESBSBSBSBB888 S E 8 E El SSS Figure 4 14 1 LLDP Configuration Page Screenshot 295 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields LLDP Parameters Object Description e Tx Interval The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx
387. nfiguration Page Screenshot 200 The Page includes the following fields Object User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Description e Port Members Check the checkbox button in case you what to make any port member of the QCL entry By default all ports will be checked e Key Parameters Key configuration are discribed as below Tag Value of Tag field can be Any Untag or Tag VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1 4095 or Any user can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any SMAC Source MAC address 24 MS bits OUI or Any DMAC Type Destination MAC type possible values are unicast UC multicast MC broadcast BC or Any Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values 1 Any 2 Ethernet 3 LLC 4 SNAP 5 IPv4 6 IPv6 Note all frame types are explained below e Any Allow all types of frames e Ethernet Ethernet Type Valid ethernet type can have value within 0x600 OxFFFF or Any but excluding 0x800 IPv4 and 0x86DD IPv6 default value is Any e LLC SSAP Address Valid SSAP Source Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any DSAP Address Valid DSAP Destination Service Access Point can vary from 0x
388. ng disable Disable aging default Show current enabledness of aging Default Setting disable 414 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network Limit Agetime Description Time in seconds between check for activity on learned MAC addresses Syntax Security Network Limit Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt Time in seconds between checks for activity on a MAC address 10 10000000 seconds default Show current age time Default Setting 3600 Security Network Limit Port Description Set or show per port enabledness Syntax Security Network Limit Port lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port security on this port disable Disable port security on this port default Show current port enabledness of port security limit control Default Setting disable 415 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network Limit Limit Description Set or show the max number of MAC addresses that can be learned on this set of ports Syntax Security Network Limit Limit lt port_list gt lt limit gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt limit gt Max number of MAC addresses on this port default Show current limit Default Setting 4 Security Network Limit Action Description Set or show the action invol
389. ng of the classified QoS class DP level to PCP DEI values to PCP DEI Mapping when the mode is set to Mapped 191 Buttons Save Click to save changes User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel f cnca Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous Page 4 9 7 Port DSCP This Page allows you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports The Port DSCP screen in Figure 4 9 8 appears QoS Port DSCP Configuration ESA lt All gt Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable MMMM EN EN EA lt All gt Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Figure 4 9 8 QoS Port DSCP Configuration Page Screenshot 192 The Page includes the following fields User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Object Description e Port The Port coulmn shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and egress settings e Ingress In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for indivi
390. ng reliable switching technology and advanced networking features which optimize the installation and power management of network devices such as wireless access points AP Voice over IP VoIP phones and security video cameras The PoE capabilities also help to reduce deployment costs for network devices like the wireless AP as a result of freeing from restrictions of power outlet locations Power and data switching are integrated into one unit and delivered over a single cable It thus eliminates cost for additional AC wiring and reduces installation time 23 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 1 3 How to Use This Manual This User s Manual is structured as follows Section 2 INSTALLATION The section explains the functions of the Managed Switch and how to physically install the Managed Switch Section 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT The section contains the information about the software function of the Managed Switch Section 4 WEB CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Web interface Section 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The section describes how to use the Command Line interface CLI Section 6 CLI CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Command Line interface Section 7 SWITCH OPERATION The chapter explains how to does the switch operation of the Managed Switch Section 8 POWER OVER ETHERNET OVERVIEW The chapter introduce the IEEE 802 3af 802 3at PoE standard and PoE provision of the Ma
391. ng the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled e Port State The current state of the port It can undertake one of the following values Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled Link Down NAS is globally enabled but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a
392. nge with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using static entries into the MAC Table Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software 225 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone and only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide Overview of User Authentication It is allowed to configure the Managed Switch to authenticate users
393. nks can be assigned manually Port Trunk or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on the relevant links Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port Specifically the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non aggregated port including auto negotiation speed Duplex setting etc The device supports the following Aggregation links a Static LAGs Port Trunk Force aggregared selected ports to be a trunk group a Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LAGs LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them Link Aggregation 4 ports aggregate up to 4Gbps Figure 4 5 1 Link Aggregation 98 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network LACP operation requires full duplex mode more detail information refer to the IEEE 802 3ad standard Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Link aggregation lets you group up to 4 consecutive ports into a single dedic
394. nono rra rre 289 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status dci 291 4 13 3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table ca 292 4 13 4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table ooonooccccnocicinococcnononnncnnnoncnnnnncnnn nn nr rr nano nn rra n rre 293 A O 295 4 14 1 Link Layer Discovery ProtoGol c cooiciococi ii DEl 295 4 14 2 LL DP Comfigurationy Giniren pa a a e e a a a a i a a a eae an 295 414 3 LLDP MED Configuration suzi iein aip iio 298 4 14 4 LLDP MED Neighbor oococcccccccnconconncnccncc cnn 304 4 145 Neighbor ci ias 308 414 6 Poit StatiStics ii a rc 309 4 15 Network Diagnostics z iii dede 311 AAD A O een ahs deae a a eae 312 AND QI PNG PANG AEE hese hace a aac Shes tae sake head O luteus seed 313 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping TeS diia e ae deo tbea cds apeannabe dt taste a eaa iE EE 314 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 15 4 Cable Diagnostics vz iii DEE 315 4 16 Power over Ethernet cs eecccsseeeeeenseeeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeesnseaeeesaseeeeeesaseeceeseseceesaseeeeseseeneeseseenaneas 317 4 16 1 Power over Ethernet Powered Device 0 0 ececcceeeeteeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeaaeeeeceeeeeeesaeeeeseaeeeeeeeaeesnteeenenaeeeseeneeees 317 416 2 System Configura sisena a ii dit ba 319 ARTO Porto iol FAE E E E T secede ap usecedesishdessonesdecssteadenserseshapeidudcdeenssacdersocechtssneteniaeneares 322 416 4 POE AUS ii AAA ee E TA 324 416 5 PoE Sehed e e a a e a e ee E a had Moab deta tie He alee BA 325 4 16 6 LLDP PoE Neighbour ccccccec
395. nooping Port Statistics Screen Page Screenshot Rx NAK Rx Release Rx Inform Rx Lease Query Rx Lease Unassigned Rx Lease Unknown Rx Lease Active O 13 O 1 O 12 O 1 O e O E oO E o E o E o E o a oo 281 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Rxand Tx Discover The number of discover option 53 with value 1 packets received and transmitted e Rxand Tx Offer The number of offer option 53 with value 2 packets received and transmitted e Rxand Tx Request The number of request option 53 with value 3 packets received and transmitted e Rxand Tx Decline The number of decline option 53 with value 4 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx ACK The number of ACK option 53 with value 5 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx NAK The number of NAK option 53 with value 6 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Release The number of release option 53 with value 7 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Inform The number of inform option 53 with value 8 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Query The number of lease query option 53 with value 10 packets received and transmitted e Rxand Tx Lease The number of lease unassigned option 53 with value 11 packets received and Unassigned transmitted e Rxand Tx Lease The number of lease unknown option 53 with value 12 packets received and Unknow
396. nsmitted Received Received Received Received Router Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Figure 4 8 14 MLD Snooping Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version Working Querier Version currently e Host Version Working Host Version currently e Querier Status Shows the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE DISABLE denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled e Querier Transmitted The number of Transmitted Querier e Querier Received The number of Received Querier e V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports 173 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e V1 Leave Received The number of Received V1 Leaves e Router Port Display which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port e Port Switch port number e Status Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately _ clear J Clears all Statistics counters p 1 Auto refresh l i Automatic refresh
397. ntries ending at the last entry currently displayed Updates the system log entries starting from the last entry currently displayed La Updates the system log entries ending at the last available entry ID 4 2 12 Detailed Log The Managed Switch system detailed log information is provided here The Detailed Log screen in Figure 4 2 15 appears Detailed es aati male Information Message Level Info Time 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 09 00 00 Message Switch just made a cold boot Figure 4 2 15 Detailed Log Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Message The message of the system log entry Buttons Download Download the system log entry to the current entry ID Refresh Updates the system log entry to the current entry ID Lk lt Updates the system log entry to the first available entry ID Updates the system log entry to the previous available entry ID Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID La Updates the system log entry to the last available entry ID Print Print the system log entry to the current entry ID 67 4 2 13 Remote Syslog User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Configure remote syslog on this Page The Remote Syslog screen in Figure 4 2 16 appears The Page includes the following fields System Log Configuration Server Address Syslog Level Figure 4 2 16 Remote Syslog Page
398. nual of WGSW 20160HP 4 9 2 Port Policing This Page allows you to configure the Policer settings for all switch ports The Port Policing screen in Figure 4 9 1 appears QoS Ingress Port Policers Por Enabied Rate unit Flow Contra m1 F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 4 9 1 QoS Ingress Port Policers Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Enable Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port e Rate Controls the rate for the policer The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps or fps and it is restricted to 1 3300 when the Unit is Mbps or kfps e Unit Controls the unit of measure for the policer rate as kbps Mbps fps or kfps The default value is kbps e Flow Control If flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode then pause frames are sent instead of discarding frames 184 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 3 Port Classification This Page allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports The Port Classification screen in Figure 4 9 2 appears QoS Ingress Port Classification Port Qos Class DP Level
399. o acquire the resource Syntax QoS QCL refresh 489 6 15 Mirror Command Mirror Configuration Description Show mirror configuration Syntax Mirror Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Mirror Port Description Set or show the mirror port Syntax Mirror Port lt port gt disable Parameters lt port gt disable Mirror port or disable default Show port Default Setting disable 490 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Mirror Mode Description Set or show the mirror mode Syntax Mirror Mode lt port_cpu_list gt both disable rx tx Parameters lt port_cpu_list gt Port list or CPU or all default All ports and CPU both Enable Rx and Tx mirroring disable Disable Mirroring rx Enable Rx mirroring tx Enable Tx mirroring default Show mirror mode Default Setting disable 491 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 16 Configuration Command Configuration Save Description Save configuration to TFTP server Syntax Config Save lt ip_server gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ip_server gt TFTP server IP address a b c d lt file_name gt Configuration file name Configuration Load Description Load configuration from TFTP server Syntax Config Load lt ip_server gt lt file_name gt check Parameters lt ip_server gt TFTP server IP address a b c d lt file_n
400. o remove the Port 1 Port 6 from VLAN 1 membership since the Port 1 Port 6 had be assigned to VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 125 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Refresh lt lt gt gt Port Members A OI Delete wean ap vanmame 4 2 3 4 5 9 2 2 aol x2 x2 xelas 2el17 sehso 2o MIMI f Delete Figure 4 6 9 Add New VLAN Group assign VLAN Members for VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 and Remove Specify Ports from VLAN 1 Member aa gn It s import to remove the VLAN members from VLAN 1 configuration Or the ports would become overlap setting About the overlapped VLAN configuration see next VLAN configure sample Note 4 Assign PVID for each port Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 PVID 2 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 PVID 3 Port 7 Port 10 PVID 1 5 Enable VLAN Tag for specific ports Link Type Port 3 VLAN 2 and Port 6 VLAN 3 The Per Port VLAN configuration in Figure 4 6 10 appears ses me vee eo gara UnTag x Disable Disable Tagged v Disable Disable Disable Tagged Disable Disable UnTag y Disable UnTag Disable UnTag Disable UnTag Disable UnTag x Disable UnTag Disable UnTag Disable UnTag Disable UnTag y Disable UnTag Disable UnTag Disable UnTag y Disable UnTag Disable 00 nN OO k WN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
401. oF OM 24 511 PoE ON 29 at Pek ON gt Pur Ser 0 PoF Sawa 0 PoE Sawa 0 PoE Sera 0 PEDIA Loup Protection 0 PUE Storch RMON 2 POF Seance 0 PoE Search bre 25yyee 0 0 PoE Sara 191 1 180 3262 m Asto Reresh D Remesa Figure 4 16 1 Power over Ethernet Status 4 16 1 Power over Ethernet Powered Device Voice over IP phones Enterprise can install POE VolP Phone ATA and other Ethernet non Ethernet end devices to the central where UPS is installed for un interrupt power system and power control system 3 5 Watts Wireless LAN Access Points Museum Sightseeing Airport Hotel Campus Factory Warehouse can install the Access Point any where with no hesitation 6 12 Watts fom IP Surveillance y e bi 3 Enterprise Museum Campus Hospital Bank can install IP Camera without limits of install location no need electrician to install AC sockets 10 12 Watts 317 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP POE Splitter PoE Splitter split the PoE 52V DC over the Ethernet cable into 5 12V DC power output It frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power outlet locations which eliminate the costs for additional AC wiring and 3 12 Watts fect reduces the installation time High Power PoE Splitter High PoE Splitter split the PoE 52V DC over the Ethernet cable into 24 12V DC power output It frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power outlet locations which eliminate the cost
402. occurs every 3 seconds 4 8 12 MLD Group Information Entries in the MLD Group Table are shown on this Page The MLD Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table The MLD Groups Informatino screen in Figure 4 8 15 appears MLD Snooping Group Information Auto refresh C Refresh lt lt gt gt Start from VLAN 1 and group Address ff00 with 20 entries per page Port Members Ss vano crowns helali koaks No more entries Figure 4 8 15 MLD Snooping Groups Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group address of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group 174 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately e Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 8 13 MLDv2 Information Entries in the MLD SFM Information Table are shown on this Page The M
403. octets e Oversize The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets e Frag The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Jabb The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Coll The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment e Utilization The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval in hundredths of a percent Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds k Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 342 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 18 10 RMON Statistics Configuration Configure RMON Statistics table on this Page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 18 10 appears RMON Statistics Configuration Delete 10 bata Source Figure 4 18 10 RMON Statistics configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Data Source Indicates the port ID w
404. of WGSW 20160HP 4 7 7 MSTI Ports Configuration This Page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well A MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured and applicable for the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options This Page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports The aggregation settings are stack global The MSTI Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 9 amp Figure 4 7 10 appears MSTI Port Configuration Select MSTI MSTI Figure 4 7 9 MSTI Port Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields MSTI Port Configuration Object Description e Select MSTI Select the bridge instance and set more detail configuration 151 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP MST1 MSTI Port Configuration MSTI Aggregated Ports Configuration MSTI Normal Ports Configuration Port Path Cost y y y y y y y x y lv y y 010 Eo Ed Ed Ed Eo 1d a la Figure 4 7 10 MST1 MSTI Port Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields MSTx MSTI Port Configuration Object Description e Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST and MSTI port e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will
405. of WGSW 20160HP IP NTP Server Add Description Add NTP server entry Syntax IP NTP Server Add lt server_index gt lt ip_addr_string gt Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string IP NTP Server IPv6 Add Description Add NTP server IPv6 entry Syntax IP NTP Server Ipv6 Add lt server_index gt lt server_ipv6 gt Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP lt server_ipv6 gt IPv6 server address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 IP NTP Server Delete Description Delete NTP server entry Syntax IP NTP Server Delete lt server_index gt Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 365 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 3 Port Management Command Port Configuration Description Show port configuration Syntax Port Configuration lt port_list gt up down Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports up Show ports which are up down
406. ogic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated a Note 1 No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN tag unaware The Managed Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are 3 The Managed Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN As new VLAN is created the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID 1 This section has the following items VLAN Basic Information VLAN Port Configuration VLAN Memberships VLAN Membership Status VLAN Port Status Private VLAN Port Isolation MAC based VLAN MAC based VLAN Status IP Subnet based VLAN Protocol based VLAN Protocol based VLAN Membership Displaies VLAN information Enable VLAN group Configures the VLAN membership Display VLAN membership status Display VLAN port status Creates remov
407. old both Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or less than the falling threshold default Security Switch RMON Alarm Delete Description Delete RMON Alarm entry The entry index key is lt alarm_id gt Syntax Security Switch RMON Alarm Delete lt alarm_id gt Parameters lt alarm_id gt Alarm ID 1 65535 Security Switch RMON Alarm Lookup Description Show RMON Alarm entries Syntax Security Switch RMON Alarm Lookup lt alarm_id gt Parameters lt alarm_id gt Alarm ID 1 65535 411 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch RMON Event Add Description Add or modify RMON Event entry The entry index key is lt event_id gt Syntax Security Switch RMON Event Add lt event_id gt none log trap log_trap lt community gt lt description gt Parameters lt event_id gt Event ID 1 65535 none Get the sample directly log Get the sample directly trap Get the sample directly log_trap Calculate the difference between samples default lt community gt Specify the community when trap is sent the string lengh is 0 127 default public lt description gt The string for describing this event the string lengh is 0 127 default null string Security Switch RMON Event Delete Description Delete RMON Event entry The entry index key is lt event_id gt Syntax Security Switch RMON Event Delete lt event_id gt
408. om Control Index 0 and Sample Index 0 with 20 entries per page l J g History Sample Sample Broad Multi CRC Under Over Areces Start Drop Octets Pkts pace face a ES fice Frag Jabb Coll Utilization No more entries Figure 4 18 9 RMON History Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields 341 Object User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Description History Index Indicates the index of History control entry Sample Index Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry Sample Start The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Drops The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network e Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received e Broadcast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address e Multicast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address e CRCErrors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets e Undersize The total number of packets received that were less than 64
409. ommand Line Mode ciociciorioninanicnacanc nana 352 621 System Command ii 353 System Configuration soci A A aia 353 System Log Configuration cistitis 353 System V rsion A AA A tits 353 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP System Log Server Mode cio ies 354 SYSTEM NM reci 354 System COMA cas 355 system Log Server Address ui adn 355 System LIC A a ee 356 System Log Le Vela A nel dedi a eels 356 System MEZON O cionado ai dai 357 System Log LOOKUP si A tas 357 System LOG Clio iaa 358 System Reir 358 System Restore Det iii ias 358 NM a 358 AA E A 359 AR SA ees A ie ein eee ee ieee RE 359 IPG Pessoa ts do Mey 359 PSU sita A E E E aaron 360 IPPO tes mat nk raro da a edil aa ed ok o e dde tk el dida da Sh tah sie end Lts add de Mead ase iO cd 360 PONS ias 361 IP DNS Pro Y vicio eae eee lige ab E T E E E A oo See seeds 361 IPVO AWTOGINE IG iisnsss soc asso ch ee eee sete do e seco e ela e oe A Sa e ee as Gane 362 IPVO SOtU EAE EEE as esha hspucedected Mites ASA IA tra 362 AS A ae a ee ee es 363 POP A A esata A ee ee al ee eee eh ek Re ei dl 363 IN HH 5187910 1 UL e 1 110 PAPER OP OAOOOO 5 0 0 0OA PPP aake aaea a dose aeoaea eink aeaa dhoii 364 IE NT PMOd ee ov 0002 coto coto dis soso cade dde ber eth a od Beeld 182 a dl ado od nd dde e da tl thd 364 IP NT PServer Ai died 365 IP NTP Server EAT SA o EE A E a e e ee 365 IP NTP Server Delete oir IDE 365 6 3 Port Management CoOMMANd nncnncinninninnonnnncc ennn nnnnn ennnen nennen
410. on Set or show TACACS authentication server setup Syntax Security AAA TACACS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show TACACS authentication server configuration enable Enable TACACS authentication server disable Disable TACACS authentication server default Show TACACS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external authentication server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server TCP port Use 0 to use the default TACACS port 49 439 Security AAA Statistics Description Show RADIUS statistics Syntax Security AAA Statistics lt server_index gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show statistics for all servers 440 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 8 Spanning Tree Protocol Command STP Configuration Description Show STP Bridge configuration Syntax STP Configuration STP Version Description Set or show the STP Bridge protocol version Syntax STP Version lt stp_version gt Parameters lt stp_version gt mstp rstp stp Default Setting MSTP 441 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP STP Tx Hold Description Set or show the STP Bridge
411. on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another It is known as a connection oriented protocol which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the other end Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web WWW e mail and File Transfer Protocol FTP TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network To start a Telnet session the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password Then the client user can enter commands through the Telnet program just as if they were entering commands directly on the server console TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP and provides file writing and reading but it does not provides directory service and security features ToS is an acronym for Type of Service It is implemented as the IPv4 ToS priority control It is full
412. on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port e Limit The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The stackswitch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses e Action If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action 271 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Trap If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent everytime the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will re
413. once in the Access Accept packet The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil the following requirements if Tag 0 is used the Tunnel Private Group ID does not need to include a Tag Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 Value of Tunnel Type must be set to VLAN ordinal 13 Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading 0 s are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 e Guest VLAN Enabled When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes i e e Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs VLAN Membership and VLAN Port Pages These Pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Operation When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting 238 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile the switch considers enteri
414. onfiguration 12345678 at this case 1 Configure the IP Address of remote RADIUS server and secret key Authentication Server Configuration Common Server Configuration Timeout ame seconds seconds Dead Time Time RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration 192 168 0 253 290000000 Figure 4 11 10 RADIUS Server Configuration Screenshot 261 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 2 Add New RADIUS Cleint on the Windows 2003 server P1nternet Authentication Service File Action View Help e Om 6108 18 gt Internet Authentication Service Local RADIUS Clients E CATest 192 168 0 5 RADIUS mm Remote Acce New RADIUS Client Y Remote Acce 3 Connection R New View Refresh Export List Help Figure 4 11 11 Windows Server Add New RADIUS Client Setting 3 Assign the client IP address to the Managed Switch New RADIUS Client Xx Name and Address Type a friendly name and either an IP Address or DNS name for the client Friendly name 202 1 x Managed Switch Client address IP or DNS f 92 168 0 100 Verify lt Back Cancel Figure 4 11 12 Windows Server RADIUS Server Setting 262 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 The shared secret key should be as same as the key configured on the Managed Switch New RADIUS Client RADIUS Standard 7 Figure 4 11 13 Windows Server RADIUS Server
415. onfiguration Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TCP UDP Port Number Figure 4 5 2 Aggregation Mode Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Source MAC Address The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled e Destination MAC The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for Address the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled e IP Address The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled e TCP UDP Port Number The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled Static Aggregation Group Configuration The Aggregation Group Configuration screen in Figure 4 5 3 appears 100 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Aggregation Group Configuration ro T co 121371515719 heene Normal 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 O A A A AAA AAA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o Figure
416. onfiguration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Desc Indicates this event the string length is from 0 to 127 default is a null string e Type Indicates the notification of the event the possible types are E none The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters log The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol snmptrap The number of broad cast and multi cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol E logandirap The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal e Community Specify the community when trap is sent the string length is from 0 to 127 default is public e Event Last Time Buttons Indicates the value of sysUpTime at the time this event entry last generated an event Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 18 5 RMON Event Detail This Page provides an overview of RMON event entries screen in Figure 4 18 5 appears 337 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Detailed RMON Event ID Y Auto refresh C LogTime 0 LogDescription D Figure 4 18 5 Detailed RMON Event ID P
417. onsole interface 348 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Configure IP Address The Managed Switch is shipped with default IP address as following IP Address 192 168 0 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 To check the current IP address or modify a new IP address for the Managed Switch please use the procedures as follow E Show the current IP address 1 On WGSW 20160HP gt prompt enter show ip 2 The screen displays the current IP address Subnet Mask and Gateway As show in Figure 5 2 Username admin Password Login in progr WosH 20160HP show 10 IP Configuration DHCP Client Disabled TP Address 192 168 060 160 IP Mask 299 299 299 0 IP Router 192 168 0 1 DNS Server 0 0 0 0 VLAN ID mo DNS Proxy Disabled IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabl IPv6 Link Local Address Fe80 350 Afff fe00 1 TPu6 Address 192 168 0 100 IPv6 Prefix 96 IPv6 Router Active cont neon for IPv6 Static with Hatata Pv6 fiddress 230 4PFf fe00 1 64 Scope Status UP RUNNTNG Enabled ATU 1568 LinkMTU is 1500 IPv6 Address 192 168 0 180 96 Scope Global Status UP RUNNING Enabled MTU 1500 LinkMIU is 1500 HGSH 20160HP gt Figure 5 2 Show IP Information Screen a Configure IP address 3 On WGSW 20160HP gt prompt enter the following command and press lt Enter gt As show in Figure 5 3 WGSW 20160HP IP gt setup 192 168 1 100 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 The previous command would ap
418. ontain at least one alphabet MVR VLAN name can be edited for the existing MVR VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries e Mode Specify the MVR mode of operation In Dynamic mode MVR allows dynamic MVR membership reports on source ports In Compatible mode MVR membership reports are forbidden on source ports The default is Dynamic mode e Tagging Specify whether the traversed IGMP MLD control frames will be sent as Untagged or Tagged with MVR VID The default is Tagged e Priority Specify how the traversed IGMP MLD control frames will be sent in prioritized manner The default Priority is 0 e LLQI Define the maximun time to wait for IGMP MLD report memberships on a receiver port before removing the port from multicast group membership The value is in units of tenths of a seconds The range is from 0 to 31744 The default LLQI is 5 tenths or one half second e Interface Channel When the MVR VLAN is created click the Edit symbol to expand the Setting corresponding multicast channel settings for the specific MVR VLAN Summary about the Interface Channel Setting of the MVR VLAN will be shown besides the Edit symbol e Port The logical port for the settings e Port Role Configure an MVR port of the designated MVR VLAN as one of the following roles E Inactive The designated port does not participate MVR operations E Source Configure uplink ports that receive and send multicast
419. or all default All ports PVLAN Delete Description Delete Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Delete lt pvlan_id gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID The allowed range for a Private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range 384 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP PVLAN Lookup Description Lookup Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Lookup lt pvlan_id gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID default Show all PVLANs The allowed range for a Private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range PVLAN Isolate Description Set or show the port isolation mode Syntax PVLAN Isolate lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port isolation disable Disable port isolation default Show port isolation port list Default Setting disable 385 6 7 Security Command Security Switch User Configuration Description Show users configuration Syntax Security Switch Users Configuration Default Setting User Name Privilege admin 15 Security Switch User Add Description Add or modify users entry Syntax Security Switch Users Add lt user_name gt lt password gt lt privilege_level gt User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Parameters lt user_name gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed str
420. or the port Syntax QoS DSCP Classification Mode lt dscp_list gt enable disable Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 list or all enable Enable DSCP ingress classification disable Disable DSCP ingress classification default Show DSCP classification mode Default Setting disable QoS DSCP Classification MAP Description Set or show DSCP ingress classification table This table is used to map DSCP from QoS class and DP level The DSCP which needs to be classified depends on port DSCP classification and DSCP classification mode Incoming frame DSCP may be translated beforeusing the value for classification Syntax QoS DSCP Classification Map lt class_list gt lt dpl_list gt lt dscp gt Parameters lt class_list gt QoS class list or all default All QoS classes 0 7 lt dpl_list gt DP level list or all default All DP levels 0 1 lt dscp gt Mapped DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 Default Setting disable 484 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QoS DSCP EgressRemap Description Set or show DSCP egress remap table This table is used if the port egress remarking mode is remap and the purpose is to map the classified DSCP to a new DSCP value Syntax QoS DSCP EgressRemap lt dscp_list gt lt dpl_list gt lt dscp gt Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 list or all lt dscp gt Egress remapped DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43
421. ored to this port Disabled disables mirroring e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Mode Select mirror mode Rx only Frames received at this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames transmitted are not mirrored 96 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Tx only Frames transmitted from this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames received are not mirrored Disabled Neither frames transmitted or frames received are mirrored Both Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored to the mirror port ES For a given port a frame is only transmitted once It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on _ Not the mirror port Because of this mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only ote Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 97 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 5 Link Aggregation Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups LAGs Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices increases port flexibility and provides link redundancy Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed set to full duplex operations Ports in a LAG can be of different media types UTP Fiber or different fiber types provided they operate at the same speed Aggregated Li
422. ority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 10 frame It is also known as User Priority PD is an acronym for Powered Device In a PoE gt system the power is delivered from a PSE power sourcing equipment to a remote device The remote device is called a PD PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implement the Ethernet physical layer IEEE 802 3 546 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packets The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames It is located in front of the ingress queue POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3 It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it However some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time POP can be thought of as a
423. ork it connected If found and the destination address is located at different port from this packet comes in the Managed Switch will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from address table But if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet comes in then this packet will be filtered Thereby increasing the network throughput and availability 7 4 Store and Forward Store and Forward is one type of packet forwarding techniques A Store and Forward Managed Switch stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer do the complete error checking before transmission Therefore no error packets occurrence it is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability The Managed Switch scans the destination address from the packet header searches the routing table pro vided for the incoming port and forwards the packet only if required The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network thereby increasing throughput and availability How ever the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs which nearly always improves overall performance An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to signifi cantly boost bandwidth using conventional cabling and adapters Due to the learning function of the Managed Switch the source address and corresponding port number of each in
424. ort a Auto Select Auto to have the Managed Switch automatically uses the port as IGMP Router port if the port receives IGMP query packets E Fix The Managed Switch always uses the specified port as an IGMP Router port Use this mode when you connect an IGMP multicast server or IP camera which applied with multicast protocol to the port E None The Managed Switch will not use the specified port as an IGMP Router port The Managed Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port Use this mode when you connect other IGMP multicast servers directly on the non querier Managed Switch and don t want the multicast stream be flood to uplink switch throught the port that connected to the IGMP querier e Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port e Throtting Buttons Save Click to save changes Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 161 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 8 3 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user
425. ort_list gt lt bit_rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Queue list or all default All queues 0 7 lt bit_rate gt Rate in kilo bits per second 100 13200000 Default Setting 500kbps QoS Port QueueShaper Mode Description Set or show the port QueueShaper mode Syntax QoS Port QueueShaper Mode lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Queue list or all default All queues 0 7 enable Enable port QueueShaper disable Disable port QueueShaper default Show port policer mode Default Setting disable 477 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QoS Port QueueShaper Rate Description Set or show the port QueueShaper rate Syntax QoS Port QueueShaper Rate lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt lt bit_rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Queue list or all default All queues 0 7 lt rate gt Rate in kbps or fps 100 13200000 Default Setting 500 QoS Port QueueShaper Excess Description Set or show the port queue excess bandwidth mode Syntax QoS Port QueueShaper Excess lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Queue list or a
426. orts trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message default Show flow DHCP snooping port mode Default Setting trusted Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics Description Show or clear DHCP snooping statistics Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear DHCP snooping statistic 432 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration Description Show IP source guard configuration Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration Security Network IP Source Guard Mode Description Set or show IP source guard mode Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable IP Source Guard disable Disable IP Source Guard Default Setting disable Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode Description Set or show the IP Source Guard port mode Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters enable Enable IP Source Guard port mode disable Disable IP Source Guard port mode Default Setting disable 433 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network IP Source Guard Limit Description Set or show the IP
427. otocol It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol for network management SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network management architecture It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems SNTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer Stack Protocol using ROUting Technology An advanced protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology changes within a stack as well as election of a master switch SPROUT also calculates parameters for setting up each switch to perform shortest path forwarding within the stack Service Set Identifier is a name used to identify the particular 802 11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach A client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs and can choose one to connect to based on pre configuration or by displaying a list of SSIDs in range and asking the user to select one wikipedia SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel between two networked devices The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier
428. ource value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears Range If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears e TCP UDP Source No When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value e TCP UDP Source Range When Range is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value 219 e TCP UDP Destination Filter User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Specify the TCP UDP destination filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP destination filter is specified TCP UDP destination filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears Range If you want to filter a specific range TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears e TCP UDP Destination Number When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can ente
429. ow IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 16 31 Type Response Time Checksum Group Address all zeros if this is a query The IGMP Type codes are shown below ype Meg Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is 0x11 Present Membership Report version 2 Leave a Group version 2 Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN an explicit leave 158 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP message and query messages that are specific to a
430. ower Show the total watts usage of Managed PoE Switch Consumption e Total Power Reserved Shows how much the total power be reserved for all PDs e Temperature 1 Display the current operating temperature of first PoE chip unit e Temperature 2 Display the current operating temperature of second PoE chip unit e Local Port This is the logical port number for this row e PD Class Display the class of the PD attached to the port as established by the classification process Class 0 is the default for PDs The PD is powered based on PoE Class level if system working on Classification mode A PD shall return Class 0 to 4 in accordance with the maximum power draw as specified by Table 4 16 1 324 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e Power Used W The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using e Current Used mA The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using e Priority The Priority shows the port s priority configured by the user e Port Status The Port Status shows the port s status e AF AT Mode Display per PoE port operate at 802 3af or 802 3at mode e Total Show the total power and current usage of all PDs Buttons Auto refresh d i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 16 5 PoE Schedule This page allows the user to define PoE schedule The screen in Figure 4 16 5 appears
431. p IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC flooding disable Disable IPMC flooding default Show global IPMC flooding mode Default Setting disable IPMC Leave Proxy Description Set or show the mode of IPMC Leave Proxy Syntax IPMC Leave Proxy mld igmp enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC Leave Proxy disable Disable IPMC Leave Proxy default Show global IPMC Leave Proxy mode Default Setting disable 510 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IPMC Proxy Description Set or show the mode of IPMC Proxy Syntax IPMC Proxy mld igmp enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC Proxy disable Disable IPMC Proxy default Show global IPMC Proxy mode Default Setting disable IPMC SSM Description Set or show the IPMC SSM Range Syntax IPMC SSM mldligmp Range lt prefix gt lt mask_len gt Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP range SSM Range keyword lt prefix gt IPv4 IPv6 multicast group address accordingly lt mask_len gt Mask length for IPv4 4 32 IPv6 8 128 ssm range accordingly 511 IPMC VLAN Add Description Add the IPMC snooping VLAN interface Syntax IPMC VLAN Add mld igmp lt vid gt Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp
432. p_flags gt udp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip_flags gt tcp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip_flags gt lt tcp_flags gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_redirect gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 512 default Next available ID lt ace_id_next gt Next ACE ID 1 512 default Add ACE last port Port ACE keyword lt port gt Port number or all policy Policy ACE keyword 425 lt policy gt User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Policy number 0 255 lt policy_bitmask gt Policy number bitmask 0x0 OxFF lt vid gt lt tag_prio gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt lt smac gt lt dmac gt arp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt arp_opcode gt lt arp_flags gt ip lt protocol gt lt ip_flags gt icmp lt icmp_type gt lt icmp_code gt udp lt sport gt lt dport gt tcp lt tcp_flags gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_redirect gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any VLAN tag priority 0 7 or any DMAC type any unicast multicast broadcast Ethernet Type keyword Ethernet Type 0x600 OxFFFF or any but excluding 0x800 IPv4 0x806 ARP and 0x86DD IPv6 Source MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XXXXXXXXXXXX X is a hexadecimal digit or any Destination
433. pgrade TFTP Server IP Firmware File Name Figure 4 2 20 TFTP Firmware Update Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e TFTP Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address e Firmware File Name The name of firmware image Maximum length 24 characters Buttons Upgrade Click to upgrade firmware DO NOT Power OFF the Managed Switch until the update progress is complete Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade Page without press the OK button after the image be gn loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade processes again 4 2 17 Configuration Backup This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The Configuration Backup screen in Figure 4 2 21 appears 71 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Configuration Save Save configuration Save configuration except IP Address Figure 4 2 21 Configuration Save Page Screenshot You can save view or load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags Header tags lt xml version 1 0 gt and lt configuration gt These tags are mandatory and must be present at the beginning of the file Section tags lt platform gt lt global gt and lt switch gt The platform section must be the first section tag and this section must include
434. ply the follow settings for the Managed Switch IP Address 192 168 1 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 1 1 349 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Username admin Password Login in progress WGSH 20160HP gt show ip IP Configuration DHCP Client Disabled 192 168 6 168 295 255 255 8 192 168 0 1 0 0 0 0 ab DNS Proxy Disabled IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled IPv Link Local Address fe80 230 4fff fe00 1 192 168 0 100 IPv6 Router fictive Configuration for IPv6 Static with Stateless IPv6 Address fe80 2 230 4fff fe00 1 64 Scope Link Status UP RUNNING Enabled MTU 1500 LinkMTU is 1500 IPv6 Address 192 168 0 100 96 Scope Global Status UP RUNNING Enabled MTU 1580 LinkMTU is 1500 WGSW 26166HP gt ip Type up or e a E e gt a LO HGSH 20160HP 71P gt setup 192 168 1 100 255 255 za 0 192 168 1 1 HGSH 20160HP Figure 5 3 Set IP Address Screen 4 Repeat Step 1 to check if the IP address is changed If the IP is successfully configured the Managed Switch will apply the new IP address setting immediately You can access the Web interface of Managed Switch through the new IP address ga If you do not familiar with console command or the related parameter enter help anytime in Note console to get the help description You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can r
435. port list check the box as shown lx To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked as shown LI By default no ports are members and for every new VLAN entry all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New VLAN Click Add New VLAN to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled when you click on Save The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs 116 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Buttons Add New VLAN Click to add new VLAN Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN ID input fields Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 6 6 VLAN Membership Status This Page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users The VLAN Membership Status screen in Figure 4 6 4 appears VLAN Membership Status for Combined Users Combined x Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page lt lt gt gt Port Members A A pa eo PAA APAA A AA A AAAA AAAA Auto refresh Figure 4 6 4 VLAN Membership Status for Stat
436. port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the Page header Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port e Mode Select LLDP mode Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information 296 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP from neighbor units is analyzed Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors e CDP Aware Select CDP awareness The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames The switch doesn t transmit CDP frames CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbours table are decoded All other TLVs are discarded Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbours table as shown below CDP TLV Device ID is mapped to the LLDP Chassis ID field CDP TLV Address is mapped to the LLDP Management Address field The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbours table CDP TLV Port ID is mapped to the LLDP Po
437. powered exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver In this mode the port power is not turned on if the PD requests more power the available E Consumption mode In this mode the ports are shut down when the actual power consumption for all ports exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver or if the actual power consumption for a given port exceeds the reserved power for that port The ports are shut down according to the ports priority If two ports have the same priority the port with the highest port number is shut down E Priority mode In this mode the user assign the priority to the ports PD When the total POE power consumption request is over the allowed power supply limitation the system shut down PoE ports by port priority setting Power Over Ethernet Configuration This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE configuration settings screen in Figure 4 16 2 appears Power Over Ethernet Configuration System PoE Admin Mode Enable PoE Temperature Protection Enable PoE Management Mode Consumption Power Supply Budget W 230 Temperature Threshold 70 Degree C PoE Usage Threshold 85 Figure 4 16 2 PoE Configuration Screenshot 320 The page includes the following fields Object User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Description e System PoE Admin Mode Allows user enable or disable PoE function It will causes all of PoE ports suppl
438. pply for a given port The set of policies is selected by checkmarking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 14 4 LLDP MED Neighbor This Page provides a status overview for all LLDP MED neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP MED Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4 14 3 appears The columns hold the following information LLDP MED Neighbour Information Port 1 Device Type Capabilities Endpoint Class Ill LLDP MED Capabilities Network Policy Extended Power via MDI PD Inventory 46 Voice Defined Untagged Voice Signaling Defined Untagged 32 Auto negotiation ae Auto negotiation Capabilities MAU Type 1000BASE T half duplex mode 1000BASE X LX SX CX 100BaseTXFD 2 pair category 5 Supported Enabled full duplex mode Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE for UTP full du ie TES y full duplex inks Symmetric PAUSE for full duplex links P Auto negotiation Figure 4 14 3 LLDP MED Neighbor Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Object Description e Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Device Type LLDP MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLD
439. ption Show Voice VLAN configuration Syntax Voice VLAN Configuration Voice VLAN Mode Description Set or show the Voice VLAN mode We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN lt can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Syntax Voice VLAN Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable Voice VLAN mode disable Disable Voice VLAN mode default Show flow Voice VLAN mode Default Setting disable 501 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Voice VLAN ID Description Set or show Voice VLAN ID Syntax Voice VLAN ID lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Default Setting 1000 Voice VLAN Agetime Description Set or show Voice VLAN age time Syntax Voice VLAN Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt MAC address age time 10 10000000 default Show age time Default Setting 86400sec Voice VLAN Traffic Class Description Set or show Voice VLAN ID Syntax Voice VLAN Traffic Class lt class gt Parameters lt class gt Traffic class 0 7 Default Setting 7 502 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Voice VLAN OUI Add Description Add Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process The maximum entry number is 16 Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Add lt oui_addr gt lt description gt Parameters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx The null OUI address isn
440. r Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application 4 10 1 Access Control List Status This Page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of ACEs is 512 on each switch The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4 10 1 appears ACL Status Ingress Port Fr
441. r a specific TCP UDP destination value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value e TCP UDP Destination Range When Range is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value e TCP FIN Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP SYN Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP RST Specify the TCP Reset the connection RST value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP PSH Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry
442. r different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Note Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration Page and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down but not considered dead Now if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel on going backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forever Therefore the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant s EA
443. r each specific port property ACL Rate Limiters Under this Page you can configure the rate limiters There can be 15 different rate limiters each 537 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP ranging from 1 1024K packets per seconds Under Ports and Access Control List web Pages you can assign a Rate Limiter ID to the ACE s or ingress port s AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard The encryption key protocol is applied in 802 1i standard to improve WLAN security It is an encryption standard by the U S government which will replace DES and 3DES AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128 192 or 256 bits AMS is an acronym for Auto Media Select AMS is used for dual media ports ports supporting both copper cu and fiber SFP cables AMS automatically determines if a SFP or a CU cable is inserted and switches to the corresponding media If both SFP and cu cables are inserted the port will select the prefered media APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching This protocol is used to secure that switching is done bidirectional in the two ends of a protection group as defined in G 8031 Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability Also Port Aggregation Link Aggregation ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical a
444. r gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XXXXXXXXXXXX X is a hexadecimal digit lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 371 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP MAC Lookup Description Lookup MAC address entry Syntax MAC Lookup lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XXXXXXXXXXXX X is a hexadecimal digit lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 MAC Age Time Description Set or show the MAC address age timer Syntax MAC Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt MAC address age time 0 10 1000000 O disable default Show age time Default Setting 300 372 MAC Learning Description Set or show the port learn mode Syntax MAC Learning lt port_list gt auto disable secure Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Automatic learning disable Disable learning secure Secure learning default Show learn mode Default Setting Auto MAC Dump Description Show sorted list of MAC address entries Syntax MAC Dump lt mac_max gt lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP lt mac_max gt Maximum number of MAC addresses 1 8192 default Show all addresses lt mac_addr gt First MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XXXXXXXXXXXX X is a hexadecimal digit
445. r to chapter 4 9 5 1 e QO Q7 Shows disabled or actual queue shaper rate e g 800 Mbps e Port Shows disabled or actual port shaper rate e g 800 Mbps 188 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 9 5 1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers The Port Scheduler and Shapers for a specific port are configured on this Page The QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shaper sscreen in Figure 4 9 5 appears Queue Shaper O The Page includes the following fields Porttl QoS Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers Port 1 Scheduler Mode t enable rote umit Figure 4 9 5 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers Page Screenshot Object Description e Schedule Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port e Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port e Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 3300 when the Unit is Mbps e Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps e Queue Shaper Excess Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth e Queue Scheduler Weight Controls the weight for this queue The default value
446. r_list gt lt rate gt Parameters lt rate_limiter_list gt Rate limiter list 1 16 default All rate limiters lt rate gt Rate in pps 0 131071 Default Setting 1 Security Network ACL Add Description Add or modify Access Control Entry ACE If the ACE ID parameter lt ace_id gt is specified and an entry with this ACE ID already exists the ACE will be modified Otherwise a new ACE will be added If the ACE ID is not specified the next available ACE ID will be used If the next ACE ID parameter lt ace_id_next gt is specified the ACE will be placed before this ACE in the list If the next ACE ID is not specified the ACE will be placed last in the list If the Switch keyword is used the rule applies to all ports If the Port keyword is used the rule applies to the specified port only If the Policy keyword is used the rule applies to all ports configured with the specified policy The default is that the rule applies to all ports Syntax Security Network ACL Add lt ace_id gt lt ace_id_next gt port lt port gt policy lt policy gt lt policy_bitmask gt lt vid gt lt tag_prio gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt lt smac gt lt dmac gt arp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt smac gt lt arp_opcode gt lt arp_flags gt ip lt sip gt lt dip gt lt protocol gt lt ip_flags gt icmp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt icmp_type gt lt icmp_code gt lt i
447. rames received with valid CRC e Rx Oversize The number of long frames received with valid CRC e Rx Fragments The number of short frames received with invalid CRC e Rx Jabber The number of long frames received with invalid CRC e Rx Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port ES 1 Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes pen 2 Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port Note 93 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Transmit Error Counters Object Description e Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion e Tx Late Exc Coll The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately clear Clears the counters for all ports Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals 4 4 4 SFP Information You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP Module Information Page This Page shows the operational status such as the transceiver type speed and wavelength and supports distance of SFP module on a specific interface You can also use the hyperlink of port no to check
448. re 215 ARP Parameters User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type ARP is selected Object Description e ARP RARP Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care ARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to ARP RARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to RARP Other Frame has unknown ARP RARP Opcode flag e Request Reply Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care Request Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set Reply Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag e Sender IP Filter Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE Any No sender IP filter is specified Sender IP filter is don t care Host Sender IP filter is set to Host Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Sender IP filter is set to Network Specify the sender IP address and sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear e Sender IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation e Sender IP Mask When Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation e Target IP Filter Speci
449. re hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range e Leave Proxy Enable Enable MLD Leave Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side 169 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Proxy Enable Enable MLD Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port The allowed selection is Auto Fix Fone default compatibility value is Auto Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port Throtting Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset_ Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 9 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the
450. ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply Round Trip radiusAccClientExtRo Time undTripTime Buttons User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Response and the Request that matched it from the RADIUS accounting server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Click to refresh the Page immediately Refresh i i Clears the counters for the selected server The Pending Requests counter will not be cleared by this operation 260 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 11 9 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration Setup the RADIUS server and assign the client IP address to the Managed switch In this case field in the default IP Address of the Managed Switch with 192 168 0 100 And also make sure the shared secret key is as same as the one you had set at the Managed Switch s 802 1x system c
451. ress is converted to a string on the following form XX XX XX XX XX XX that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using the Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over port based 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients 236 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security L
452. ries present O O Currently no entries present Add New Entry Figure 4 6 17 The Page includes the following fields Object MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Page Screenshot Description e Delete To delete a MAC based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry will be deleted in the stack e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC based VLAN entry To include a port in a MAC based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the MAC based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New MAC based VLAN Click Add New Entry to add a new MAC based VLAN entry An empty row is added to the table and the MAC based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any unicast MAC address can be configured for the MAC based VLAN entry No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 130 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The MAC based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on Save A MAC based VLAN without any port members will be deleted when you click Save The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new MAC based VLANs Buttons New Enty Click to add a new MAC based VLAN entry 4 6 12 MAC based VLAN
453. riority A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address such as an Ethernet address RARP is the complement of ARP 548 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP RADIUS is an acronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service It is a networking protocol that provides centralized access authorization and accounting management for people or computers to connect and use a network service RDI is an acronym for Remote Defect Indication It is a OAM functionallity that is used by a MEP to indicate defect detected to the remote peer MEP A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads switch towards the Layer 3 multicast device In 1998 the IEEE with document 802 1w introduced an evolution of STP the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change Standard IEEE 802 1D 2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP while at the same time being backwards compatible with STP Samba is a program running under UNIX like operating systems that provides seamless integration between UNIX and Microsoft Windows machines Samba acts as file and print servers for Microsoft Windows IBM OS 2 and other SMB client machines Samba uses the Server Message Block SMB protocol and Common Internet File System CIFS which is the underlyin
454. rity Switch SNMP Access Delete oooooooccinocccnnocccccononcnonononcnnnnnncnnnno nn n crono cnn ran nn nn nr rra 407 Security Switch SNMP Access LOO0kUD ooooocccococconoccccnononcnnnonncnnnnncnnnno nn nr nnnn nn rn nn rre 408 Security Switch RMON Statistics AQ U ooooocccononccnnococcnononcnononocnnn corn ccnnnonn nn nono nn rra nn rra rr rr rn 408 Security Switch RMON Statistics Delete oooonooinnccnnnnociccnonocinononcccnnnannncnnnn cnn rnnrn nn nro nr rr narrar nr 408 Security Switch RMON Statistics LOOKUP ooooooonnnccccnonocccononocnnononcccnnnoncnn nono cnn rnnrn cnn nan r rr rare 409 Security Switch RMON History Add eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeceeeaeeeseeeeeeesaeeeseeaaeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeseaaeeeseneaeesieeeesenaeeeeseeaeees 409 Security Switch RMON History Delete eee ee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeseneeeeesneeesenaeeeseenaeees 409 Security Switch RMON History LOOKUP ooococococccccoccccnononononono nono non conan nn nn nono nn nr AAE nn nan rr rre 410 Security Switch RMON Alarm Add oocconoccccconoccnononcccnononononnnno cnn noo n cnn non n cnn rre rre rre rre 410 Security Switch RMON Alarm Delete niecim tiei ipi EE A e ia Veia 411 Security Switch RMON Alarm Lookup oooooocccococccononoccnononcncnononcnnnnnnnnnnno nn rr nan nn r arnes 411 Security Switch RMON Event Add ooccoococccccoconccononononononcnc nono cnn rnonn nn canon nr rnnnn nn ran n rre rre 412 Security Switch RMON Event Delete cccccec
455. rlogin TELNET and rsh protocols which did not provide strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality Wikipedia SSM In SyncE this is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status Message and is containing a QL indication Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer 2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN The original STP protocol is now obsoleted by RSTP SyncE Is an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet This functionality is used to make a network clock frequency synchronized Not to be confused with real time clock synchronized IEEE 1588 550 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP TACACS is an acronym for Terminal Acess Controller Access Control System Plus lt is a networking protocol which provides access control for routers network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services Tag Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications for example Web server and e mail server running on the same host The applications
456. rom 33 to 126 e Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially SET new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new access entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 88 4 4 Port Management User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s ports This section has the following items Port Configuration Port Statistics Overview Port Statistics Detail SFP Module Information Port Mirror 4 4 1 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics Display SFP information Sets the source and target ports for mirroring This Page displays current port configurations Ports can also be configured here The Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 4 1 appears pont Port Description oman Donker UN NP A gt Fs FE 90 ON TDW F amp F WH DO Port Configuration lt All gt Discard lt All gt Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Discard Discard Discard Discard
457. roup Mapping Table Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e VCE ID Indicates the index of the entry It is user configurable It s value ranges from 0 256 If a VCE ID is 0 application will auto generate the VCE ID for that entry Deletion and lookup of IP subnet based VLAN are based on VCE ID e IP Address Indicates the IP address e Mask Length Indicates the network mask length e VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID VLAN ID can be changed for the existing entries e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet based VLAN entry To include a port in a IP subnet based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the IP subnet based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New IP Click Add New Entry to add a new IP subnet based VLAN entry An empty row subnet based VLAN is added to the table and the IP subnet based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any IP address mask can be configured for the IP subnet based VLAN entry Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The IP subnet based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on Save The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new IP subnet based VLANs
458. rrect misleading or incomplete we would appreciate your comments and suggestions FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy ana if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at whose own expense CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Energy Saving Note of the Device This power required device does not support Standby mode operation For energy saving please remove the power cable to disconnect the device from the power circuit Without removing power cable the device will still consuming power from the power source In the view of Saving the Energy and reduce the unnecessary power consuming it is strongly suggested to remove the power connection for the device if this device is not intended to be active WEEE Warning To avoid the potential effe
459. rrored to the mirror port MLD is an acronym for Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6 MLD is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link much as IGMP is used in IPv4 The protocol is embedded in ICMPV6 instead of using a separate protocol Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol for Layer 2 IP networks that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with subscriber VLANs The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network instead the stream s are received on the MVR VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it them Wikipedia NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected source A client connects to the NAS and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client s supplied credentials are valid Based on the answer the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource An example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802 1X NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input Output System It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network LAN and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network WAN The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name provides the session and
460. rt ID field CDP TLV Version and Platform is mapped to the LLDP System Description field Both the CDP and LLDP support system capabilities but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP These capabilities are shown as others in the LLDP neighbours table If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbour devices If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch Note When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn t removed immediately but gets removed when the hold time is exceeded e Port Description Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted e System Name Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted e System Description Optional TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted e System Capabilites Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted e Management Address Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted 297 Buttons Save Click to save changes User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 14 3 LLDP MED Configuration Th
461. rvers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls There are 3 web Pages associated with the manual ACL configuration ACL Access Control List The web Page shows the ACEs in a prioritized way highest top to lowest bottom Default the table is empty An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs The first matching ACE will take action permit deny on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented An ACE can be associated with a Policy 1 ingress port or any ingress port the whole switch If an ACE Policy is created then that Policy can be associated with a group of ports under the Ports web Page There are number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE Read the Web Page help text to get further information for each of them The maximum number of ACEs is 64 ACL Ports The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port This is useful to group ports to obey the same traffic rules Traffic Policy is created under the Access Control List Page You can you also set up specific traffic properties Action Rate Limiter Port copy etc for each ingress port They will though only apply if the frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched In that case a counter associated with that port is incremented See the Web Page help text fo
462. s 5 y s y 5 y 15 y 5 y 5 y 5 x 5 s y 5 y EEE al o ua EN l aA E gadana Jk lila SEIS a JERR AE a a als o Figure 4 2 7 Privilege Levels Configuration Page Screenshot 57 The Page includes the following fields User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Description Object e Group Name The name identifying the privilege group In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP RSTP or QoS but a few of them contains more than one The following description defines these privilege level groups in details System Contact Name Location Timezone Log Security Authentication System Access Management Port contains Dot1x port MAC based and the MAC Address Limit ACL HTTPS SSH ARP Inspection and IP source guard IP Everything except ping Port Everything except VeriPHY Diagnostics ping and VeriPHY Maintenance CLI System Reboot System Restore Default System Password Configuration Save Configuration Load and Firmware Load Web Users Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance Debug Only present in CLI e Privilege Level Every privilege level group has an authorization level for the following sub groups Configuration read only Configuration execute read write Status statistics read only Status statistics read write e g for clearing of statistics
463. s Global Counters Object Auto refresh C Figure 4 14 5 LLDP Statistics Page Screenshot Description e Neighbor entries were last changed It also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added It also shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected e Total Neighbors Entries Added Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot e Total Neighbors Entries Deleted Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot e Total Neighbors Entries Dropped Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full e Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring 309 LLDP Statistics Local Counters User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information Object Description e Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted e Tx Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port e Rx Frames The number of LLDP frames received on the port e Rx Errors The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error e Frames Discarded If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames req
464. s and VLAN ID If Limit Control is enabled on a port the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port If this number is exceeded an action is taken The action can be one of the four different actions as described below The Limit Control module utilizes a lower layer module Port Security module which manages MAC addresses learnt on the port The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Port Limit Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 1 appears 269 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP lt All gt v Disabled w Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled x Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Figure 4 12 1 Port Limit Control Configuration Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields System Configuration Object Description e Mode Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switchstack If globally disabled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled e Aging Enabled If checked secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period 270 e Aging Period Port Configuration User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP If Aging Enabled
465. s and all F s are not allowed Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users 4 3 3 SNMP Trap Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this Page The SNMP Trap Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 2 appears SNMP Trap Configuration Trap Mode Trap Version Trap Community Trap Destination Address Trap Destination IPv6 Address Trap Authentication Failure Trap Link up and Link down Trap Inform Mode Trap Inform Timeout seconds Trap Inform Retry Times Re Figure 4 3 2 SNMP Trap Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields i Description Object e Trap Mode Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable SNMP trap mode operation E Disabled Disable SNMP trap mode operation e Trap Version Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are E SNMP v1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 E SNMP v2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c E SNMP v3 Set SNMP trap supported version 3 80 Trap Community User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Trap Destination Address Indicates the SNMP trap destination address It allow a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation X y z w And it also allow a valid hostname A valid hostname is a string drawn from t
466. s for additional AC wiring and reduces the installation time 3 25 Watts High Power Speed Dome This state of the art design is considerable to fit in various network environments like traffic centers shopping malls railway stations warehouses airports and production facilities for the most demanding outdoor surveillance applications no need electrician to install AC sockets 30 Watts Since the WGSW 20160HP per PoE port supports 56V DC PoE power output please check and E ea assure the Powered Device PD acceptable DC power range is from 56V DC Otherwise it will Note damage the Powered Device PD 318 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 16 2 System Configuration In a power over Ethernet system operating power is applied from a power source PSU power supply unit over the LAN infrastructure to powered devices PDs which are connected to ports Under some conditions the total output power required by PDs can exceed the maximum available power provided by the PSU The system may a prior be planed with a PSU capable of supplying less power than the total potential power consumption of all the PoE ports in the system In order to maintain the majority of ports active power management is implemented The PSU input power consumption is monitored by measuring voltage and current The input power consumption is equal to the system s aggregated power consumption The power management concept allows all ports to be active
467. s if the port is in the authorized state If the client is successfully authenticated receives an Accept frame from the authentication server the port state changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retried If the authentication server cannot be reached the switch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized state 4 11 2 Authentication Configuration This Page allows you to configure how a user is authenticated when he logs into the switch via one of the management client interfaces The Authentication Method Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 3 appears Authentication Method Configuration Authentication Method Fallback Console Local Telnet Local SSH Local Web Local Figure 4 11 3 Authentication Method Configuration Page Screenshot 229 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Client The management client for which the configuration
468. s indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry Adding a New Static Entry Click Add New Static Entry to add a new entry to the static MAC table Specify the VLAN ID MAC address and port members for the new entry Click Save 290 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this Page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address The MAC Address Table screen in Figure 4 13 2 appears MAC Address Table Auto refresh E Refresh Clear lt lt gt gt Start from VLAN 1 and MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 with 20 entries per page Port Members A a a a a C lalola lolo poles anastasia 028120 Dynamic 1B 38 2E A0 A4 Static 00 30 4F 00 00 01 Static 33 33 00 00 00 01 Static 33 33 00 00 00 02 Static 33 33 FF 00 00 01 Static 33 33 FF A8 00 64 Static FF FF FF FF FF FF Figure 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status Page Screenshot Navigating the MAC Table Each Page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table The first displayed will be the o
469. s through the states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port 2 STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the port level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root ES Bridge and the Designated Bridges Li On the port level STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports 138 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the switch level Parameter Description Default Value Bridge Identifier Not user A combination of the User set priority and 32768 MAC configurable the switch s MAC address except by setting priority The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts below a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC Priority Arelative priority for each switch lower 32768 numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge Hello Time The length
470. s tit da 490 Mirror Pad id E A 490 Miror MOG 00 dedo 491 6 16 Configuration Commandin iseanan aieea eean eri aaaeeeaa ea aeiiae reant t adaton aa eeii kede niak hdan aiak aei 492 Configuration SAVE iaa a e aa 492 Configuration Load iio toa 492 6 17 Firmware Command coocincncccnccnnnonnncn deeg aS inaa dne tarieg aasia Side oo araa niiki do diae ao Neia iaia R aoina i 493 Firmware Loading A taa 493 Firmware IPV6 Load iba 493 Firmware Informatio senis r ae aie iria 493 Firmware SWap soii A oa 493 6218 UPMP COMMANA d a a e eaa eani ai 494 UPnP COMPIGUPATION twitter tete las Ranana ecos cite 494 UPNPiMode mac ioe och coto dea e dl abe sta en lO dia E o aia ind Moa dea A Be e a dd oth a dl aa dd 494 UPAP TT ia 494 UPnP Advertising Duration saeni nnee eaae AE a a a E Ra aE E Aa E A ne 495 6 19 MVR COMMANA ccna T a a ce cect rae pe aeara r a aae ara ae eera ar ee a ea eanas aeaaeae maa akami ai Ehear inet 496 MVR i Config tration espia AA 496 MVR Mod A A heh Ae Ld hes ed ed do 1 496 MVR VLAN Setups 2 4ee a ain 496 MYR VEAN Mode Sinister do herd ate elon hed nose heat aise aly iia tng aie eet ecb even fide gh ceeds 497 MVR VLAN Porto tt td dc 497 MVR VEAN ELO 000 2 todito or e a ea db to a DA o met No ah ahd e de dla de O e a 498 MVR VLAN Ghantnel iii aa 498 MVR VIEANEPrOmity 4 2021 oct cutee ates bes Peck Eee des list ao e EOE E e e e e ee 499 MVR Immediate Leave siii a a 499 MVR Status ceeds O OE 499 VIVA TOUS ee ee vie ei a i ee i
471. sceiver ccccccccseceececeeeeeeeeaececeeeceeeaaaeaeceeeegeeaaaeaeceeeeeeaaaeaeceseseeeaaeaeseeeseseesaeaeeeeeeeeeeeaes 36 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT isis neve cave nev ence reia Ri ORAR ARO RANGER 39 A AA ccceceahs seed deeds cetec te setecctcscecests sdceeeshe sete ceuedeeeeste dda RAN SENAERA NAAA ENEK NEEE ANAREN ADINEAN AE ir ai 39 3 2 Management ACCESS OvervieW nonnnnciccccnnccr rre 40 3 3 Administration Console diia 40 3 4 Web Manageme nt c eccccsseeeceessneeeeenseeeeeeenseeeeeensneeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeensneeseensneeseeenseaeeeenseeeeesneeeeeenseeeeeenseeeenenses 42 3 5 SNMP Based Network Manageme n s ccccsccssseeeeseeeeeseeesseeeneeeeeeaesesnaesnseeeeeeeeeasaaesaseaeeeeeeesnaeseseenseeeeeees 43 3 6 PLANET Smart Discovery Utility c ccccceseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeee see eeeeeeeeeaeee sees en eeeeeeeeeesaaesaseeeenseeeseneseseaeseeeeeenees 43 4 WEB GONFIGURATION cion ie 45 A1 Main Web a e said 48 2 SY SUSI acest EE esas E E sat cae dled act vata a Sands caaces saul esusasaauciensucessndexuadesduccenceceat E 50 4 2 1 System Information eeieied Giessen eee Aeelintie a thence tcs 51 42 2 1P GOMMGUIATI ON ii fase he ae Bens sare teas ar ak 52 4 23 1PW6 ConfiguratiONi decian ardilla aca eat 53 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 2 4 Users Configuration ienei ee ieii E 54 425 Privilege Level E E E o aria 57 42 0 NTP C nfig ratioN a a Gest 59 AO A SE EAEE E E AEA E N E A AT 60 4 2 8 DHCP Relay ee eea a iie eee tec
472. sible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames e Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column e Conflict Displays Conflict status of QCL entries As H W resources are shared by multiple applications It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not be available in that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No 203 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Please note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the H W resources required to add QCL entry on pressing Resolve Conflict button Buttons Combined ds Select the QCL status from this drop down list rl Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Autom
473. single supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients are authorized and Y are unauthorized e Restart Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the Page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication to whenever the quiet period of the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a 239 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 11 4 Network Access Overview This Page provides an overview of the current NAS port states for
474. smitted on the port Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Buttons Refresh Discarded lllegal The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Click to refresh the Page immediately clear Click to clear the information immediately 155 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 8 Multicast 4 8 1 IGMP Snooping The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members The information receiv
475. stics radius Show Backend Server statistics default Show all statistics Security Network ACL Configuration Description Show ACL Configuration Syntax Security Network ACL Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 423 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network ACL Action Description Set or show the ACL port default action Syntax Security Network ACL Action lt port_list gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_redirect gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports permit Permit forwarding default deny Deny forwarding lt rate_limiter gt Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable lt port_copy gt Port number for copy of frames or disable lt logging gt System logging of frames log log_disable lt shutdown gt Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable Security Network ACL Policy Description Set or show the ACL port policy Syntax Security Network ACL Policy lt port_list gt lt policy gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt policy gt Policy number 0 255 Default Setting 0 424 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network ACL Rate Description Set or show the ACL rate limiter Syntax Security Network ACL Rate lt rate_limite
476. store and forward service An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for retaining e mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP You send e mail with SMTP and a mail handler receives it on your recipient s behalf Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e mail retrieval Virtually all modern e mail clients and servers support both PPPoE is an acronym for Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet It is a network protocol for encapsulating Point to Point Protocol PPP frames inside Ethernet frames It is used mainly with ADSL services where individual users connect to the ADSL transceiver modem over Ethernet and in plain Metro Ethernet networks Wikipedia In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN O PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems 547 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID There are six QCE frame types Ethernet Type VLAN UDP TCP Port
477. strator has to plug a PD that supported PoE LLDP function and then administrator is going to see the PoE information of the PD form LLDP LLDP Configuration LLDP Parameters LLDP Port Configuration port _ Mode CDP Aware por Description System Name System Description Syston Capabilities Management Address as E O Disabled Disabled Dissblea y Disaolec w Disabled x Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled e y y Disabled w e e paopaoocoodao oO DMO 4 OO Bh w hw BOB JOO a on Disabled Disabled J 0 Disabled Disabled w Disabled w Dissbled 0 BEE SSBB SBSB ANKARA NEAR KEAR SBE NUBE RE NEAR BEREAER ENEE O SBE SBSSBSBSBSBSBSESSBSBRBRBSESBSESEBA BEBE SISBSB SESE BSE foso pop SBSEE BBO SEB SSB SBSBSBSBSBSBBSBBSBEBRBBBBS noawaAagGa 8 Figure 4 16 7 LLDP Configuration Screenshot 327 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 16 7 PoE Alvie Check Configuration The WGSW 20160HP PoE Switch can be configured to monitor connected PD s status in real time via ping action Once the PD stops working and without response WGSW 20160HP PoE Switch is going to restart PoE port port power and bring the PD back to work It will greatly enhance the reliability and reduces administrator management burden This page provides you how to configure PD Alive Check The scre
478. t Statistics ID 1 65535 Security Switch RMON History Add Description Add or modify RMON Hisotry entry The entry index key is lt history_id gt Syntax Security Switch RMON History Add lt history_id gt lt data_source gt lt interval gt lt buckets gt Parameters lt history_id gt History ID 1 65535 lt data_source gt The OID that indicates that the iflndex in ifEntry The value should be like 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 xxx lt interval gt Sampling interval 1 3600 default 1800 lt buckets gt The maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON 1 65535 default 50 Security Switch RMON History Delete Description Delete RMON Hisotry entry The entry index key is lt history_id gt Syntax Security Switch RMON History Delete lt history_id gt Parameters lt history_id gt History ID 1 65535 409 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch RMON History Lookup Description Show RMON History entries Syntax Security Switch RMON History Lookup lt history_id gt Parameters lt history_id gt History ID 1 65535 Security Switch RMON Alarm Add Description Add or modify RMON Alarm entry The entry index key is lt alarm_id gt Syntax Security Switch RMON Alarm Add lt alarm_id gt lt interval gt lt alarm_vairable gt absolute delta lt rising_threshold gt lt rising_event_index gt lt falling_threshold gt lt fallin
479. t lt group_id gt Parameters lt dsap gt DSAP value 0x00 0xFF lt ssap gt SSAP value 0x00 0xFF lt group_id gt Protocol group ID VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete Ethernet ll Description Delete VCL protocol based VLAN Ethernet ll protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Delete Eth2 lt ether_type gt arpliplipxlat Parameters lt ether_type gt arp ip ipx at Ether Type 0x0600 OxFFFF VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete SNAP Description Delete VCL protocol based VLAN SNAP protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Delete Snap lt oui gt rfc_1042 snap_8021h lt pid gt Parameters lt oui gt rfc_1042 snap_8021h OUI value Hexadecimal 00 00 00 to FF FF FF User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP lt pid gt PID value Ox0 OxFFFF If OUI is 00 00 00 valid range of PID is from 0x0600 0xF FFF 523 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete LLC Description Delete VCL protocol based VLAN LLC protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Delete Llc lt dsap gt lt ssap gt Parameters lt dsap gt DSAP value 0x00 0xFF lt ssap gt SSAP value 0x00 0xFF VCL Protocol based VLAN Add Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN group to VLAN mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Vlan Add lt port_list gt lt group_id gt lt vid gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt group_id gt Protocol group ID lt vid gt
480. t Through and Crossover Cable 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown 1 White Green 2 Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Orange 7 White Brown 8 Brown Please make sure your connected cables are with same pin assignment and color as above picture before deploying the cables into your network ACE ACL User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP APPENDEX B GLOSSARY ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or se
481. t allowed lt description gt Entry description Use clear or to clear the string No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a contact only in CLI Voice VLAN OUI Delete Description Delete Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Delete lt oui_addr gt Parameters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx The null OUI address isn t allowed Voice VLAN OUI Clear Description Clear Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Clear 503 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Voice VLAN OUI Lookup Description Lookup Voice VLAN OUI entry Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Lookup lt oui_addr gt Parameters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx default Show OUI address Voice VLAN Port Mode Description Set or show the Voice VLAN port mode When the port mode isn t disabled we must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Syntax Voice VLAN Port Mode lt port_list gt disable auto force Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disjoin from Voice VLAN auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached on the specific port and configure the Voice VLAN members automatically force Forced join to Voice VLAN default Show Voice VLAN port mode Default
482. t and report potential cabling issues Reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default PLANET Smart Discovery Utility for deploy management ICMPv6 27 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 1 5 Product Specification Hardware Specification Copper Ports 16 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 Auto MDI MDI X ports 10 100 1000Mbps SFP Combo 4 19 100 1000Mbps TP and SFP shared combo interfaces SFP Mini GBIC supports Interfaces 100 1000Mbps Dual mode shared with Port 17 to Port 20 ET tient ma Share Data Buffer 4 megabits Elow Control IEEE 802 3x Pause Frame for Full Duplex Back pressure for Half Duplex lt 5 sec System reboot Reset Button gt 5 sec Factory Default Dimension W x D x H 440 x 300 x 44 5 mm 1U high 4 1kg System Power Green SYS System Green Alert FAN1 Green FAN2 Green LED PoE Ethernet Interfaces Port 1 to port 16 LNK ACT 10 100 1000Mbps Green PoE In Use Orange 10 100 1000Base T Combo Ports Port 17 to port 20 1000 LNK ACT Green 10 100 LNK ACT Orange 100 1000Mbps SFP Combo Interfaces Port 17 to port 20 1000 LNK ACT Green 100 LNK ACT Orange t Power Consumption Max 22 Watts 75BTU ESD Protection 6KV DC Power over Ethernet PoE Standard IEEE 802 3af 802 3at PoE PSE PoE Power Supply Type End Span pemwome PoE Power Output Max 30 8 Watts PoE Abil come ee he Watts 28 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Number of PD O 15 4 Watts 30 8 Watts Layer 2 M
483. t cable The maximum allowed continuous output power per cable in IEEE 802 3af is 15 40 W A later specification IEEE 802 3at offers 25 50 W When the device is a switch it is commonly called an End span although IEEE 802 3af refers to it as endpoint Otherwise if it s an intermediary device between a non PoE capable switch and a PoE device it s called a Mid span An external PoE injector is a Mid span device Powered device A powered device PD is a device powered by a PSE and thus consumes energy Examples include wireless access points IP Phones and IP cameras Many powered devices have an auxiliary power connector for an optional external power supply Depending on the PD design some none or all power can be supplied from the auxiliary port with the auxiliary port sometimes acting as backup power in case of PoE supplied power failure How Power is Transferred Through the Cable A standard CAT5 Ethernet cable has four twisted pairs but only two of these are used for 10BASE T and 100BASE TX The specification allows two options for using these cables for power shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2 The spare pairs are used Figure 1 shows the pair on pins 4 and 5 connected together and forming the positive supply and the pair on pins 7 and 8 connected and forming the negative supply In fact a late change to the spec allows either polarity to be used 531 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP POWER SOURCING POWERED DEVICE EQUIPMENT
484. t keys to each user Personal WPA utilizes less scalable pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 11i standard Wikipedia WPS is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Setup It is a standard for easy and secure establishment of a wireless home network The goal of the WPS protocol is to simplify the process of connecting any home device to the wireless network Wikipedia WRED is an acronym for Weighted Random Early Detection It is an active queue management mechanism that provides preferential treatment of higher priority frames when traffic builds up within a queue A frame s DP level is used as input to WRED A higher DP level assigned to a frame results in a higher probability that the frame is dropped during times of congestion WTR is an acronym for Wait To Restore This is the time a fail on a resource has to be not active before restoration back to this previously failing resource is done 554 Q PLANET Networking amp Communication EC Declaration of Conformi For the following equipment Type of Product WGSW 20160HP Model Number 16 Port 10 100 1000Mbps 802 3at PoE 4 Port Gigabit TP SFP Combo Managed Switch Produced by Manufacturers Name Planet Technology Corp Manufacturer s Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist
485. t near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water sea ocean IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information Civic Address LCI Object Description e Country code The two letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK DE or US e State National subdivisions state canton region province prefecture e County County parish gun Japan district e City City township shi Japan Example Copenhagen e City district City division borough city district ward chou Japan e Block Neighborhood Neighborhood block e Street Street Example Poppelvej e Leading street direction Leading street direction Example N e Trailing street suffix Trailing street suffix Example SW e Street suffix Street suffix Example Ave Platz e House no House number Example 21 e House no suffix House number suffix Example A 1 2 e Landmark Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University e Additional location info Additional location info Example South Wing 300 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e Name Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming Jah
486. t server_port gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show RADIUS authentication server configuration enable Enable RADIUS authentication server disable Disable RADIUS authentication server default Show RADIUS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external authentication server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server UDP port Use 0 to use the default RADIUS port 1812 438 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security AAA ACCT_RADIUS Description Set or show RADIUS accounting server setup Syntax Security AAA ACCT_RADIUS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show RADIUS accounting server configuration enable Enable RADIUS accounting server disable Disable RADIUS accounting server default Show RADIUS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external accounting server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server UDP port Use 0 to use the default RADIUS port 1813 Security AAA TACACS Descripti
487. t_text gt SMTP E mail subject SMTP Mail to 1 Description Set or show SMTP E mail 1 to configure Syntax SMTP Mailto1 lt mailto1_text gt Parameters lt mailto1_text gt SMTP E mail 1 to address SMTP Mail to 2 Description Set or show SMTP E mail 2 to configure Syntax SMTP Mailto2 lt mailto2_text gt Parameters lt mailto1_text gt SMTP E mail 2 to address 528 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 7 SWITCH OPERATION 7 1 Address Table The Managed Switch is implemented with an address table This address table composed of many entries Each entry is used to store the address information of some node in network including MAC address port no etc This in formation comes from the learning process of Managed Switch 7 2 Learning When one packet comes in from any port the Managed Switch will record the source address port no And the other related information in address table This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets 7 3 Forwarding amp Filtering When one packet comes from some port of the Managed Switch it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning The Managed Switch will lookup the address table for the destination address If not found this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port which this packet comes in And these ports will transmit this packet to the netw
488. tagged frames Syntax QoS Port Classification Tag lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable tag classification disable Disable tag classification default Show tag classification mode Default Setting disable QoS Port Classification Map Description Set or show the port classification map This map is used when port classification tag is enabled and the purpose is to translate the Priority Code Point PCP and Drop Eligible Indicator DEI from a tagged frame to QoS class and DP level Syntax QoS Port Classification Map lt port_list gt lt pcp_list gt lt dei_list gt lt class gt lt dpl gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt pcp_list gt PCP list or all default All PCPs 0 7 lt dei_list gt DEI list or all default All DEIs 0 1 lt class gt QoS class 0 7 lt dpl gt Drop Precedence Level 0 3 472 QoS Port Classification DSCP Description Set or show if the classification is based on DSCP value in IP frames Syntax QoS Port Classification DSCP lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable DSCP based classification disable Disable DSCP based classification default Show DSCP based classification mode Default Setting disable QoS Port Policer Mode D
489. tarting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 13 3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this Page The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4 13 3 appears Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Start from Port 1 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 and IP Address 0 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page Port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address No more entries Auto refresh E Refresh lt lt gt gt Figure 4 13 3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Screenshot Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table The Start from port address VLAN MAC address and IP address input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh w
490. teeeeeeee eens se seaeeneeeeeeeeeesaaesenseaeeeeeesaesaseeeeeeeesseaesasaesenseaeees 441 STP Configuration 441 DEP NOPSION A it 441 STP TX Hold tote sae nates e SABLA td o doo ads de go tea Aes eat e a o a don 442 SAP MaXHOps daa 442 STP MaxAgQe enee rana aR RA eee oa cds 443 SIP FWODGIAY 22508 ste e eb tee Sorts eed aN do Yas ade ene Rasa ei lee eee od a 443 STP CN AIM sustancial 444 SMP BRDU PING gt ts 2 dudes los at ae de hd oA eS tht hte ta Sind A el EE ed oa A ta end AS oe ia eth 444 STP BPDU G ard as 445 STP Recover dl a 445 STPS ii c 445 STPS TA PY bee ha ee EA WAS oe ee 446 STP MST Map ii A dais 446 STP MSIA A eet od eh Ade eae e dee es dd ld a ee 446 STP Port Configurations eeens lirio ic 447 STP PortiModer tos cue het es acc and ade asin atts do ca dodo ce ela o nds o a do e a td 447 STP Pott Edge ci tn 447 STP Port Auto Edge kae aesa na tanec Sekeg a E A RAE parecia 448 SUP POMP 2 Pirin a a 448 SAP Port RestrictedRole TEPE ETE TASTE E T E r E TET 449 STP PortRestricte TN iii edt eee AE A ae 449 SIP Port bpdlGUEard m ksh do o es o A o deeded 450 STP Portatil oa 450 STP POMSMCNECK EEA N A aa 450 STP MSTI Port Configuration ce 451 STP MSTRorbCost cn sis E che er E e e A e o 451 STP MSTIPorbBrorty astral e e e e ese td de Da a a Blk o 451 6 9 Link Aggregation Command ommncinninninncnnninirn cr 452 Aggregation Configuration tal 452 AQ Ore Galion AO cant did an Dota ed atea anda da ln nde adri 452 14 User s Manu
491. ters lt timeout gt SNMP trap inform timeout 0 2147 seconds Default Setting 1 399 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times Description Set or show the SNMP trap inform retry times Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times lt retries gt Parameters lt retries gt SNMP trap inform retransmited times 0 255 default Show SNMP trap inform retry times Default Setting 5 Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID Description Show SNMP trap security engine ID probe mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap security engine ID probe disable Disable SNMP trap security engine ID probe default Show SNMP trap security engine ID probe mode Default Setting enable 400 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID Description Set or show SNMP trap security engine ID Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID lt engineid gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ffH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name Description Set or show SNMP trap security name Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name lt security_name gt Parameters lt security_name gt A string representing t
492. tes The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original Ether Type Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE802 1Q Tag Dest Addr Src Addr Length E type Data Old CRC Original Ethernet Dest Addr Src Addr E type Tag Length E type Data New CRC New Tagged Packet Priority CFI VLAN ID M Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLAN to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant 109 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the switch If no VLAN are defined on the switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLAN are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is T
493. the packet through Port 2 and Port 3 124 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 2 PC 4 PC 5 and PC 6 received no packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 4 While the packet leaves Port 3 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 a Tagged packet entering VLAN 2 5 While PC 3 transmit a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 enters Port 3 PC 1 and PC 2 will received the packet through Port 1 and Port 2 6 While the packet leaves Port 1 and Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet a Untagged packet entering VLAN 3 1 While PC 4 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 4 the switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 3 PC 5 and PC 6 will received the packet through Port 5 and Port 6 2 While the packet leaves Port 5 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 6 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 3 At this example VLAN Group 1 just set as default VLAN but only focus on VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 traffic flow Note Setup steps 1 Create VLAN Group Set VLAN Group 1 Default VLAN with VID VLAN ID 1 Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 VLAN Group 2 with VID 2 VLAN Group 3 with VID 3 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports Port 7 Port 10 3 Remove VLAN Member for VLAN 1 Remember t
494. the selected switch The Network Access Overview screen in Figure 4 11 5 appears Network Access Server Switch Status Port Admin State Port State Last ID QoS Class Port VLAN ID O INIO 107 E 100 IN Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Figure 4 11 5 Network Access Server Switch Status Page Screenshot Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Auto refresh L 240 The Page includes the following fields User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Description Object e Port The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values e Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states e Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the most rec
495. the statistics on a speficic interface The SFP Module Information screen in Figure 4 4 4 appears SFP Module Information Wave Length nm Distance m 17 ER En Auto refresh L Refresh Figure 4 4 4 SFP Module Information for Switch Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Type Display the type of current SFP module the possible types are M 1000Base SX NW 1000Base LX HM 100Base FX e Speed Display the spedd of current SFP module the speed value or description is get from the SFP module Different vendors SFP modules might shows different speed information 94 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e Wave Length nm Display the wavelength of current SFP module the wavelength value is get from the SFP module Use this column to check if the wavelength values of two nodes are the matched while the fiber connection is failed e Distance m Display the supports distance of current SFP module the distance value is get from the SFP module Buttons Auto refresh ha Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 4 4 5 Port Mirror Configure port Mirroring on this Page This function provide to monitoring network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network Switch to another port where the packet can be studied It enables the manag
496. these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements Physically NMSs are usually engineering workstation caliber computers with fast CPUs megapixel color displays substantial memory and abundant disk space At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment o Agents Agents are software modules that reside in network elements They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element o Management information base MIB A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules o network management protocol A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMSs SNMP is the Internet community s de facto standard management protocol SNMP Operations SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response o Get Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent o Set Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent o Trap Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message SNMP community An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The communi
497. ti 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module In Multi 802 1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Instead the switch uses the supplicant s MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality MAC based Auth Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC add
498. ting enable Security Switch SNMP Version Description Set or show the SNMP protocol version Syntax Security Switch SNMP Version 1 2c 3 Parameters 1 SNMP version 1 2c SNMP version 2c 3 SNMP version 3 default Show SNMP version Default Setting 2c 394 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch SNMP Read Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP read access Syntax Security Switch SNMP Read Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string Maximum length allowed is upto 256 characters default Show SNMP read community Default Setting public Security Switch SNMP Write Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP write access Syntax Security Switch SNMP Write Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string Maximum length allowed is upto 256 characters default Show SNMP write community Default Setting private 395 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode Description Set or show the SNMP trap mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP traps disable Disable SNMP traps default Show SNMP trap mode Default Setting disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Version Description Set or show the
499. to ensure user privacy The network administrators can now construct highly secured corporate networks with considerably less time and effort than before The WGSW 20160HP net Security also provides DHCP Snooping IP Source Guard and Dynamic ARP Inspection functions to prevent IP snooping from attack and discard ARP packets with invalid MAC address The network administrators can now construct highly secured corporate networks with considerably less time and effort than before Flexibility and Extension solution The four mini GBIC slots built in the WGSW 20160HP support Dual Speed 100Base FX and 1000Base SX LX SFP Small Form factor Pluggable fiber optic modules that means the administrator now can flexibly choose the suitable SFP transceiver according to not only the transmission distance but also the transmission speed required The distance can be extended from 550 meters to 2km Multi Mode fiber up to above 10 20 30 40 50 70 120 kilometers Single Mode fiber or WDM fiber They are well suited for applications within the enterprise data centers and distributions Centralized Power Management for Gigabit Ethernet PoE Networking To fulfill the needs of higher power required PoE network applications with Gigabit speed transmission the 16 Port Gigabit High Power over Ethernet Managed Switch WGSW 20160HP which features high performance Gigabit IEEE 802 3af PoE Up to 15 4W and IEEE 802 3at High Power PoE Up to 30 8W on all ports By supporti
500. to select the starting point in the VLAN Table The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 6 appears IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Refresh lt lt gt gt Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page VLAN ID Snooping Enabled IGMP Querier Compatibility QI sec QRI 0 1 sec LLQI 0 1 sec URI sec Add New IGMP VLAN Save Reset Figure 4 8 6 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the next save e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e IGMP Snooping Enable Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Only up to 64 VLANs can be selected e IGMP Querier Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN e Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is IGMP Auto Forced IGMPv1 Forced IGMPv2 Forced IGMPv3 default compatibility value is IGMP Auto Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds defa
501. to several serious weaknesses researchers had found in the previous system Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP WPA implements the majority of the IEEE 802 11i standard and was intended as an intermediate measure to take the place of WEP while 802 11i was prepared WPA is specifically designed to also work with pre WPA wireless network interface cards through firmware upgrades but not 553 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP necessarily with first generation wireless access points WPA2 implements the full standard but will not work with some older network cards Wikipedia WPA PSK is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected_Access Pre Shared Key WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes different keys to each user Personal WPA utilizes less scalable pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 11i standard Wikipedia WPA Radius is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access Radius 802 1X authentication server WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes differen
502. transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model NFS is an acronym for Network File System lt allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as though they are local file systems NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network providing authorized users continuous access to them which means NFS supports sharing of files printers and other resources as persistent storage over a computer network 545 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer OAM is an acronym for Operation Administration and Maintenance It is a protocol described in ITU T Y 1731 used to implement carrier ethernet functionality MEP functionality like CC and RDI is based on this A LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame These TLVs are known as optional TLVs If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame OUI is the organizationally unique identifier An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE You can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address PCP is an acronym for Pri
503. ts which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN E Isolated ports Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN 122 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied When traffic comes in on an isolated port the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN This Page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN The Port Isolation screen in Figure 4 6 7 appears Auto refresh Refresh Port Isolation Configuration Port Number 112 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 AAAAAAAAAAPARAARA lA oan w o Reset Figure 4 6 7 Port Isolation Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN When checked port isolation is enabled on that port When unchecked port isolation is disabled on that port
504. ttom of the browser shows the upload status 3 After down the main screen appears Transfer Completed 74 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 2 19 Image Select This Page provides information about the active and alternate backup firmware images in the device and allows you to revert to the alternate image The web Page displays two tables with information about the active and alternate firmware images The Image Select screen in Figure 4 2 26 appears In case the active firmware image is the alternate image only the Active Image table is shown In this case the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled If the alternate image is active due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual intervention uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and activate this The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases This does not constitute an error Software Image Selection Active Image Image managed Version 1 0b121226 Date 2012 12 26T07 39 08 0800 Alternate Image Image managed bk Version 1 0b121211 Date 2012 12 24T09 30 10 0800 Activate Alternate Image Figure 4 2 26 Software Image Selection Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Image The flash index name of the firmware image The name of primary preferred image is image the alternate image is nam
505. tween 256 to 511 octets in length e 512 1023 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 to 1023 octets in length e 1024 1518 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 to 1518 octets in length Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 347 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 5 1 Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the Managed Switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the Managed Switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the Managed Switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Logon to the Console Once the terminal has connected to the device power on the Managed Switch the terminal will display that it is running testing procedures Then the following message asks the login username amp password The factory default password as following an
506. twork security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features E Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard B Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs a End stations can belong to multiple VLANs E Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices E Priority tagging M IEEE 802 1Q Standard IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLAN require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers m The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally
507. ty Switch Authentication Configuration oonnnccccnnnncccnnnoccnnnoncncnononnnnnnnn cnn n nono cnn non rr n nan 388 Security Switch Authentication Method ooocococcconococinonononononanano nono no non nr nn nnnn nara nn 388 Security Switch SSH Configuration coccion da dci 389 Security SWitch SSH MOS ciiccesiiricn rta iii alero ile 389 Security Switch HTTPS Configuration ooooccccnnoccnnnonoccnononcnnnonannnnnnnn conan nn iaa aeaaee iraan arada Enae apii EREA 389 Security Switch HTTPS Mode comio ae 390 Security Switch HTTPS Redirect cocino A E TE Ea Siew 390 Security Switch Access Configuration aiii iii 391 Security Switch Access MON c0cenmconincic errar 391 Security SwitchiAccess Add iii di 391 Security Switch Access PVO Add inni enie a aaa adi aaa odia 392 Security SwitchiAccess Delete icons nato n 392 security Switch Access Lookup cta A tn 393 Security Switch Access Cleah mienie iaa eii 393 Security Switch Access Statistics anise i E aAa aaa E a EA aE aa A Ea EE AEE AEA AEE AE AE ici 393 Security Switch SNMP Configuration aisi ihiak eienen a ana a ai gaas 393 Security Switch SNMP Mode ooocccccocccccononcnonononcnononoconnno cnn ccoo nn nr attt cnn rre rre 394 Security Switch SNMP Version A betis 394 Security Switch SNMP Read Community c cccooocccccococccononnncnnononcno noc nn nono tutt nono nara nn nn errar rre 395 Security Switch SNMP Write Community ooooocncnnonocinonoccnonononcno nono nc nono nn nn nnnn cnn rn n nn 395 Se
508. ty name is used to identify the group A SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities SNMP default communities are o Write private o Read public Use the SNMP Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s SNMP function This section has the following items a System Configuration Configure SNMP on this Page a Trap Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this Page a System Information The system information is provides here 78 a SNMPv3 Communities E SNMPv3 Users E SNMPv3 Groups E SNMPv3 Views E SNMPv3 Access User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this Page Configure SNMPv3 users table on this Page Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this Page Configure SNMPv3 views table on this Page Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this Page 4 3 2 SNMP System Configuration Configure SNMP on this Page The SNMP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 1 appears Read Community Write Community SNMP System Configuration Figure 4 3 1 SNMP System Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable SNMP mode operation E Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation e Version Indicates the SNMP supported version Possible versions are E SNMP v
509. u try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be preused by any other existing mapping entry on this Page e VLAN ID Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4095 e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping To include a port in a mapping check the box To remove or exclude the port from the mapping make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Buttons Save Click to save changes Click Add New Entry to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table the Group Name VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new entry Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 135 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 7 Spamning Tree Protocol 4 7 1 Theory The Spanning Tree protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and pro
510. ual of WGSW 20160HP QoS DSCP Translation Description Set or show global ingress DSCP translation table If port DSCP translation is enabled translation table is used to translate incoming frames DSCP value and translated value is used to map QoS class and DP level Syntax QoS DSCP Translation lt dscp_list gt lt trans_dscp gt Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 list or all default Show DSCP translation table lt trans_dscp gt Translated DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 QoS DSCP Trust Description Set or show trusted DSCP value which is used for QoS classification The DSCP value to be checked for trust is either translated value ifDSCP translation is enabled for the ingress port or incoming frame DSCP value if translation is disabled for the port Trusted DSCP value is onlyused for QoS classification Syntax QoS DSCP Trust lt dscp_list gt enable disable Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 list or all enable Set DSCP as trusted DSCP disable Set DSCP as un trusted DSCP default Show DSCP Trust status Default Setting disable 483 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP QoS DSCP Classification Mode Description Set or show DSCP ingress classification mode If port DSCP classification is selected DSCP will be classified based on QoS class and DP level only for DSCP value with classification mode enabled DSCP may be translated DSCP if translation is enabled f
511. ue v1 Forced Compatibility of IGMPv1 or MLDv1 v2 Forced Compatibility of IGMPv2 or MLDv2 v3 Forced Compatibility of IGMPv3 default Show IPMC Interface Compatibility IPMC Fastleave Description Set or show the IPMC snooping fast leave port mode Syntax IPMC Fastleave mld igmp lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters mldligmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MLD fast leave disable Disable MLD fast leave default Show IPMC fast leave mode Default Setting disable 514 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP IPMC Throttling Description Set or show the IPMC port throttling status Syntax IPMC Throttling mld igmp lt port_list gt limit_group_number Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 0 No limit 1 10 Group learn limit default Show IPMC Port Throttling Default Setting Unlimited IPMC Filtering Description Set or show the IPMC port group filtering list Syntax IPMC Filtering mld igmp lt port_list gt add del group_adar Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port group filtering entry del Del existing port group filtering entry default Show IPMC port group filterin
512. uest the current values The name of None is reserved The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Security Switch SNMP Access Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 access entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 407 Security Switch SNMP Access Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 access entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Security Switch RMON Statistics Add Description Add or modify RMON Statistics entry The entry index key is lt stats_id gt Syntax Security Switch RMON Statistics Add lt stats_id gt lt data_source gt Parameters lt stats_id gt Statistics ID 1 65535 lt data_source gt The OID that indicates that the iflndex in ifEntry The value should be like 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 xxx Security Switch RMON Statistics Delete Description Delete RMON Statistics entry The entry index key is lt stats_id gt Syntax Security Switch RMON Statistics Delete lt stats_id gt Parameters lt stats_id gt Statistics ID 1 65535 408 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch RMON Statistics Lookup Description Show RMON Statistics entries Syntax Security Switch RMON Statistics Lookup lt stats_id gt Parameters lt stats_id g
513. uire a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out e TLVs Discarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded e TLVs Unrecognized The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value e Org Discarded The number of organizationally TLVs received e Age Outs Buttons Refresh Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented Click to refresh the Page immediately Cta Clears the local counters All counters including global counters are cleared upon reboot 310 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 15 Network Diagnostics This section provide the Physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for troubleshoot The diagnostic tools are designed for network manager to help them quickly diagnose problems between point to point and better service customers Use the Diagnastics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics
514. ult query interval is 125 seconds e QRI Query Response Interval The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds 162 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e LLQI LMQI for IGMP Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval multiplied by the Last Member Query Count The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second e URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Buttons Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed Add New IGMP VLAN Click to add new IGMP VLAN Specify the VID and configure the new entry Click Save The specific IGMP VLAN starts working after the corresponding static VLAN is also created Save Click to save changes Reset
515. ult value is Any e VID Indicates VLAN ID either a specific VID or range of VIDs VID can be in the range 1 4095 or Any e PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any 199 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP e DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS class DPL Classified Drop Precedence Level DSCP Classified DSCP value e Modification Buttons You can modify each QCE in the table using the following buttons O Inserts a new QCE before the current row Edits the QCE Moves the QCE up the list Moves the QCE down the list Deletes the QCE The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the list of QCL 4 9 11 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration The QCE Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 13 appears QCE Configuration 112731415617 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 V M aM E ME ME ME E ME E E wm Y Key Parameters Action Parameters Tag E O vwo Any e Default y Sra Default x Tag PCP DEI SMAC DMAC Type Save Reset Cancel Figure 4 9 13 QCE Co
516. ure 4 18 3 RMON Alarm Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e ID Indicates the index of Alarm control entry e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold e Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled e Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds e Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period e Startup Alarm The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid e Rising Threshold Rising threshold value e Rising Index Rising event index e Falling Threshold Falling threshold value e Falling Index Falling event index Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh E Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 336 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 18 4 RMON Event Configuration Configure RMON Event table on this Page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 18 4 appears RMON Event Configuraton Derete 10 bese Type Community Event Last Time Figure 4 18 4 RMON Event C
517. urn on power again Ml 1000Base T port link LED is lit but the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting MW Switch does not power up Solution 1 AC power cord not inserted or faulty 2 Check that the AC power cord is inserted correctly 3 Replace the power cord If the cord is inserted correctly check that the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch 4 If that device works refer to the next step 5 If that device does not work check the AC power User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP E While IP Address be changed or forgotten admin password To reset the IP address to the default IP Address 192 168 0 100 or reset the password to default value Press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device is rebooted you can login the management Web interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx i WGSW 20160HP PLANE wos Reset 534 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP APPENDEX A Networking Connection A 1 PoE RJ 45 Port Pin Assignments PINNO RJ 45POWER ASSIGNMENT rm e IES A 2 Switch s Data RJ 45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000Base T o 1 B 2 2 BIDA BIDB 2 3 BIDB BIDA 2 4 BIDO _ BIDD 5 BIDO BIDD 6 BIDB
518. ut layer VLAN tag ether type MAN dotiq Set out layer VLAN tag ether type 802 1Q default Show VLAN out layer VLAN tag ether type Default Setting N A 378 VLAN Add Description Add or modify VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Add lt vid gt lt name gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting 1 VLAN Forbidden Add Description Add or modify VLAN entry in forbidden table Syntax VLAN Forbidden Add lt vid gt lt name gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports VLAN Delete Description Delete VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Delete lt vid gt lt name gt Parameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name 379 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP VLAN Forbidden Delete Description Delete VLAN entry Syntax LAN Forbidden Delete lt vid gt lt name gt Parameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name VLAN Forbidden Lookup Description Lookup VLAN Forbidden port entry Syntax VLAN Forbidden Lookup lt vid gt name lt name gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs name VLAN name string User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters V
519. v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM lt security_name gt A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt group_name gt A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Security Switch SNMP Group Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 group entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Security Switch SNMP Group Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 group entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 405 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Switch SNMP View Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 view entry The entry index key are lt view_name gt and lt oid_subtree gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Add lt view_name gt included excluded lt oid_subtree gt Parameters lt view_name gt A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should excluded
520. ve Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 331 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 17 2 Loop Protection Status This Page displays the loop protection port status the ports of the switch screen in Figure 4 17 2 appears Loop Protection Status Auto refresh O Refresh Letra No ports enabled Figure 4 17 2 Loop Protection Status Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The Managed Switch port number of the logical port e Action The currently configured port action e Transmit The currently configured port transmit mode e Loops The number of loops detected on this port e Status The current loop protection status of the port e Loop Whether a loop is currently detected on the port e Time of Last Loop The time of the last loop event detected Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh i i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals 332 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 18 RMON RMON is the most important expansion of the standard SNMP RMON is a set of MIB definitions used to define standard network monitor functions and interfaces enabling the communication between SNMP management terminals and remote monitors RMON provides a highly efficient method to monitor actions inside the subnets MID of RMON consists of
521. ved with exceeding the limit Syntax Security Network Limit Action lt port_list gt none trap shut trap_shut Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports none trap shut trap_shut Action to be taken in case the number of MAC addresses exceeds the limit none Don t do anything trap Send an SNMP trap shut Shutdown the port trap_shut Send an SNMP trap and shutdown the port default Show current action Default Setting none 416 Security Network Limit Reopen Description Reopen one or more ports whose limit is exceeded and shut down Syntax Security Network Limit Reopen lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Security Network NAS Configuration Description Show 802 1X configuration Syntax Security Network NAS Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Security Network NAS Mode Description Set or show the global NAS state Syntax Security Network NAS Mode enable disable Parameters enable Globally enable 802 1X disable Globally disable 802 1X default Show current 802 1X global enabledness Default Setting disable 417 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network NAS State Description Set or show the port security state Syntax User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Security Network NAS State lt port_list gt
522. very services defined in TIA 1057 however do not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such devices may include but are not limited to IP Communication Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class Il The LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class Class and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III The LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III definition is applicable to all 305 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class I and Media Endpoint Class II class
523. vide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions E STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D E RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w a MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of the blocked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users However the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following
524. voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP 306 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type Video Signaling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media e Policy Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is required by the device Can be either Defined or Unknown Unknown The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown Defined The network policy is defined e TAG TAG is indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged ot Untagged Untagg
525. w Set PoE Priority Syntax PoE Priority lt port_list gt low high critical Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports low Set priority to low high Set priority to high critical Set priority to critical default Show PoE priority Default Setting high PoE Mamagement Mode Description Show Set PoE management mode Syntax PoE Mgmt_mode mgt_class mgt_alloc mgt_consumption mgt_priority PoE Allocated Power Description Set or show PoE maximum power allocated per port 0 30 8 with one digit Syntax PoE Alloc_Power lt port_list gt lt alloc_power gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt alloc_power gt PoE maiximum power allocated for the port 0 30 8 Default Setting 30 8 468 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP PoE Power Supply Description Set or show the value of the power supply Syntax PoE Power_Supply lt supply_power gt Parameters lt supply_power gt PoE power for a power supply POE Status Description Show POE status Syntax PoE Status 469 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 6 14 Quality of Service Command QoS Configuration Description Show QoS Configuration Syntax QoS Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports QoS Port Classification Class Description Set or show the default QoS class
526. w LLDP MED Emergency Call Service Syntax LLDPMED ecs lt ecs_value gt Parameters lt ecs_value gt lldpmed The value for the Emergency Call Service LLDPMED Policy Delete Description Delete the selected policy Syntax LLDPMED policy delete lt policy_list gt Parameters lt policy_list gt List of policies to delete 463 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP LLDPMED Policy Add Description Adds a policy to the list of polices Syntax LLDPMED policy add lt policy_type gt tagged untagged lt vlan_id gt lt I2_priority gt lt dscp gt Parameters lt policy_type gt The policy_type parameter takes the following values voice Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications voice_signaling Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media guest_voice Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services guest_voice_signaling Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy
527. where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e SIP Filter Specify the source IP filter for this ACE Any No source IP filter is specified Source IP filter is don t care Host Source IP filter is set to Host Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Source IP filter is set to Network Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear e SIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation e SIP Mask When Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation e DIP Filter Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE Any No destination IP filter is specified Destination IP filter is don t care Host Destination IP filter is set to Host Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address field that appears Network Destination IP filter is set to Network Specify the destination IP address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear e DIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation e DIP Mask When Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a spec
528. will be lost 272 4 12 2 Access Management User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Configure access management table on this Page The maximum entry number is 16 If the application s type match any one of the access management entries it will allow access to the switch The Access Management Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 2 appears Access Management Configuration Figure 4 12 2 The Page includes the following fields Access Management Configuration Overview Page Screenshot Object Description e Mode Indicates the access management mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable access management mode operation Disabled Disable access management mode operation e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Start IP address Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry e End IP address Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry e HTTP HTTPS Indicates the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS interface that the host IP address matched the entry e SNMP Indicates the host can access the switch from SNMP interface that the host IP address matched the entry e TELNET SSH Buttons Indicates the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH interface that the host IP address matched the entry Add New Entry Click to add a new access management entry Save Click to save changes Rese J Click
529. work management application The administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages Table 3 1 compares the three management methods Method Console Web Browser e SNMP Agent e Advantages No IP address or subnet needed Text based Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal built into Windows 95 98 NT 2000 ME XP operating systems Secure Ideal for configuring the switch remotely Compatible with all popular browsers Can be accessed from any location Most visually appealing Communicates with switch functions at the MIB level Based on open standards Disadvantages Must be near switch or use dial up connection Not convenient for remote users Modem connection may prove to be unreliable or slow Security can be compromised hackers need only know the IP address and subnet mask May encounter lag times on poor connections Requires SNMP manager software Least visually appealing of all three methods Some settings require calculations Security can be compromised hackers need only know the community name Table 3 1 Management Methods Comparison 3 3 Administration Console The administration console is an internal character oriented and command line user interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings Using this met
530. would invalidate the warranty Step3 Secure the brackets tightly Step4 Follow the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side Step5 After the brackets are attached to the Managed Switch use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack as shown in Figure 2 6 35 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP 4 Figure 2 6 Mounting Managed Switch in a Rack Step6 Proceeds with the steps 4 and steps 5 of session 2 2 1 Desktop Installation to connect the network cabling and supply power to the Managed Switch 2 2 3 Installing the SFP Transceiver The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot The SFP transceivers are hot pluggable and hot swappable You can plug in and out the transceiver to from any SFP port without having to power down the Managed Switch As the Figure 2 7 appears 124 l MGB SX LX 24 1000Base SX LX LC Fiber Cable Figure 2 7 Plug in the SFP Transceiver 36 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers PLANET Managed Switch supports both Single mode and Multi mode SFP transceiver The following list of approved PLANET SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication Gigabit SFP Transceiver Modules a MGB GT SFP Port 1000Base T Module a MGB SX SFP Port 1000Base SX mini GBIC module a MGB LX SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module E MGB L50 SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 50KM E MGB L70 SFP Port 1000Base
531. y or not supply power e PoE Temperature Protection Allows user enable or disable PoE Temperature Protection e PoE Management Mode e Power Supply Budget W There are five modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power and when to shut down ports Classification mode System reserves PoE power to PD according to PoE class level Allocation mode allows user to assign PoE power to per port Consumption mode System offers PoE power accordint to PD real power consumption Priority mode System offers PoE power according to per port priority setting when power consumption has been over total power budget The default POE management mode is Consumption mode Set limit value of the total PoE port provided power to the PDs For WGSW 20160HP the available max Value is 230 e Temperature Allows setting over temperature protection threshold value It system Threshold temperature was over it then system lower total PoE power budget automatically e PoE Usage Threshold Allows setting how much PoE power budget could be limited Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Bry ee For WGSW 20160HP the total PoE power reservation from Port 1 16 is up to 230 Watts Note PD Classifications APD may be classified by the PSE based on the classification information provided by the PD The intent of
532. y decoded to 551 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP determine the priority from the 6 bit ToS field in the IP header The most significant 6 bits of the ToS field are fully decoded into 64 possibilities and the singular code that results is compared against the corresponding bit in the IPv4 ToS priority control bit 0 63 TLV is an acronym for Type Length Value ALLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information Each of these pieces of information is known as TLV TKIP is an acronym for Temporal Key Integrity Protocol It used in WPA to replace WEP with a new encryption algorithm TKIP comprises the same encryption engine and RC4 algorithm defined for WEP The key used for encryption in TKIP is 128 bits and changes the key used for each packet UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP that uses the Internet Protocol IP Unlike TCP UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams and UDP doesn t provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP U
533. y index key are lt engineid gt and lt user_name gt and it doesn t allow modify Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Add lt engineid gt lt user_name gt MD5 SHA lt auth_password gt DES lt priv_password gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all fFH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string lt user_name gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The name of None is reserved The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 md5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol The allowed length is 8 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 sha An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol The allowed length is 8 40 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt auth_password gt A string identifying the authentication pass phrase des An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES privacy protocol privacy protocol should belong to The allowed string length is 8 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt priv_password gt A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 40 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Security Switch SNMP User Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 user entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Us
534. y of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet RADIUS Accounting Statistics User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 RADIUS Accounting Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Object Description e Packet Counters RADIUS accounting server packet counter There are five receive and four transmit counters Direction Name RFC4670 Name Description Rx Responses radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS Responses packets valid or invalid received from the server Rx Malformed radiusAccClientExt The number of malformed Responses MalformedRespons RADIUS packets received es from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses Rx Bad radiusAcctClientExt The number of RADIUS Authenticators BadAuthenticators packets containing invalid authenticators received from the server Rx Unknown Types radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS UnknownTypes packets of unknown types that were received from the server on the accounting port Rx Packets Dropped radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS PacketsDropped packets that were received from the server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason Tx Requests radiusAccClientExt The
535. y one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status Page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status The Port Security Status screen in Figure 4 12 6 appears Port Security Switch Status User Module Legend User Module Name Abbr Limit Control 802 1X DHCP Snooping Voice VLAN Port Status MAC Count Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto refresh C Figure 4 12 6 Port Security Status Screen Page Screenshot 277 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP The Page includes the following fields User Module Legend The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services Object Description e User Module Name The full name of a module that may request Port Security services e Abbr A one letter abbreviation of the user module This is used in the Users column in the port status table Port Status The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the switch and a number of columns which are Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e Users Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port
536. yntax Port MaxFrame lt port_list gt lt max_frame gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt max_frame gt Port maximum frame size 1518 9600 default Show maximum frame size Default Setting 9600 Port Power Description Set or show the port PHY power mode Syntax Port Power lt port_list gt enable disable actiphy dynamic Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable all power control disable Disable all power control actiphy Enable ActiPHY power control dynamic Enable Dynamic power control Default Setting disable 368 Port Excessive Description Set or show the port excessive collision mode Syntax Port Excessive lt port_list gt discard restart Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports discard Discard frame after 16 collisions restart Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions default Show mode Default Setting Discard Port Statistics Description Show port statistics Syntax Port Statistics lt port_list gt lt command gt up down Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt command gt _ The command parameter takes the following values clear Clear port statistics packets Show packet statistics bytes Show byte statistics errors Show error statistics discards Show discard statistics fi
537. ze Rx Fragments Rx Jabber Rx Filtered Figure 4 4 3 Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Receive Total and Transmit Total Object Description e Rxand Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets e Rxand Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but 92 User s Manual of WGSW 20160HP excludes framing bits Rx and Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets Rx and Tx Multicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets Rx and Tx Pause A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue Receive Error Counters Object Description e Rx Drops The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion e Rx CRC Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors e Rx Undersize The number of short f

User's Manual of WGSW-20160HP

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents